Home

User Guide for the Tungsten™ T5 Handheld (v 1.1)

1. D lt Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier For example when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts you automatically enter the current date and time You can also create your own ShortCuts 1 Write the ShortCut stroke LR This stroke appears at the insertion point Jan 16 04 4sm w s 2 Write the ShortCut character from the following table You can write ShortCuts on the left side of the input area or across the middle 4 Done The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character represents Tungsten T5 Handheld 64 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Write ShortCuts on LEFT side or across MIDDLE of input area Entry ShortCut Entry ShortCut Date stamp ds Time stamp ts Date time stamp dts Meeting me Breakfast br Lunch lu Dinner di Tungsten T5 Handheld 65 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Entering information with the onscreen keyboard You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to enter text numbers or symbols on your handheld Key Term Entry Aniteminan application such as a contact in Contacts or an appointment in Calendar Tip You can enter text whenever you see a blinking cursor on the screen Tungsten T5 H
2. Enter a name and telephone number d Select OK 4 Done 433 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Dialing a number using speed dial Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Dial the number Speed Dial a Select Speed b Select one of the named speed dial buttons 4 Done 434 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Editing a speed dial entry Tip You can go directly to the 1 Edit Entry dialog box by tapping and holding a speed dial button 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Edit an entry a Select Speed b Select Edit Speed Dial Edit Speed Dial i Done Select Edit c Select an entry d Edit the entry e Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 435 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Connecting Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone mytungstent5 Moving Opening applications Around Contacts Using Quick Connect and Tap to Connect in Contacts to dial phone numbers Support If you re having problems with Dialer or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 436 C
3. To switch between short and full headers on either a folder screen or a message screen tap the header icon in the upper right corner of the screen Send Outbox Drafts Cancel Backing up mail databases If you want to make sure you have a backup copy of all your email you can back up all the email databases from the handheld This is useful if you download messages directly from a mail server to your handheld The backup copy is stored in the Backup folder on your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 381 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages By default your handheld is set to back up mail databases Tip In most cases your email is On your server SO you do not need to back up your email database from your handheld Tip Uncheck the Backup ALL Databases box to make synchronizing go faster Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Open the System Preferences screen a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the System tab Check the Backup ALL Databases box and then select OK 4 Done 2 Preferences i General Advanced M Backup ALL Databases 382 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly Did You Know If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server you can wirelessly synchronize email m
4. 000 33 Opening APPliCALIONS s siicsssiccsiceasscssdeienseteccvensssedenceesseccdsieassnedeveassiadenmeneancdens 34 Using Favorite Sersan enan i nteacteaaatstagcer access 34 Using Applicati S sisson eoa naaa E E EEN 35 Using INS 25 age es seentotater E e a E 36 Working with files and folders visss cccticasssccevcassecedetuassesceteeavesscuceasaascss 38 Sorting FICS sicsscsscdecsaceesescsaacescedenaessnadessecesanedcsaeassaecuuasnadd edadstiaedexsesaaee 40 Opening files and folders from within an application 41 Switching between applications cccccecseeeseeeeseeenceeeesseeneeeeesenaaees 41 Using the 5 Way Navigator ssccccisicsciststsccaasceisascceacsasesqeteenstecteesssseasiededt caeneas 41 Moving around in Favorites View c ccseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeaeeeeeees 42 Moving around in Applications View ccsccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeaeees 42 Moving around NIStSCKE GINS irises aidaa aai 43 Moving around entry SCIONS 0 ccc cece eeeeeenneeneeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeneaaaeaeeaees 44 Moving around dialog boxes cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenneaaneeaanens 44 Moving around MENU Ssss aaa aaa 45 Using CMI rain e E a a a aa 46 Using the Command Strokesin iaaa 47 Using the Command toolbar seision aatan 47 Finding informati n sesiis uier Eni iss E NEN EENren 48 FAC AG CMO CS sorisa EE a Eai 49 Chapter 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld 50 How can enter information on m
5. Did You Know After you select the folders to synchronize a connection is made to your email service provider to update the server with changes from your handheld and to have your handheld updated with changes from the server Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off 1 2 From within an IMAP email account select Get Mail Check or uncheck the Sync IMAP Folders box and then select OK Get Mail Options i Subjects Only M Sync IMAP Folders 4 Done Synchronizing handheld mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu 1 Open the Sync IMAP Folders screen a In the Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP account open the menus b Select Options and then select Sync IMAP Folders Select the folder or folders you want to synchronize from the pick list 4 Done 384 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with root folders For IMAP accounts if you want to synchronize email messages on your handheld with messages on the mail server folder you need to enter the root folder for the account on your handheld Depending on your email provider the root folder could be a single folder or it could be a subfolder of the Inbox If this is the case you need to enter inbox lt foldername gt as the root folder Check with your email provider to find out the root folder for your IMAP account
6. d Select OK 4 Done Color coding your schedule Use color coding to quickly spot different types of events For example make all your family appointments green your work appointments blue and your appointments with friends yellow Tungsten T5 Handheld 149 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Managing your color codes Each color code represents a category of events You can assign each category a name and select which color you want to assign to it Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Open Day View a Press Calendar Oss b Select the Day View icon LJ Open the Edit Categories dialog box a From Day View select the event description b Select Details c Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories Y Continued END lt SIMITEITIFIS gt category i marker pi Day View icon Time Date Alarm Location Category Business o Personal Repeat Unfiled Private WZC lg OR Cones Beee 150 CHAPTER 7 Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing Your Calendar 3 Select the color code for the category a Select New or select a category and then select Edit Edit Categories i Personal COK New Edit Pelete J b Enter or edit the category name Edit Category Enter anew category name Select color roe Ee E 20E n T c Select the color you want to give this category d Select OK and then select OK two more t
7. User Guide IPT fade palmOne Tungsten T5 Handheld Copyright and Trademark 2004 2006 palmOne Inc All rights reserved palmOne Tungsten the Tungsten logo T Stylized Addit Blazer Graffiti HotSync the HotSync logo Palm Palm Powered Palm OS the Palm logo and VersaMail are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to palmOne Inc All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of and are used to identify products or services of their respective owners palmOne Inc uses the Bluetooth wireless technology trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG Inc RealPlayer is a trademark or registered trademark of RealNetworks Inc MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing GP Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability palmOne Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide palmOne Inc assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software palmOne Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction dead battery or repairs Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss
8. 3 amp OPTIONAL Uncheck the Show Graffiti Strokes box if you don t want to have the Graffiti strokes shown as you write a character in the input area 4 Done Using the full screen writing area 1 Turn on the full screen writing area by tapping Full screen writing on the status bar When full screen writing is on the icon is highlighted When full screen writing is off the icon is dimmed 2 Open the entry where you want to enter information a Open an application b Select a record or select New Y Continued 532 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 3 Position the cursor where you want the characters to appear and do any of the following e Write lowercase Graffiti 2 letters anywhere on the left side of the screen e Write numbers anywhere on the right side of the screen e Write uppercase letters in the middle of the screen e Write the Punctuation Shift stroke before writing symbols and other special characters e Use buttons and other controls that appear on the screen by tapping and holding the button or control until it activates 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 533 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters 1 Open Graffiti 2 Preferences a Go to Applications
9. Define the custom fields a Select the contact you want and then select Edit b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Rename Custom Fields d Enter names for up to nine custom fields and then select OK 4 Done Rename Custom Fields To rename any custom field below enter a new name Spouse Name Custom 5 ry 123 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting a contact as your business card You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card You can then beam or send your business card to other handhelds To beam your business card quickly press and hold the Contacts application button for approximately two seconds 1 Press Contacts la 2 Create a business card a Select the contact you want or create a new contact with your own contact information b Open the menus c Select Business Card on the Record menu 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 124 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Copying contact information into multiple contacts Tip You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change For example if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number duplicating You can also duplicate a a fs eB the first contact simplifies entering information in the second contact in the Contacts desktop application by hi
10. Moving around menus After you open the menus you can use the 5 way to move between and to select menu items Up or Down Scrolls within the current menu list Options Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the menu bar About Note Pad Center Selects the highlighted menu item Tungsten T5 Handheld 45 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Using menus Tip Menus let you access additional features and settings They are easy to use and once you master You can also open the them in one application you know how to use them in all your applications handheld menus by tapping the application title in the upper left Open an application corner of the screen When the menus are open you can use the 5 2 Tap Menu on the status bar way to select menus and menu items A4 tof2 gt Unfilled itle 5 be Edit Options t Beam Memo b Send Memo 3 Select a menu title and then select a menu item 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 46 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Using the Command stroke Tip Most menu items also have a menu shortcut which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used on Command mode is active computers The menu shortcut appears to the right of the menu item for just a few seconds so write the menu shortcut or tap an icon on the Command toolbar quickly To use a menu shortcut first write the Graffiti 2 Command stroke on t
11. Tungsten T5 Handheld Setup Entering Information Moving Around Managing Info Sharing World Clock Customizing Installing the desktop software from the CD e Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts e Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards e Opening applications and using menus e Finding information e Synchronizing your handheld with your computer e Using File Transfer and Drive Mode to manage information between your handheld and your computer e Installing additional software from the CD e Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered devices e Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Viewing the current date and time e Setting the current date and time e Adjusting the brightness of the display e Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident 31 CHAPTER 2 Basics Maintaining e Caring for your handheld e Resetting your handheld Common Answers to frequently asked questions about your handheld Questions Tungsten T5 Handheld 32 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications In this chapter Opening applications Using the 5 way navigator Using menus Finding information Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north south and the a
12. b Select Done 4 Done Testing your new account After you finish setting up a new email account the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed You can test whether the email account is set up and working properly by getting messages Tungsten T5 Handheld 290 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you set up a synchronize only email account you need to configure this account on your computer You can t synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer unless you configure the account on your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing email accounts After you create an account you can edit or delete it or customize the account by adding ESMTP authentication selecting a specific service to connect to your network and more Editing an email account 1 Select the account you want to edit Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit a Open the menus VersaMail b Select Accounts and then select Account Setup c Select the name of the account to edit and then select Edit The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account Go through the screens by selecting Next and change the entries you want to edit on the appropriate screens 4 Done 291 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Deleting an email account When you delete an account in the VersaMail application the a
13. 3 amp OPTIONAL Select the alarm sound and volume a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Alarm Preferences c Select the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume Ay NOTE This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your handheld including the alarms you set in Calendar You can change the volume of these other sounds in Preferences d Select OK 4 Done Responding to the alarm clock When the World Clock alarm sounds select one of these three options OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen The message appears again in five minutes In the meantime an indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm Go To Cancel the reminder message and open World Clock 509 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Changing the clock display 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Open the Display Options dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Display Options 3 Select any of the following options and then select OK Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations Deselect it to display only the primary location Show Date Display the date in World Clock 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 510 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to lea
14. You can set up the VersaMail application to automatically get new email messages and download them to your handheld with the auto get feature If auto get downloads any new messages your handheld lets you know with a blinking light or a Di FE Bie You Know beep And a list with the number of new messages retrieved appears on the Reminders screen If more than one scheduled auto get The auto get feature downloads only the first 3KB of each message You can select the More happens at the same time button on the message screen to download the entire message for example for two separate email accounts Auto get recognizes any filter criteria you set up for downloading messages Messages that don t auto get retrieves meet these filter criteria are not downloaded during an auto get You need to turn off all filters and messages in the manually retrieve these messages following order NOTE In order for auto get mail to work your handheld must be able to make periodic 1 Any past due auto get connections to the Internet through your Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone or for example a retry of an a Bluetooth access point If your handheld is not within range of a Bluetooth device that allows it earlier failed auto get to connect to the Internet auto get mail does not take place 2 Current retrievals according to the order of Scheduling auto get mail email accounts 1 2 You can set up differe
15. computer go to www real com Tungsten T5 Handheld 221 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks In this chapter Some of the most successful people in Creati the world are also the busiest When reating a task l M asked how they manage to do it all J o e busy people usually say I make lists Marking a task complete The Tasks application on your go Deleting tasks handheld is the perfect place to make a list of the things you need to do oO Customizing your Tasks list Working with Tasks on your computer Related topics are aks Benefits of Tasks e Set priorities e Track deadlines e Stay focused Tungsten T5 Handheld 222 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey Creating a task Tip If no task is currently 1 selected you can create a new task by writing Graffiti 2 characters in the input area 2 Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 Create a task A _ MEU i category Tip a Select New Add a note to a task Select the Note button b Enter a description of the task enter the note text and then select Done Due date Long description New task Priority number Did You Kn You can organize your tasks by filing them into ote button categories You can also mark tasks as private to hide them from prying 3 eyes amp OPTIONAL Assign a priority and due date a Select the priority number and then from the pick list select a number 1 5
16. CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages To view the Handheld Settings Overview screen under the selected account name click Handheld Settings Gi versallal Contiguration FOr User Joe Saduaky Tg File Help Joe Sadusky gt Hsk VersaMail A E Speakeasy ey Mail Client Sync Setup Handheld Settings Overview Speakeasy Advanced Sync Options E E Work Email 4 VersaMail Server Protocol POP Attachment Conversion Display Name Joe Sadusky E mail Address jsadusky speakeasy net Incoming mail server address mail speakeasy net 7 Incoming mail server requires APOP No Outgoing mail server address mail speakeasy net Outgoing mail server requires ESMTP No gt i x Available Accounts 3 Configured Accounts 1 Active Accounts 1 VersaMail conduit shortcuts You can use the icons on the toolbar to perform certain tasks quickly such as saving account configuration settings lel Save account settings Saves any changes you make to an account Adda new account You are prompted to enter the account name and protocol Delete an account You are prompted to select the account to delete from a drop down list amp Quick account reference Lists all accounts and shows whether they are active and the date they were last synchronized e Help Displays the Help window with complete online help Tungsten T5 Handheld 357 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Excluding one or
17. Insert the CD into your computer new Palm Desktop software all of your information transfers 2 automatically to the new WINDOWS ONLY software s Follow the onscreen instructions If you re upgrading select the username that you assigned to your old handheld Tip Take the interactive MAC ONLY tutorial on the CD to learn how to create an Double click the CD icon and then double click palmOneSoftware pkg appointment set up your handheld s features for photos video and music b Done ae During installation you re asked to connect your computer to your handheld See Step 4 Did You Know IT managers can set up a profile if they want to install the same set of information on several handhelds Tungsten T5 Handheld 7 CHAPTER 1 Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization select the username of the handheld you want to synchronize and click OK Key Term Third party application A software program that runs on a Palm Powered device but is not created or supported by palmOne Inc Tip If you have problems with your new handheld after you synchronize you may need to update your third party applications Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Step 4 Connecting your handheld to your computer In this step you connect your handheld to your computer and synchronize for the first time Synchronizing simply means that any informa
18. One or two line column view Select the Show pick list and then select one line or two line view Default is two line Columns shown Check the box under the Show pick list for each column you want to show The column options change depending on whether you choose a one line or a two line view Defaults are Sender Date and Subject Font Tap the Font field Select each pick list in the Select Font dialog box Font Size Style and select the option you want Default is Palm 9 Plain Read and unread message color Select the Read and Unread pick lists and then select the color you want for each type of message Default for both is black Y Continued 320 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Select OK 4 If you selected one line summary view in step 2 change the size of columns in the message list a Tap the column divider b Drag the column divider to change the width of the column 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld Speakeas o BS revised instruc Les Ne o BS these are funny Travis o M review comme Angela M cool site Travi o M ALC Account Fo monica Column divider 321 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Moving messages between folders Tip You can move one or more email messages between folders You can use the 5 way to move a single message Select the message you 1 wantto move press Right to open the Message In the Inbox or on an
19. Photos amp Videos FI Far30 mp3 472K FI Move20 mp3 394K gt FI SportsTimeTonight2 316K e Select a file or folder to open it The file opens in the corresponding application for example Documents for Word Excel or PowerPoint files NOTE If your handheld contains an application that can open a file a file specific icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list If a generic icon appears to the left of a file name you cannot open the file on your handheld e Select the Folder Up icon W to move up one level of folders e Select the pick list at the top of the files screen to view and jump to the top level folder and any subfolders e Select the top level folder on the files screen to move up one level of folders NOTE Files always displays these four folders at the top of the folder list Applications Documents Music and Photos amp Videos Place your applications and files in the correct folder so that you can easily locate them 37 CHAPTER 3 Did You Know If you select Open With only applications that can open the file you have selected are displayed You can choose to make the application you select the default application for opening this file type Tip You can also highlight a file or folder and then press Right on the 5 way to open the menu of tasks Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Working with files and folders You can work with the
20. The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose where to store your info When you buy a new card give it a name that helps you remember what s on the card You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card Tip You can also use the Files 1 application to rename your card 2 Tungsten T5 Handheld Go to Applications and select Card Info amp Open the Rename Card dialog Rename Card box New Card Name a Open the menus b Select Rename Card on the Card menu Enter the new name for the card and then select Rename 4 Done 574 lip If you use acard reader to view your card ona computer the file names may differ from the names you see on your handheld Did You Know Some applications such as Media let you copy or move info between your handheld and an expansion card See the information on each application for details Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Copying applications to an expansion card 1 2 Insert the expansion card and then go to Applications Open the Copy dialog box Copy From Handheld a Open the menus To BMy Card 13 7M Free Bgnd Service 37K FT DGraphConverter amp 163K b Select Copy on the App menu Documents 342K DSLib Font Library GraphicsLibrary LibInstall Select the application to copy N NOTE A lock appears next to
21. Tip NOTE You must install the software installation CD before you can synchronize Need more help with a e Make sure the USB sync cable is connected synchronizing your securely handheld Open f Palm Desktop software e Make sure the date on your computer matches the go to the Help menu and date on your handheld select HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide e Read the HotSync log for the user account for which you are synchronizing WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager G icon in the Windows taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen Make sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it If not click it OBLI 237P NOTE if you don t see the HotSync Manager icon click Start in the Windows taskbar and then select Programs Go to the palmOne program group and select HotSync Manager MAC ONLY e Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled Open the Palm folder and double click the HotSync Manager icon On the HotSync Controls tab be sure Enabled is selected If it is not click it e Disconnect the USB sync cable from your computer and then reconnect the cable and restart your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 593 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions When I synchronize nothing happens on Palm Desktop software and my handheld times out e Perform a soft reset e Make sure that HotSync Manager is running on your computer e Make a copy of the folder containing your information This folder
22. Tungsten T5 Handheld 394 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know Outgoing SMS message 4 i amp OPTIONAL Select Details and set the following parameters settings may depend on the service offered by Leave Messages on Phone Indicates whether messages are deleted from your your SMS carrier phone after you download them to your handheld To keep messages on your phone after you transfer them to your handheld select this box Return Receipt Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices To receive receipt confirmation notices select Requested Expires Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox Select from the following options 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week 2 Weeks 1 Month and Max Time Message Center Indicates whether your handheld obtains your mobile phone service provider s Message Center number directly from the phone or whether you need to enter the number manually If your phone is already configured to use SMS you do not need to change this setting 5 Select OK twice 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 395 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Related Topics My Handheld Click the link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus mytungstents Categories Organizing messages by arranging
23. Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a protocol designed to ensure that information you send or receive over a network or the Internet is secure and authentic The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of email messages that you send or receive When you set up an account in the VersaMail application you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming and outgoing mail IMPORTANT For most email providers that support SSL you must select SSL for both incoming and outgoing mail If you select just one or the other your messages cannot be sent or received successfully Keep the following in mind regarding SSL e If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook Outlook Express or Eudora then SSL is supported in the VersaMail conduit when you synchronize with that account as well e You cannot use auto get mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use an SSL connection Tungsten T5 Handheld 385 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Entering Info Cutting copying and pasting text from an email message mytungstent5 Moving Using the Graffiti 2 command stroke in email messages Around Managing Info Dow
24. c Select Beam in the App menu d Select the application you want to beam N NOTE You cannot beam an application that has a lock icon next to the application size Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld Beam From v Device Memos 60K Note Pad amp 144K Palm PIMs Support 5K Pics amp Videos 459K Prefs 446 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information 2 Beam the application a Select Beam b When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at the IR port of the other handheld D A IR port 3 Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 447 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Other ways of sharing information Here are some other ways of sharing information e Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot and view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm Powered device e Copy information such as a photo or video from your handheld to your computer or from your computer to your handheld by synchronizing or using File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac Tungsten T5 Handheld 448 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories Synchronizing Sharing information by synchronizing your ha
25. ccccccccceccececaeeeeeeeneneeseseseeeeseeeseeess 163 Viewing your monthly schedule cccececceeeecececeeeeeeseeeeseseseseeeeeeeess 164 Viewing a yearly calendar ccccccccececceccececesaeaeeeesuenseseseeeseeeeeeeseeeess 165 Finding events that overlap cccccccccecececeseeseseseessseseseeseseeeeeeeneeeeeeees 166 CUSTOMIZING yo r calendar jisicisescdvstavecs cocesaud socevewedessaiesavaaedevevsinnecseeenienced 166 Customizing display options for your calendar ccccccceeeeeeeseeees 167 Setting alarm and time OPtiOns c cscccccccececeecessessssseeeceeeneeeeeess 170 Working with Calendar On your COMPUTE ccecceeeeeeeeeeeseseeaeeeseeees 172 Related tO DiCSwis icccdidiicccscetea dicate derdvesaeseatancvcwedus scuetannraoetaasianasataverseendesvasdandy 173 Chapter 8 Managing Your Office Files c ccccssseee 174 BQ Met its civevenissnciesiaedbicavesddaigivandcenevduhdsisnctsnescaedescauduaneveudieisunvandaeseveanis 174 How can create and manage Office fileS ccccseeeeeessseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 175 Opening files from within Documents cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeess 176 Related TOPICS sisir aaa aa a A Na EE 177 Chapter 9 Viewing Photos and Videos 178 Supported file types cccccecessseececeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeseceeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeseeseeeseeeeeeeess 179 Viewing Photos OF VIDEOS ouside aede ga toda aidi 180 Viewing a photo or video in the Thumbnail View
26. 371 Mail Service pick list 283 Mail Services pick list 284 mail See e mail maintenance information 578 Make Default check box 93 Manual synchronization option 86 manually locking handhelds 477 480 marking information as private 469 masking private entries 468 470 471 math calculators 27 462 Maximum Message Size option 287 353 MCI connections 552 Media desktop application 78 Media application backing up information in 28 benefits of 178 displaying multimedia files 191 193 195 196 198 199 displaying photos or videos 180 opening 180 184 186 188 189 201 organizing photos and videos 191 overview 178 201 related topics for 202 troubleshooting 202 Media icon 26 memory 113 423 589 memory button Calculator 463 memory cards 188 576 memory clear button Calculator 463 memory recall button Calculator 463 memos See also notes Memos application adding contact information to 126 238 backing up 28 categorizing 243 creating 237 238 239 deleting 241 displaying 239 editing 239 240 exchanging 243 keeping private 243 469 organizing 240 243 saving 238 241 selecting 43 sending as attachments 243 transferring to PCs 240 Memos application categorizing information in 491 getting help with 242 importing information for 107 marking entries as private 469 opening 27 238 523 overview 237 related topics for 243 reordering memos lists 240 selecting memos 239 transferring information to 68 troubleshooting 243 6
27. 551 554 phone numbers 430 432 434 554 URLs 398 entry box 25 66 eraser 245 eReader 30 error messages 597 errors Xxi ESD electrostatic discharge 620 621 ESMTP authentication 290 295 376 Essential Software folder 111 Eudora accounts 350 Euro in onscreen keyboard 67 Event Details dialog box 154 events See also appointments adjusting for location 525 archiving 156 157 158 beaming 445 categorizing 139 173 445 changing descriptions 154 changing untimed 141 color coding 139 149 152 conflicting 168 contact information and 120 creating multi day 145 creating untimed 140 145 defined 138 defining repeating 142 143 deleting 156 158 displaying 152 169 170 entering notes for 146 147 extending beyond midnight 145 finding overlapping 166 marking as private 139 173 rescheduling 154 155 163 scheduling 138 140 170 setting alarms for 153 171 sharing 173 types of 138 viewing free time for 168 viewing specific time for 169 Excel files 26 276 creating and viewing 175 transferring to handheld 78 exchanging applications 31 577 event records 173 expansion cards 577 files 255 276 from outside sources 17 information 20 68 79 107 memos 243 messages 396 notes from Note Pad 253 task records 236 exclamation points in Tasks list 234 expansion card slot 20 587 633 expansion cards adding applications to 28 29 577 battery life and 587 beaming from 446 benefits of 568 copying ap
28. Chim Fel jay Jun Month Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec b Select the arrows to select the EM TITN T current year TRN 11 12 13 14 15 16 c Select the current month Day EDH E d Select the current date Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 502 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings 4 Set the time a Select the Set Time box b Select the hour and minute Hour Set Time boxes and then select the arrows to change them Minute v c Select AM or PM and then select OK 5 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 503 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings iID If you have friends family or colleagues in another time zone select a city in their zone as your secondary location When you need to contact them you can easily check to see what time it is where they are Tungsten T5 Handheld Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the pick list next to one of the secondary locations nei v San Francisco Sat Dec 25 2004 10 02 pm m Pick list Sun 6 02am 3 Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location If you need more choices modify the locations list 4 Done 504 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Modifying the locations list Tip You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use m
29. If you have a POP POP accounts IMAP accounts email account the VersaMail Work Email ti VersaMail application Incoming Mail Options Incoming Mail Options M Get unread mail ONLY M Get unread mail ONLY downloads all messages O Delete messages on the O Delete messages on the from the server server when they are server when they are deleted in VersaMail deleted in VersaMail regardless of whether M Leave mail on server e g you have read them for to view on desktop later Port Number 110 Port Number 143 example on your desktop O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Secure Connection SSL or onthe web and Maximum Message Size S Maximum Message Size 5 regardless of whether this box is checked a Select any of the following If you choose to leave Get unread mail IMAP account only Select Get unread mail ONLY to mail on the server and download only unread mail to your handheld If you don t choose this option for example read and you select Get amp Send all of your messages on your provider s mail server messages from your are downloaded to your Inbox including messages you have already read Yahoo account on your handheld the messages are still visible the next time you check your Delete messages on server To delete messages on your provider s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application check the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail box Inbox on Yahoo
30. If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems check with your service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed l am having problems sending and receiving email e Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly e Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to send and receive email on a wireless handheld Several providers like Hotmail do not offer this option at all My auto get mail is not working e If auto get is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected the auto get fails e If you are attempting an auto get over a network you must be in range of a network access point for the auto get to work e The auto get feature may not work with your specific VPN connection It doesn t work for SSL connections or if you have set up the security preferences on your handheld to encrypt databases on the handheld e Your handheld must be able to make periodic connections to the Internet through your Bluetooth mobile phone or a Bluetooth access point If your handheld is not within range of a Bluetooth device that allows it to connect to the Internet auto get mail does not take place
31. Install Did You Know Your login scripts can also use non ASCII and literal characters Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Creating login scripts A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server for example your corporate network or your ISP A login script is associated with a specific service profile created in Network Preferences A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log in to the corporate servers from your handheld using a phone modem or network connection The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it It automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your handheld and the corporate servers You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box Some commands such as Send require you to supply additional information If the command requires additional info a field appears to the right of the command where you can enter the info 1 Open Network Preferences Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 6 Password Connection IR to Nokia 6310i c Select Network Phone Y Continued 557 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Open the Login Script dialog box a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a scr
32. This is the service you use to connect to the Internet such as AOL CompuServe or Earthlink Did You Know You cannot rename or delete the preset connection settings Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Connecting your handheld to other devices Connection Preferences let you connect your handheld to other devices You can use preset connection settings modify the preset settings or create your own connection settings from scratch The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications you ve added to your handheld For example you can create a connection between the IR port of your handheld and a modem so that you can dial in to your ISP or corporate network The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port Some infrared phones can act as modems To set up a phone connection you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services and a driver for your phone Check www palmOne com for available phone drivers or contact the phone manufacturer 00800 Changing the preset connection settings The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to a PC Handheld connection setting You can similarly edit other connections or settings 1 Open Connection Preferences aasi Gonnection Available Connections a Go to Applications AEE IR to a PC Handheld b Select Prefs amp c Select Conne
33. To rename or delete an album open the Album a Open the menus menu and select Manage Albums Select the album b Select Album and then select Manage Albums you want and then select Rename or Delete Y Continued depending on what you want to do Tungsten T5 Handheld 191 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Drag the stylus across multiple photos and or videos to add or remove them all at once Jid You Know If you remove a photo or video from an album it is moved to the Unfiled category The photo or video is not deleted from your handheld or the expansion card Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Create an album a Select whether to create the album on your handheld device or on an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot b Select New enter the name of the new album and select OK c Select OK on the Manage Albums screen Do one of the following To add photos or videos to a new album Select the photos or videos you want on the Organize Album screen To add or remove photos or videos from an existing album From the Thumbnail or List View select the album you want from the pick list in Manage Albums i Device Organize Vacation Tap to select or deselect Select to add Select to remove the upper right corner and then select Manage Albums E Select a photo or video without a plus sign to add it to the album select a photo or video with a plus sign to
34. a Select Details Date Alarm b Select the Repeat pick list and Location select Daily until Category w Unfiled Repeat Daily until 11 25 06 c Select the year month and date Private O when the event ends OK Cancel Delete B d Select OK 4 Done 145 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Entering a location or a note for an event Enter a description of the event s location such as a restaurant a conference room or your friend s house Enter a note such as dial in info for a conference call or directions to a location 1 Press Calendar Oss 2 Enter the event and then select the event description amp OPTIONAL Enter the Event Details location Time 3 Date T a Select Details Alarm O Location b Select the Location field and Category Personal enter a description of the Repeat Daily until 11 25 06 location Private O OR ones Deets E NV Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 146 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 amp OPTIONAL Enter the note Family reunion a Select Note 2 b Enter the note text c Select Done 5 Select OK 4 Done The location name and a note icon appear next to the event description in the Agenda View and in the Day View Tungsten T5 Handheld 147 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event with a time zone IMPORTANT Time zones only work if you are synchronizing with Outlook Palm Desktop software d
35. all of your existing information both in program memory and on the internal drive should appear e Conserve battery life by doing any of the following e Adjust the screen brightness Reduce the Auto off setting Prevent your handheld from turning on by accident Stop music or video playback when not in use Respond to or cancel alerts promptly Set the Bluetooth functionality to off when not in use Minimize use of the expansion slot Tungsten T5 Handheld 5 CHAPTER 1 Before You Begin Be sure to fully charge your handheld as described in the preceding procedure Tip After you set up your handheld review the Quick Tour on your handheld and take the tutorial on the CD to learn the basics Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Step 2 Turning on your handheld for the first time 1 Unplug the USB sync cable from your handheld Power button 2 Press the power button 3 Slide the stylus out of the slot 4 Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen and follow the onscreen instructions to set up your handheld 4 Done CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Step 3 Installing your software Did You Know When you upgrade 1 there s no need to delete the old desktop software NOTE oo f f first When you install the N You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a computer running Windows 2000 XP or Mac OS X
36. appear in the Quick Install list Unzip the file with a file compression utility such as WinZip and then add the unzipped files to Quick Install receive an authentication error when try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point Make sure you entered the correct username and password for the selected network service profile in the Network Preferences screen When I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point it connects but nothing happens e Make sure that Network is selected in the HotSync Manager menu on your computer e Contact your system administrator to make sure your network computer is properly set up want to synchronize my computer with more than one handheld If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one handheld each handheld should have a unique name Synchronizing more than one handheld with the same username causes unpredictable results and potentially loss of your personal information Assign a username to your handheld the first time you synchronize If you are synchronizing with Outlook make sure the right profile is selected for the applications you want to synchronize in HotSync Manager From the Palm Desktop home screen click the HotSync Manager and then select Custom Tungsten T5 Handheld 598 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions File Transfer Drive Mode I can t move or copy files using palmOne File Transfer WINDOWS ONLY e
37. can receive email fine but am having problems sending email If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them try these steps in turn e Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless handheld Several providers do not offer this option at all other providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 607 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions e Turn on ESMTP Many services require authenticated access to use their SMTP servers or ESMTP e Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail Many ISPs such as cable companies require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers In this case you can almost always receive email from these accounts but if you want to send email you must send it through another server can t download any messages If the program memory on your handheld fills up you cannot download any more messages to your handheld Delete some messages to free up program memory and try downloading again am unable to synchronize messages Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your handheld and your computer For example if the account is set up on your handheld to use the POP protocol check the HotSync Manager on your computer to make sure that POP is selected as the protocol for that account My vCard or vCal email attachment isn t f
38. ciiiecsscccessessscccsieessceceeesdseecceedsseencevsssecencatea sens 535 Changing ShortCuts cise cacceisscccssasssedcvecesenedcadeaasaesccuessaes condabbeavexexsecaeds 537 Correcting problems With tapping cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 538 Selecting sound settings cccccccsssseeeecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeesseenaeeess 539 Entering your Owner information ecscceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeeees 540 Conserving battery POWER tsccess scedcccexssanzendes aged naa addaa senteanceen aeeacnvareeads 541 Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident 541 Selecting power saving Settings cccccceseeeseeeeeseeeneeeeeseenaeeeesennaaes 542 Connecting your handheld to other devices seeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 544 Changing the preset CONNECTION Settings ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenees 544 Creating your OWN CONNECTION Settings c eee ee eee eeeeeeeteete eee eeeeeetees 546 Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone ceeeeeeeeeees 549 Customizing network SettiNGS siisii niasa 550 Setting UP a service profile cccceeceeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseenaneeeesennaes 550 Connecting tO VOU SERVICE osmina aaa 553 Adding details to a service profile ceeecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeensenees 554 Deleting a Service Profile ccccccessseeceeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeseneeess 556 Creating lo gim SGPiS sisdaceesssccceneansea
39. current web address URL is not fully visible Use the Page Properties dialog box to view the full URL Open the Page menu select Page and then select Page Info Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the Find field a Go to the web page you want to search b Open the menus c Select Page and then select Find Text on Page Search the web page Find Text on Page a Type the text you want to find b Select Find Wrap Search 4 Done 401 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Quickly jumping to a page The action bar icons allow you to quickly move from page to page Following a link Many web pages contain underlined links which are text or pictures that when clicked take you to another web page or to another part of the same page TAE bane f Select the link to go to Yahoo FinanceSign In New User Sign Up another web page Finance Home Help Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited No matter where you navigate on the Internet you can always return to your home page quickly or return to a page you have recently visited Select the back and forward arrows to go to previous pages Select the Home icon to go gt DB OAH to your home page Tungsten T5 Handheld 402 Tip You can change your font size for easier viewing Did You Know In the Optimized mode use the navigator
40. organize and open files and folders on your handheld s internal flash drive Manage your schedule from single entries like lunch with a friend to repeating and extended events like weekly meetings and holidays Even color code your schedule by category Store names and addresses phone numbers email and website addresses even add a birthday alarm or a contact s photo Create view and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files View and manage PowerPoint files View and organize photos and videos Carry music create playlists and listen to music on your handheld This application has a companion desktop application that you can install from the CD Windows only Both Mac and Windows users can use RealPlayer on the handheld Set up wireless connections to a mobile phone network or computer for sending and receiving information Send receive and manage email messages wirelessly using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld or by synchronizing with your Windows computer Browse your favorite sites on the web using the built in Bluetooth technology on your handheld 26 CHAPTER 2 Basics Tungsten T5 Handheld SMS Note Pad jt Addit B Calculator B Quick Tour amp Card Info BOs Dialer amp Expense 8 HotSync Pens Prefs O World Clock Drive Mode Send and receive short text SMS messages using the built in Bluetooth technology on your handheld Stay on top of your to do
41. 1 indicates the most important task b Select the due date and select a date from the list or select Choose Date to select a date from the calendar 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the task Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Tungsten T5 Handheld 223 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey Setting an alarm Before You Begin Create a task and assign it 1 a due date A task must have a due date before Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 you can set an alarm 2 Open the Set Alarm dialog box Tip You can customize the a Select the task you want to assign an alarm to alarm sound for your tasks in the Task b Select Details Preferences dialog box c Select the Alarm box Did You Know z 9 Set Alarm When you set an alarm a aaah Beare Alarm little alarm clock appears anid r 3 days earlier i i 3 to the right of the task eich pia P ee Due Date v Wed5 10 06 y Alarm Time description pipsu gt Alarm Repeat Next alarm Private Sun 5 7 06 o OK rea Saee m MOLCOUAMaWN gt Cancel Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 224 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey 3 Set the alarm a Check the Alarm box b Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound c Select the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds d Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Scheduling a repeating task standard interval T
42. 138 Scheduling an event without a Start time cecececseeesessteeeeeeeeeaes 140 Scheduling a repeating event standard interval assesses 142 Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval ccseeeeeeeenees 143 Tungsten T5 Handheld vi Scheduling an event that is longer than a day csscccceesesteeeeeenees 145 Entering a location or a note for an event eeeeeeteeesseeeeeeeseeeneeeess 146 Scheduling an event With a time ZONE ccccceeeeeeeseessnstseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 148 Color coding your schedule cccccccceececcececeseeeeeesseseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeesenenes 149 Managing your color codes ccccececcecceceeeceececaeanaesseenseseeseseeeeeeeeess 150 Assigning a color code tO an event cccccccccececseeesesenseseseseseeeeseeeeeeess 152 Settingan glati sssaaa aa aa a A E AE cus 153 Rescheduling AN event ssssssssssssrrrsrrsrsrsrssssesssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 154 Deleting eVeN S siiicar 156 Deleting a specific event sccsseesssssececceeecessessessesseeaesaeeeeeeessessessaes 156 Deleting all your old events cccceccsesssesseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensaeaes 158 Checking your schedule sssssssssssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnssnnsnsnsnsnnn nnmnnn 159 Viewing your appointments and tasks together 0cceceeeeeeees 159 Viewing your daily schedule cccceccccececcececaeeeeesenaneneeseseeeseeeeeeeess 161 Viewing your weekly schedule
43. 497 displaying information about 17 112 displaying list of 516 downloading 95 97 335 exchanging 31 577 finding information in 48 importing information from external 107 incompatible 611 installation prerequisites for 111 installing 28 77 571 marking private entries in 469 moving around in 33 not finding 26 590 opening 34 80 523 571 organizing 49 491 related topics for 49 removing categories in 493 removing connections for 546 623 renaming categories 492 setting preferences for 521 525 setting primary location for 501 setting secondary locations for 504 soft resets and 588 specifying connections for 544 switching between 10 41 571 594 synchronizing 84 88 596 transferring information from 79 transferring to expansion cards 96 transferring to handheld 28 29 77 78 uninstalling 589 updating information for 88 updating third party 8 upgrading 111 Applications View icon on status bar 22 moving around 42 opening applications in 35 using 35 using the 5 way 42 Applications view displaying icons on 590 appointments See also Calendar application events adding to calendar 138 adjusting for location 525 color coding 149 combining tasks with 137 displaying 162 163 164 entering from Outlook 10 594 removing from calendar 156 saving 139 scheduling 138 139 setting alarms for 508 Tungsten T5 Handheld setting duration of 139 setting timeframes for 170 sharing 20 viewing duration of 16
44. CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Bookmarking your favorite pages Key Term Bookmark Apointertoa web page The actual page is not stored only the URL Also called a Favorite in some browsers Tip You can set your bookmark list as your start page Tungsten T5 Handheld Bookmarking your favorite web pages allows you to quickly return to those pages Adding a bookmark 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page that you want to bookmark Open the Bookmark Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Add Bookmark on the Page menu amp OPTIONAL Change the bookmark name description or URL Name New Bookmark Y Continued e 405 Tip You can also view your list of bookmarks by selecting View Bookmarks from the Page menu Did You Know A saved page is displayed like a bookmarked page except that at the top of the page appears the text Page saved on date size k Tungsten T5 Handheld 5 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Select OK 4 Done Viewing a bookmarked or saved page Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in the Bookmarks View Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper right corner of the bookmark 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Select the Bookmark icon B Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page you Bookmarks palmOne palmOne want to visit Mobile Portal Downloads Mapquest Maps
45. Done Availabl n Mean Ar Brightness slider Tungsten T5 Handheld 520 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Changing screen colors Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications 1 Open Color Theme Preferences Preferences Color Theme Select a Color Theme a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Color Theme 2 Select a theme and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 521 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Changing handedness orientation of the screen The Handedness preferences enable you to select right hand or left hand orientation when you rotate the screen into landscape mode 1 Open Handedness Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Handedness 2 Select your orientation Preferences Handedness Select your orientation for 4 Done handwriting with Graffiti 2 Left Handed Right Handed Tungsten T5 Handheld 522 CHAPTER 25 Tip To restore all the buttons to the original palmOne settings select Default Did You Know You can assign input area icons to different applications also Tap and hold the input area icon and select an application from the dialog box Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Tired of going to Applications View to open an application you use frequently Use the B
46. Expenses Adding an expense Did You Know Expense is not just for 1 business Use it to help plan your budget by figuring out how much you spend each month on 2 things like entertainment and dining out a Select New Go to Applications and select Expense amp Enter the expense Tip b Enter the amount of the expense Add an expense simply by writing the first letter of the expense type For example entering D opens a dinner item with today s date c Select the Expense type pick list and select a type N NOTE You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item Expense Expense type To enable this feature on type pick list your handheld open the Options menu and select Preferences Check the automatic fill box Tip Change the date of an expense by selecting the date of the item Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 451 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Tip Add extra information to 3 your expense items Select the item and select Details Then select Note Enter the details of the expense a Select Details Receipt Details and enter the b Select each field where you want jaa 7 net information to enter information and enter it Payment v nfied Currency v Tip Category Select a category to sort Vendor Select Lookup in the your expenses Attendees list to pull names from Contacts Type Enter the expense type Did You Know Payment Select how
47. Folders and then create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones c Select OK The filter appears in the Filters list 4 Done 364 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Turning filters on and off A filter that is turned on applies to all subsequent downloads of email until you deselect it More than one filter can be in effect at once Before you download email be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you don t want Filters that are turned on 1 f executeintheorderin Open the Filters dialog box acer which they appear on the i ee eae a In the Inbox or on another Filters list Move filters up M 7 Quotes dd he li folder screen open the O 7 Sales and down the list to menus M Seminar ensure that they execute A Retri ilif the send in the correct order by b Select Options and then address contains onlinebr aket selecting the pick list to select Filters The Filters OR the receiver address the left of the filter name dialog box appears with the Aea EnS OS filters you created Tip If you don t want a filter to Y Continued apply to any downloads at all be sure to uncheck the filter under both Connected and Synchronize Tungsten T5 Handheld 365 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Tungsten T5 Handheld Turn filters on or off a Select the pick list in the upper left corner and select one of the following Connected Applies a filter to mes
48. Francisco might replace Sacramento When the word you want appears select the next field Address You can enter up to three addresses each containing five fields Addr City State Zip Code and Country You can designate an address as work W home H or other O By default the first address is designated as work amp OPTIONAL Add a photo a Select the Picture box b Select a picture from palmOne Media c Select Done Y Continued 119 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip If you want a reminder 4 PTIONAL Add about a birthday check amp OPTIO a CEEA Untied birthday the Reminder box enter the number of days a Select the Birthday box before the birthday that you want to see the b Use the left and right arrows reminder and then select to move to and select the birth OK year Hold down either arrow Custom 1 to scroll quickly through the Did You Know years Birthdays you enter in Contacts appear as untimed events in Calendar If you update the birthday in Contacts 5 it automatically updates in Calendar as well c Select the month and date After you finish entering all the information you want select Done 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the contact Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Tungsten T5 Handheld 120 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Entering additional contact information The Contact Edit screen displays ce
49. Handheld 379 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tungsten T5 Handheld Changing email header details When viewing a message in any folder you can change the view of the message header The email header options are as follows e Short header Shows sender s name or address From field and subject line Subj field Tap icon to switch to Inbox 4 405 P full header From Travis Washington lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site check this out www futurefacing com There are now three new levels of Full header Shows the following e Sender s name or email address From field Subject line Subj field Date message was composed sent or received Date field Size of message including any attachments Size field Recipient s name or email address To field Tap icon to switch to From Travis Washington short header lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site Date Thu Feb 5 20045 24am Size 501 bytes To joe jmswordsmith com check this out www futurefacing com 380 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing Short header shows the To and Subject fields only full header shows the To cc bcc and Subject fields Tap to switch to full header Tap to switch to New M pcb bball short header New Message Can we make it 1 30 Can we make it 1 307
50. IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program s Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement Software Download Available Palm Desktop software is supplied on a CD If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer you can download Palm Desktop software from www palmOne com intl support v 1 1 Table of Contents About This Guide cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeenees XX Tips for viewing this QUICG ccceceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeae eae eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaaaaeaees XX What s tf this guide cescicociesiiintiesticssediesiactieds a aoi ea xxi Step by step INStrUCTIONS cceeeceeceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeseeenaes xxi EIK Sirosen r a EE ides aa aE xxi DEDANS ao aa E E E E xxii Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 1 Whats mthe DOR encobinsnorinee n e E E e 2 System requirements ccecesseceeceeneeeeeeeeaeeeeceeaaeeeeeeceaeeeeseceaeeeessenaeeeseeeenas 2 Step 1 Charging your handheld cccccsssececcssseeeeeesenneeeseseneeeeseenaeeeesseenas 4 What you should know about your handheld s battery 5 Step 2 Turning on your handheld for the first time c sccceeeesteeeeeeeenes 6 Step 3 Installing your software cccececssseceeceenneeeeeeeeaeeeeseecaeeeeseenaaeeeeseeenas 7 Step 4 Connecting your ha
51. Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Mail Servers c Select the Account pick list and then select Edit Accounts d Select the name of the account whose settings you want to manage and then select OK Y Continued Mail Servers GA Account v PARNE Yahoo Work Email Username Speakeasy Edit Accounts Protocol v O Always connect using 368 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Your username is typically the first part of 2 Onithe Mail selversscreen do Manis envers a any of the following Account e Yohoo your email address p i 1 rotocol v POP which appears before the Protocol Select the Protocol pick EA symbol list and then select POP or IMAP Password i Did You Know Username Enter a new username f The VersaMail application O Always connect using provides strong 128 bit Password Tap the Password box AES encryption for your and enter a new password in the password Password Entry dialog box Tip Service for this account Check the Always connect using box select the i 5 Service pick list and then select the connection type you want Select a service for this p ype y account only if you want it to be different from the default service you use to connect to a network for your handheld Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 369 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Manage address and server se
52. Mist Up arrow Done Remove Add a Down arrow Select Done and then select Done again 4 Done 214 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Playing songs from a playlist 1 On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music 2 Select a song from a playlist Electric Angel f Electric Angel Awakening a Tap Playlists Electric Angel Falling Angel Electric Angel Gather The Women Electric Angel Through The Mist b Select the playlist you want to play c Select the first song you want to play 4 Done Your handheld plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the song you selected After it plays the last song in the list it stops Tungsten T5 Handheld 215 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Editing a playlist 1 On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music D 2 Open the playlist you want to edit a Tap Playlists b Select the playlist you want to edit c Select Edit Electric Angel Ambient Electric Angel Awakening Classic Rock Electric Angel Falling Angel Electric Angel Electric Angel Gather The Women Jazz Electric Angel Through The Mist Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 216 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music 3 Select Edit and do any of the following Delete a song Select a song and tap Remove to delete the song from the playlist Add a song Tap Add check a song s box and then tap Done Move a song Select a song and selec
53. On the bottom right of the screen are five icons representing the first five bookmark pages Select the bookmark page icon to display the page You can also Bookmark press the arrow to go to the next my 2314 5 b page arrow page 4 Done Search Bookmark page icons 406 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Editing information about a bookmark or saved page You can edit or delete any bookmark or saved page that does not have a lock icon next to it Tip You can clean up your bookmark list by deleting old bookmarks or saved pages you no longer use Select the bookmark select Edit and then select Delete Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Select the Bookmark icon B Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box a Select the Bookmark icon E b Open the menus c Select Edit Bookmarks in the Bookmarks menu Edit the bookmark information a Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page that you want to edit b Change the bookmark or saved page name description or address URL by selecting the appropriate option Select OK 4 Done 407 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Arranging the bookmark list The web browser includes ten pages so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages ina logical fashion For example you can store travel links on one page stock links on another and business links on a third page 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Go to t
54. Protocol pick list If you are synchronizing your corporate email and your corporate mail server does not use IMAP select POP If neither of the above is true select IMAP Direct connection to Internet POP mail server Select the correct protocol in the Protocol pick list Most email providers use the POP protocol although some notably AOL CompuServe and Mac use the IMAP protocol Direct connection to IMAP mail server Select IMAP in the Protocol pick list Enabling synchronization on your computer 1 Open the VersaMail conduit configuration screen a Click the HotSync Manager icon G on the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen b Select Custom c Select VersaMail from the list and then click Change Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 345 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know An active account is an 2 Actountevouve set nifa Select Synchronize Active Accounts unt you V up r synchronization e onfiguration For User usi File Help is ioe soaiy Ejek I VersaMail Check the box Enable f pana HotSync Action For YersaMail E VersaMail Informational Logging if Attachment Conversion Da ices Soka you want the HotSync log on DoNothing to record information a vlnatte such as errors IT Enable Informational Logging encounte red about the Current HotSync Configuration For YersaMail conduit du ring Permanent
55. Receiving Email Messages About email accounts The VersaMail application is software that lets you access email on your handheld from an_ account with an email provider such as Earthlink or Yahoo or from your corporate email account For each email account you want to access you must set up an account on your handheld For example if you have an Earthlink account and a corporate account set up one account for each You can create up to eight email accounts on your handheld IMPORTANT You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account The VersaMail application works with these accounts to transfer messages to your handheld The application is not an email service provider Account and connection types You can set up two types of email accounts on your handheld Wireless Send and receive email directly to and from your handheld using the built in Bluetooth technology or by positioning the IR port on your handheld so that it can beam to the IR port on your mobile phone Synchronize Only Windows computers only Transfer messages from the email application on your computer such as Microsoft Outlook to your handheld by synchronizing You can t send and receive messages wirelessly for this type of account Using an email provider If you are setting up a new email account and have a well known email provider Internet service provider or ISP such as Earthlink or Yahoo many of the required setti
56. SLIP connections Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text for example a password or a security code End Identifies the last line in the login script Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 559 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 4 Complete the script a Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete b Select OK and then select OK again c Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 560 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Adding plug in applications Ti You can create plug in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of p For more info on creating the built in script commands A plug in application is a standard PRC application that you install plug in applications on your handheld just like any other application After you install the plug in application you can contact Developer use the new script commands in a login script Support at PalmSource F eae i For example you might use a plug in application in the following situations e You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the authentication server e You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process Plug in applications have the following characteristics e Written in C language e Compiled into a device executable e Called properly from a login script e Able to return control to a log
57. Save archive copy on PC b Select Delete Event on the Record menu Y Continued 156 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the event on your computer 5 Select OK 6 If you re deleting a repeating Rapeacing baat aa Os event select one of the following eh ea t e changes to to select the event s you want to QP Appiy the cha racord delete this amp all Future records All occurrences Current Delete only the selected instance of the repeating event Future _ Future Delete the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 157 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting all your old events When you need more space on your handheld or you just want to do some housekeeping you can delete all your old events n Press Calendar Oss Open the Purge dialog box Delete events older a Open the menus than v 1 week Save archive copy on PC b Select Purge on the Record menu Select the events to purge a Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame b Check the Save archive copy on PC box if you want to place a copy of the deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you synchronize c S
58. Select New useful for an entry like If contacts es Untlied Found Call your phone 302 555 9512M First name Lee number ita J T jtm jtm com Picture Maroni Anthony 415 555 7775 W Nguyen Mai 555 3434W Did You Knox Nosuch Don donn example com T Id You Know Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234H i company Example Inc You can also enter one or Speier Lane 831 555 7534M i Taylor David 650 555 9278 W more contacts on your Technical Support p a Venkat Raja raja anyisp com 616 sine sean and aaien sis pe 955 616 2117 en copy them to your re ca Cone CDD synchronizing b Select each field where you want to enter information and enter it Select the scroll arrows to view more fields Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 118 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip To learn how to download photos to your handheld see palmOne Media Tip If multiple contacts share information such as a company name and address you can enter the first contact and then copy the information into other contacts Tungsten T5 Handheld Cont d The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly All fields except numeric and email fields The first letter is automatically capitalized Title Company City and State As you enter letters a match appears if you have one on your Contacts list For example if you enter S Sacramento might appear and if you then enter a and n San
59. Store pages for offline viewing 397 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Accessing a web page Before You Begin You can open web pages navigate the pages and do the same things you can do with a desktop To browse the web you browser must set up a connection to the Internet from your Accessing a web page using the action bar handheld If you are accessing a 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp VPN network you need to install VPN software and set up VPN access You 2 can turn on VPN from the web browser by opening the Options menu and Go to the web page you want to view a Select Go to Web Page selecting Turn VPN On Blazer e gt Rb OAH vhttp www yahoo com Go Key Term YaHOoo Go to Web Page i URL Stands for uniform ily resource locator the My Yahoo technical name for a web 9 address For example the iis URL for palmOne is http Travel www palmone com A b Enter the address of the web page you want to visit Use the buttons in the Go to Web Page dialog box for quick entry of characters commonly used in web addresses If web browser recognizes the address that you are entering due to a previous entry it automatically completes the address c Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 398 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Accessing a web page using the address field Tip You can also hide the 1 address field to show more of the web page Open the Opti
60. Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area using the Punctuation Shift stroke Tip If you accidentally enter 1 the Punctuation Shift stroke enter it again to cancel it or wait a moment and it automatically disappears Did You Know Writing two Punctuation Shift strokes cancels the automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new entry or sentence 2 y Done Tungsten T5 Handheld Enter the Punctuation Shift stroke When Punctuation Shift is active an indicator appears in the lower right corner of the screen d 5085 gt Unfiled Punctuation shift indicator Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it appear more quickly Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears you see the character 62 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters Write symbols on EITHER side of input area 12 BESINZ NT ee ll gt J a 1 e0 gt N 3 AT TM Se SEJE ateli tT Hs r Qo e Qe Nal Als OAO e re Lo D m o Le L e 2o as th tlo gt ne He se l Bie Aa gt A
61. Synchronization Preference Synchronize Active Accounts synchronization Temporary Synchronization Preference Synchronize Active Accounts Occurs on next HotSync only gt l x Available Accounts 3 Configured Accounts 1 Active Accounts 1 3 amp OPTIONAL If you want to include active email accounts every time you y synchronize check the box Set Selection As Default Otherwise active accounts are included only the next time you synchronize 4 Done Your computer is now set up to synchronize email Use the next procedure to set options for each email account you want to synchronize Tungsten T5 Handheld 346 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Read the Setup Notes box for helpful setup information or error messages Tip You can set advanced synchronization options such as how many days worth of messages to synchronize downloading attachments and synchronizing email folders Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting synchronization options for your email account Open the synchronization options screen NOTE if you have already set up an account on your handheld and have synchronized your handheld with your computer many of the synchronization options are already filled in a On the VersaMail Configuration For User screen click the plus sign to the left of the account you want to configure b Under the account name click Mail Client Sync Setup Ts 0 ur n For T J
62. T5 Handheld 3 Open the Song Details dialog Song Details box Falling Angel Electric Angel a Select the information icon Dream on the song screen Ai MP3 b After you finish viewing the 1 2 632KB z FalliingAngel MP3 info select Done 4 Done Working with RealPlayer on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use RealPlayer on your computer to play and manage your songs Check out the online Help in RealPlayer to learn how to use RealPlayer on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the RealPlayer window e Finding media e Playing media e Saving and burning media e RealPlayer premium services e Preferences e Troubleshooting To open RealPlayer on your computer double click the RealPlayer icon on the Windows desktop 220 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Related topics My Handheld Click the link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Expansion e Inserting and removing expansion cards Cards e Naming expansion cards mytungstents e Viewing the contents of a card Managing e Installing the RealPlayer software on your computer Support Info If you re having problems e Using palmOne Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet with RealOne Mobile Player or RealOne Player on your E Answers to frequently asked questions about RealPlayer
63. Ts Statu JA Music Guide 1 Spanish Grease 2 48 CD DVD Gy Radio i D 2 How Long Has This Been Going On 4 06 Mo wooo OD gt Who Needs Forever 3 09 my brary I 4 Is You Is Or Is You Ain t My Baby 2 59 WD 5 Feeling Good 2 56 I 6 Return To Paradise 5 11 TETT i 7 Wait Til You See Her 1 32 M8 Don t Explain 2 56 coinfo 1D 9 See Line Woman 2 38 P Print Jewel Case 10 Summertime 2 54 mao M11 Strange Fruit 3 05 12 Hare Krishna Hail Krishna 6 15 Eject Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 208 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tip If you want to select only a few songs click Deselect All and then check the box next to the songs you want to select Tip If you want to download songs from the Real Music Store U S only additional fees may apply you need to download and install a special version of RealPlayer that is compatible with Real Music Store files Go to www real com for information Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Select the songs you want to add to your library a Click Save Tracks b Follow the onscreen instructions to select and copy tracks Save Tracks D Real Guide Gb Music amp My Library Te BurnfTransfer Q Search z p _ Track Name Spanish Grease dd Music Guide ist fy Radio MD 2 How Long Has This Been Going On re w o ON gt Who Needs Forever My library WD 4 Is You Is Or Is You Ain t My B
64. VPN client to use this feature Setting up a VPN account on your handheld 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select VPN Y Continued 562 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Set up a VPN account on your handheld a Select the Add Account box b Follow the instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator c Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 563 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Establishing a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select VPN Establish a VPN connection a Select a VPN account from the VPN Account pick list b Select Connect VPN c If prompted enter your VPN username and password 4 Done 564 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Ending a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select VPN Select Disconnect VPN 4 Done 565 CHAPTER 25 My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with customization or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Related
65. Windows 2 computer to an expansion card Open the application associated with the files you want to open Insert the expansion card Select the entry you want to view 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 572 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Tip Reading and writing info on an expansion card uses more battery power than doing the same task on your handheld If you have enough space on your handheld consider copying the info to your handheld Tip If your handheld s battery is very low access to the expansion card may be disabled If this occurs recharge your handheld as soon as possible Did You Know You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your handheld and manage your files on a card using File Transfer or Drive Mode Tungsten T5 Handheld Card v B My Card Type Secure Digital Card Size 13 7 MB Free of 14 0 MB 256 0 KB Used 13 7 MB Free of 14 0 MB SD016 Sandisk Secure Digital Card Device Id SD016_0008F720230B07 Viewing card information It s easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card Use the Card Info application to view the card name and type available storage space and a summary of its contents Go to Applications and select Card Info amp Card name Space available Summary of contents 573 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Renaming a card
66. Windows only If you do information from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with Outlook Information for Expense Note Pad and Media is still synchronized with Palm Desktop software Install applications from your Windows computer to your handheld or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot for use on your handheld This application installs automatically during the initial CD installation process 28 CHAPTER 2 Basics Tip After you install an application and discover how valuable it is be sure to add it to Favorites Did You Know You can categorize applications Some apps are automatically assigned to a category when you install them others are assigned to the Unfiled category All apps appear in the All category of Applications Assign an application to a category in Applications by selecting Category in the App menu Select the pick list next to the application s name then select a category Tungsten T5 Handheld vey Cen Mac only Re palmOne File Transfer Windows only E Getting Started Guide AudiblePlayer link RealPlayer desktop application Windows Media Player link Direct X Send To Handheld droplet Install applications and transfer files from your Mac computer to your handheld or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot for use on your handheld This application installs automatically during the initial CD ins
67. a particular type of account an alert prompts you to deactivate any accounts over the allowed number Tungsten T5 Handheld 358 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Using SSL with the conduit When you set up an email account you can choose to use a secure connection Secure Sockets Layer or SSL for sending and receiving email messages The VersaMail conduit supports SSL when synchronizing with an email account only if that account uses Outlook Outlook Express or Eudora Tungsten T5 Handheld The conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct POP or direct IMAP or for Microsoft Exchange or Lotus Notes accounts Advanced VersaMail application features You can choose from among the following features to customize and optimize your experience using the VersaMail application Setting preferences for getting sending and deleting email Updating a contact directly from an email message Creating and using filters to determine the types of email messages that get downloaded to your handheld Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail Adding APOP to an account Setting advanced account preferences Changing email header details Backing up mail databases Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly Working with root folders Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL 359 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting preferences for getting sending and deleting email Tip Because ma
68. addresses because they re changed to semicolons But you can t use other punctuation or no punctuation between addresses Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address directly in the To field 1 2 On the New Message screen tap or navigate to the To field Enter an address using one of the following methods Single address in To field Enter the address and then select Done Multiple addresses in To field Enter a semicolon and then a space between recipient names Single address on Recipient List Tap To and enter the address on the Recipient List screen and then select Done Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry Multiple addresses on Recipient List Enter a semicolon and then a space between recipient names 4 Done New Message farsi farsi com To Recipient List a com net org edu gov 313 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Contacts You can enter a recipient s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address The names and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Contacts Did You Know Addresses longer than 1 one line are shown ona single line with an ellipsis symbol to the right of the address line To view or edit the address tap the To field to display the full Open the Lookup screen a On the New Message
69. also reminders adjusting volume 509 539 attaching to notes 248 changing 154 entering preferences for 170 171 224 icon on status bar 22 responding to world clock 509 Tungsten T5 Handheld selecting sounds for 153 234 248 509 setting 153 224 249 508 specifying duration of 171 turning off 509 albums arranging photos in 193 195 creating 191 moving photos to other 194 removing photos 199 scrolling through 190 selecting 192 alerts 5 302 icon on status bar 22 See also alarms aligning screen 538 All category 492 Allow wakeup command 274 alphabet Graffiti 2 writing 56 alphabetic keyboard 24 alternate stroke shapes 534 Always connect check box 293 anniversaries 140 142 annual events 142 annual tasks 226 228 APOP setting 377 application buttons not responding 541 reassigning 523 restoring defaults for 523 application controls 25 33 application groups 494 497 application icons 516 590 See also application buttons application screens 25 application title 46 applications See also specific built in application accessing 590 adding contact information to 126 136 adding plug in 561 assigning to buttons 523 beaming 446 447 beaming information in 443 categorizing 491 496 categorizing information in 491 494 changing locations list for 505 checking version numbers for 111 113 copying 95 97 448 575 deleting 113 576 displaying all 497 displaying by category 497 displaying categories in
70. and you may need to recharge the battery more frequently Increased monthly charges Some wireless providers such as Cingular or T Mobile charge a fee for data transactions If you use one of these providers using the auto get feature can substantially add to your monthly charges This is especially true for POP accounts because POP messages take longer to download than IMAP messages If you primarily retrieve messages over your company s network Bluetooth or 802 11b network monthly charges should not be an issue If you are concerned about resource issues set your interval for email auto get to retrieve messages no more frequently than once per hour Inbox icons in the VersaMail application The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox tell you the message s status mM Only the subject header information is downloaded M Part or all of the message text is downloaded gS Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded Tungsten T5 Handheld 306 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you use the 5 way navigator to select and open a message press Center after reading the message to close it and return to the folder where you started Tip Highlight a message and press Right on the 5 way to open a menu of message commands such as forward reply and delete Tungsten T5 Handheld Reading email messages To read email select the email message in the Inbox or the
71. applications that are copy protected You cannot copy or beam these applications a Select the Copy From pick list and select Handheld b Select the application you want to copy c Select Copy d Select Done 4 Done 575 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Removing all information from a card Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files IMPORTANT We do not recommend formatting backup cards Formatting removes the backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card Insert an expansion card 2 Go to Applications and select Card Info 8 3 Format the card Format Card A Formatting this card a Open the menus will destroy all its data Do you want to format b Select Format Card on the this card Card menu c When asked if you want to format the card select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 576 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Sharing e Exchanging applications and information with other Palm Powered devices by exchanging cards or beaming items between handhelds e Sending applications and information to other Bluetooth devices by mytungstents using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Managing Adding applic
72. appointments e Stay on top of deadlines e Carry one calendar e Spot schedule conflicts 137 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling events Use Calendar to manage your schedule You can enter appointments events without a start time events that repeat at regular intervals and events that span a period of time ierm Event The name for an entry in the Calendar application including appointments birthdays reminders recurring meetings and so on Tip You can also scroll to a date by pressing Right or Left on the 5 way or by selecting the arrows at the top of the Day View screen You can use more than one line to describe an appointment Tungsten T5 Handheld Scheduling an appointment 1 Open Day View a Press the Calendar Oss button b Select the Day View icon i Select the date of the appointment Select Go To Select the arrows to select the Select the month Select the date Aug 31 06 KIBUG0 GEC Day View icon Go To year 11 12 GED 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Y Continued 138 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar You can color code your 3 calendar to file events in categories Each category has its own color You can 4 also mark events as private to hide them from i prying eyes a In Day View select the start time Select the line next to the time the appointment begins and enter a description If the appo
73. as your color coded categories in Calendar WINDOWS ONLY 1 Open the Custom menu in the HotSync application a Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower right corner of the screen b Click Custom 2 Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 582 CHAPTER 27 Maintaining Your Handheld 3 Set the transfer options HotSync Action for Calendar a Select an application in the is Conduit list and then click a a et Change ofa Desktop overwrites handheld T Set as default D gt C Handheld overwrites Desktop b Select Desktop overwrites EAE handheld i Ry NOTE This change applies only to the next synchronization c Click OK 4 Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore and then click Done 5 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 583 CHAPTER 27 Maintaining Your Handheld Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories Managing Info Creating a backup of your information and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Customizing Customizing your handheld again after doing a hard reset Support If you re having problems with resets or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com supp
74. b Select Prefs amp c Select Graffiti 2 2 Select alternate strokes a Tap acharacter to view its alternate stroke b Check the box to use the Preferences Graffiti 2 Select a character below to tune it Graffiti 2 Tuner y O Use this form of ty or y alternate stroke and then select Done 3 Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign and then select Done 4 Done 534 CHAPTER 25 Tip You may want to adda space character after the last word in your ShortCut text This way a space automatically follows the ShortCut text Tip To learn how to use ShortCuts while entering information see Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Did You Know Your ShortCuts are backed up on your computer when you synchronize Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Setting up ShortCuts Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your handheld Use ShortCuts to define abbreviations for any words letters or numbers that you enter often You can use your ShortCuts anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing 1 Open ShortCuts Preferences eE Shortcuts br Breakfast a Go to Applications aie Denia ds Date Stamp dts Date and Time Stamp b Select Prefs 6 weih me Meeting c Select ShortCuts talime stamp Y Continued 535 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Tip The ShortCut Text can be 2 45 characters long That s long enoug
75. bar 22 moving around 42 using the 5 way 42 FCC Statement 617 fields 25 121 122 123 file names 575 File Transfer application backing up internal drive 100 defined 29 overview 76 troubleshooting 599 using 99 viewing internal flash drive 599 file types 179 204 files accessing 425 attaching to e mail 202 340 342 displaying contents 413 displaying on expansion cards 573 downloading 335 412 installation prerequisites for 111 installing on handheld 95 installing on Windows computers 93 locating 96 opening on expansion cards 572 opening text 335 removing 109 576 restoring archived 109 saving 412 sharing 255 transferring to handheld 29 107 276 412 troubleshooting uninstalled 597 Files application defined 26 opening 36 using 36 viewing internal flash drive 599 filing events 139 filtering e mail 300 363 365 367 634 Filters dialog box 363 365 finances 450 491 See also Expense application Find dialog box 48 Find icon 48 Find icon on status bar 22 Find More button 48 Find on Page command 401 finding contacts 126 files 96 information 48 overlapping events 166 firewalls 280 flash drive on handheld 75 flow control connections 548 Flow Ctl pick list 548 Folder Synchronization Options setting 355 folders 322 324 355 594 Font command 519 font styles 519 fonts 310 320 403 518 519 forgetting passwords 476 form fields web pages 421 Format Card command 576 formats e
76. be any different with your handheld When you think about the amount of personal and private information stored there you ll definitely want to protect it Benefits of privacy e Protect information if your handheld is misplaced e Hide private information e Unlock your handheld using only one hand 467 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Choosing a security level There are a variety of security levels available for your handheld Choose the level that provides the best mix of security and convenience Activating no security features All entries are accessible to anyone who has your handheld This includes entries that are marked private but are not masked or hidden Masking private entries without creating a password Masked entries are displayed when selected This provides some degree of privacy for private entries but anyone can view the info by simply selecting it Hiding private entries and creating a password Private entries are displayed when the password is entered This is the basic level of security Encrypting entries requires assigning a password Entries are scrambled whenever your handheld locks and are only displayed when the password is entered Choose to encrypt all information or just private entries This feature provides better security than hiding private entries and assigning a password Limiting the number of password attempts Selected information is deleted after a specified
77. coding your events in Calendar Media Organizing photos or videos into albums Support Sharing Beaming a category to another Palm Powered device If you re having problems with categories or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 498 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Checking the current date and time Setting the primary location Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Modifying the locations list Setting the alarm clock Changing the clock display Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Forget your watch Or just forget to reset it when you landed in Toronto Neither matters as long as you have your handheld Not only can you rely on it for the correct time but you can even set an alarm so you don t miss that early flight back home Benefits of World Clock e Always have the correct time no matter where you are e No need to carry a separate alarm clock 499 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Checking the current date and time There are two ways to easily check the date and time When your handheld is on e Go to Applications and select World Clock O e When your handheld is off press Center on the 5 way navigator Your handheld turns on displays the time and then turns off after a few seconds Center Tungsten T5 Handheld 500 CHAPTER
78. com Leave mail on server POP account only To get email on your handheld but leave it on the server so you can view it later on your computer check the Leave mail on server box Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 286 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont d Port Number The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection see the next item If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your system administrator Use Secure Connection To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the Use Secure Connection box If you check the box the port number for incoming mail changes to 995 You may need to change the port number check with your system administrator Maximum Message Size To limit the maximum size of an incoming email message enter the size in kilobytes KB for Maximum Message Size The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default but you can enter any size up to 2048KB approximately 2 megabytes or 2MB including attachments The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments Because downloading large messages can consume handheld resources the VersaMail application displays the size of the message and asks if you want to continue download
79. deleted from a folder e Messages are automatically emptied from the trash after the time interval you specify one day three days one week or one month d Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 332 vA gt Did You Know In one line view read messages appear in plain text in the message list unread messages appear in bold text Dic u K POP mail servers do not support the read or unread message feature For POP accounts messages that you mark appear in plain or bold text on your handheld but the difference is not recognized on the server Tungsten T5 Handheld Marking messages as read or unread CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages When you select a message to read it it is automatically marked as read You can also manually mark messages as read or unread 1 Select the message or messages to mark a In the Inbox or on another folders screen select the folders pick list and then select the folder containing the message you want to mark b Tap the icon next to the message you want to mark To mark multiple messages tap the bullets next to the messages you want to mark Do one of the following to mark the message or messages Single message Select Mark Read or Mark Unread on the list Multiple messages Open the menus select Message and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread Ny Continued jg Move To Mark Read Mark Unread 333 CHAPTER 15 Sending a
80. email messages in the Inbox the Reminders screen doesn t display a reminder for new messages because they are already displayed in the Inbox A broken envelope icon Es appears next to a notification when an auto get mail fails You can do any of the following e Check the box to clear a reminder from the list e Select the reminder either the mail icon or the text description to go to the Inbox of that account or to read a detailed error message e Select Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your handheld before the Reminders screen appeared e Select Clear All to delete all reminders on the Reminders screen When a notification appears on the Reminders screen select the notification to go to the Inbox of that account or launch the VersaMail application and go to that account Once you view a message in the Inbox the message is removed from the Reminders screen even if you don t open it Auto get then starts at the next scheduled interval with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1 If you don t go to the Inbox of the selected account and another scheduled email retrieval finds new messages the Reminders screen adds the number of new messages to the notification for that account For example if scheduled auto get 1 finds two new messages and before you view Tungsten T5 Handheld 304 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages the Inbox scheduled auto get 2 takes pla
81. file you want to install go to the folder you copied the 4 Done file to Tungsten T5 Handheld 96 CHAPTER 5 Tip In Mac OS X you can make the Send To Handheld droplet a permanent part of your desktop by dragging the droplet to the Dock Then simply drag files you want to transfer to your handheld onto the droplet in the Dock Tip Use the Send To Handheld droplet to install music files photos and videos to your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Installing applications from a Mac computer You can install applications from a Mac computer by dragging and dropping them onto the Send To Handheld icon or by using the commands in the HotSync menu Using the Send To Handheld droplet MAC ONLY Copy or download the application s you want to install onto your computer 2 Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet a Drag and drop the file s or folder onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder b In the Send to Handheld dialog box select your username and click OK 3 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 97 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Using commands in the HotSync menu Tip To move applications between your handheld and the expansion card click Change Destination Use the arrows to move the files and then click OK Tip If y
82. file or folder directly from within the application The application automatically displays files located in the appropriate folder on your handheld s internal drive for example when you open the RealPlayer application files in the Music folder on the internal drive are displayed but you can browse for files located elsewhere on the drive See the application chapters for information on opening files Switching between applications You can switch between applications at any time Just press Home Ay and select an icon from Favorites or Applications or press a quick button Your handheld automatically saves your work in the current application and switches to the other application Using the 5 way navigator The 5 way navigator located at the bottom of the front panel lets you access information quickly with one hand and without the stylus To use the 5 way press Up Down Right Left or Center The 5 way does various things based on which type of screen you re on ay Up Center Left Down 41 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in Favorites View Right or Left Displays the next or previous page of favorites Up or Down Scrolls to the next favorite in the corresponding direction Center Opens the selected item Moving around in Applications View Up or Down Scrolls to the next or previous page of Category applications Right or Left Scrolls to the ne
83. files and folders in the Files application create new folders copy beam and delete files and folders and more You can work with one file or folder at a time 1 Open Files Navigate to the file or folder you want Work with the file or folder Aa Music Fl Se A SEE Music a Tap and hold the item name to FA Far30 mp3 472K open a menu that lets you n Open With T perform any of the following Rename tasks Open With Select the application to use to open a file Rename Rename the selected item Details View details such as name including extension for files location on the internal drive or expansion card last date modified and for files only size Check the box to make the selected item read only meaning that it cannot be changed by a user You can rename or delete a file or folder from the details dialog box Y Continued 38 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know If you sel Delet A FOWSO DARIA YON Cont d Copy Copy the item to another location on the internal drive or an expansion receive a confirmation fc card asking if you are sure you want to delete the file or Move Move the item to another location on the internal drive or an expansion folder card Delete Delete the current file or folder Beam Beam the file or folder Send Send the current file or folder using your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology or as an attachment to a text mes
84. folder where the message is located Airy 5 5 v Inbox o K Les Newman 5 36a revised instructions for creatin o BS Travis Washington 5 30a these are funny M Angela Yee 5 28a review comments M Travis Washington 5 24a cool site M monica_lewis 3 33a ALC Account Form Reminder If you chose to get messages by subjects only select the More button to view the body of the email message plus any attachments up to the maximum message size you select If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size only a partial message is displayed Select the More button to view the entire message If you choose to get entire messages the body of the message is displayed However if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size only part of the message is displayed Select the More button to view the entire message 4 305 gt B From Angela Yee lt angyee7 1 hotmail com gt Subj review comments for your approval There are now three new levels of MSN Hotmail Extra Storage Learn more v Select More to view the entire message 307 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Selecting whether to receive messages as HTML or plain text By default the VersaMail application is set to receive mail in HTML format This means that any email messages sent as HTML are displayed on your handheld with basic HTML formatting intact including the following e Bold e Italics e Under
85. for 619 charging 4 543 578 588 checking 274 587 conserving power for 5 257 541 587 extending life of 512 587 overview 5 624 recharging 4 5 543 587 battery gauge 587 BCC option 288 374 Beam Category command 445 Beam command 444 446 Beam Contact command 440 Beam dialog box 444 445 447 Beam From pick list 446 Beam icon 47 beaming 20 415 443 447 543 610 611 Birthday icon 161 birthdays 120 138 blank screen 588 Blazer application See web browser blinking asterisk 304 blinking cursor 66 blocking information 470 Bluetooth application creating trusted paris 271 features 255 256 icon on status bar 22 opening 257 258 265 267 269 271 273 274 setting connection information 257 setting options for 274 setting up desktop connections 267 setting up mobile connections 258 262 setting up network connections 269 status bar icon 263 Bluetooth devices assigning names to 273 274 540 built in software for 27 connecting to 21 255 547 discovering 256 271 273 entering passkeys for 272 Tungsten T5 Handheld related topics for 275 sending applications to 577 sending events to 173 sending memos to 243 sending notes to 253 sending photos and videos to 200 202 sending tasks to 236 setting up 257 273 sharing information with 31 synchronizing with 17 turning off 587 verifying status of 263 waking up handhelds from 274 Bluetooth HotSync option 265 Bluetooth icon 26 Bluetooth indicator 263 Bluetooth L
86. from 83 IR to a PC Handheld connection 544 545 ISP accounts 550 ISPs 255 278 284 550 iTunes transferring songs from CD 208 J J2ME files 30 jack headphone 20 Java Technologies software 30 JPG files 179 335 414 K keeping track of expenses 450 key exchange 272 key terms xxii keyboard onscreen types 67 keyboard icons 24 keyboards connecting to portable 239 entering information with 66 67 opening alternative 67 Tungsten T5 Handheld opening onscreen 24 Keyguard 20 Keylock 541 542 Keylock Preferences screen 541 587 keys onscreen keyboard 67 L LAN Setup option 269 landscape view 23 LANs See networks laptops 255 large fonts 519 large images 420 Last Page Viewed option 419 launching See opening Leave mail on server option 286 left arrow controls 25 letter keyboard icon 24 liability ii lightning bolt icon 588 line selection 70 links documentation xxi links web pages 402 List icon 184 list screens 43 List view Media 180 184 listening to music 20 203 204 568 lists See also song lists clearing History 416 creating company phone 11 creating To Do 222 225 customizing expense 459 customizing Tasks 233 displaying applications icons in 516 displaying bookmarks in 406 displaying pick 25 displaying song 211 finding items in 505 moving between items in 43 opening category 152 168 571 opening History 416 ordering memos in 240 rearranging items in 240 selecting item
87. handheld when it is locked turn it on Enter your password and then select Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Delete the forgotten password Incorrect Password This is not the correct a Select Lost Password password To try again tap OK b Select Delete Password Hint 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer to restore any private entries that were deleted 5 amp OPTIONAL Create a new password 4 Done Locking your handheld Protect the entire contents of your handheld whether marked private or not by using your password to lock your handheld You can set your handheld to lock automatically or you can lock it manually IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld you must enter the exact password to unlock it If you forget the password your handheld will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the password If you still cannot remember the password you must do a hard reset to resume using your handheld A hard reset deletes all of the information on your handheld including your password Applications files and folders on your handheld s internal drive are also deleted You 477 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private can restore the information by synchronizing your handheld with your computer Items on your internal drive are not restored during synchronization Use File Transfer to replace those items Locking your handheld automatically 1 Open Security Prefer
88. handheld software 7 28 93 writing with Graffiti 2 characters 51 64 533 96 110 opening calendars 172 Y restoring information 582 Year View 165 synchronization options for 10 85 89 year selecting 502 528 594 yearly events 142 synchronizing with user profiles 14 yearly tasks 226 228 troubleshooting problems 585 writing memos 242 Z Windows Media Player 29 ZIP files 336 598 wireless carriers 255 277 wireless connections 254 255 265 388 wireless e mail accounts 277 278 wireless features 263 wireless service providers 550 wireless synchronization 83 255 265 383 Word documents 335 Word files 26 276 creating and viewing 175 transferring to handheld 78 word searches 48 word selection 70 World Clock benefits of 499 changing display for 510 selecting primary location for 525 setting alarms with 153 508 World Clock icon 27 500 World Clock displaying 27 World Wide Web See web pages web sites Writing area Graffiti 2 input areas 52 writing area 24 56 60 writing in your own handwriting 244 writing tool 20 578 Tungsten T5 Handheld 653
89. handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting In other words the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 602 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Note Pad I m having problems listing notes the way want to see them If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen select Preferences from the Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize the notes on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting In other words the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld Media can t find the Media icon in Applications Select the pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select Multimedia You should now see an icon for the Media application In Favorites View the entry associated with the Media application is called Photos amp Videos You can edit the Favorites list to change this to Media as well as to create or change any other favorite file folder web link or application RealPlayer would like better quality sound during playback You can save music files in either MP3 or RMJ format RMJ is a proprietary format used by the RealPlayer desktop In either case saving at a lower bit rate creates a smaller file size but als
90. have an application that can open the attachment If The maximum message so you can open the attachment with the application size you can download is 60KB for the body text Here are the kinds of attached files you can work with and approximately 5MB total including vCard VCF This is contact information Open these files in the Contacts application on your attachments If an handheld attachment is too large it cannot be downloaded to vCal iCal VCS or ICS This is usually a calendar appointment or a task Open these files in the the handheld You ean Calendar or Tasks application on your handheld download a maximum of 10 attachments for any received messages Text TXT This is usually a memo or another plain text file Open these files in the Memos application on your handheld regardless of message HTML HTML or HTM This is usually a web page or a formatted text file Open these files in the size web browser on your handheld Your handheld displays HTML attachments with full formatting intact Microsoft Word DOC Excel XLS and PowerPoint PPT files Open these files in the Documents application on your handheld Graphics files JPG BMP TIF GIF Open these files in the palmOne Media application on your handheld Other application files For other types of application files your handheld may contain a viewer that allows other applications to pass it a file for viewing If your handheld contains such a viewer y
91. icon 5 way again 24 25 26 27 28 Ti j Multi day event ip E Go To Year When you turn off the A input area you can see Month View icon the month before and the month after the currently seloctgd month 2 Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule e Select the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month or select Go To to choose a specific month e Select a date to go to that day in Day View 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 164 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing a yearly calendar Tip Year View shows a calendar for an entire year You can scroll between years or jump to any other You can also press Right year and Left on the 5 way to scroll to the next or revious month To go to 1 p 5 Open Year View Day View for a particular Year selector date press Center on the a Press Calendar Ors 5 way to insert a highlight press Right or b Select the Month View Left to select a date and Besta then press Center on the icon Ei Jaa Al 5 way again er IRE c Select Year y poet gazseaasze Tip Scroll arrows When you turn off the input area you can see the entire year Month View icon 2 Do any of the following to view a yearly calendar e Select the year selector to scroll to the previous or next year or select Go To to choose a specific year e Select the scroll arrows to see months that don t fit on the screen e Select a month to go to that month in Mon
92. is named with either your full username or a shortened version of the name Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop software e Turn on your handheld and go to Applications Select HotSync 2 and then select Local want to change from synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and synchronizing with Outlook WINDOWS ONLY Before You Begin During CD installation you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your handheld You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts appointments tasks and notes you can change your synchronization method so that your handheld synchronizes with Outlook instead You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software You must have completed CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop software as your desktop application for NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Outlook info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and synchronization in order Memos is synchronized with Outlook You can also set up the VersaMail application to to switch to Outlook Note synchronize with Outlook Other info such as photos and notes is synchronized with that you can choose Palm Desktop software Outlook as your synchronization software 1 Insert the CD into your computer for Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos during CD installation 2 Select Change your synchronization method 3 Follow the onscreen instructions for
93. letter of your selection appears next to 2 the contact in the Contacts list for a Select the contact you want example W for Work If you select email no letter appears next to the Press Contacts faz Open the Contact Details dialog box b Select Edit and then select Details contact 3 Specify the information Tip displayed with a contact You can also use the Contact Details dialog a Select the Show in List pick box to assign a contact to list and select the information pla van Ox E ager that you want to appear in the OK Cancel a category or to mark a contact as private Contacts list for this contact b Select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 128 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 4 Customize the appearance of the Contacts list a From the Contacts list open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the display options you want Remember last category Check the box if you want Contacts to display the last category shown when you return to it from another application If the box is unchecked Contacts opens to the All category List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name or by company and last name 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 129 CHAPTER 6 Before You Begin You must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications To use Quick Connect with your handheld s
94. list 4 Done Show Options i Sort by v Date Distance Miles M Show currency 459 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Working with Expense on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Add edit and delete expense items e Organize your expenses by date type amount notes or category e View expense items as a list large icons or small icons e Convert a list of expenses to a single currency e Print expense reports e Transfer expense information to other applications such as Microsoft Excel using the Send or Export command in Palm Desktop software To open Expense on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Expense on the launch bar Tungsten T5 Handheld 460 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus mytungstent5 Entering e Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup Information e Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and ShortCuts Support If you re having pro
95. messenger IM account that you associate with a contact lip Any changes you make to 1 field types apply only to the current contact You can duplicate contact Press Contacts fE nformation if you need to 2 Customize the contact field type apply the same contact fields to multiple a Select the contact you want and then select Edit contacts b Select the pick list next to the field you want to change and select the new Did You Know field type you want Available fields include phone number email address The email address field and instant messenger IM fields type is located on the i same pick list as the N NOTE You must set up an instant messenger account with a service phone number fields IM provider and download instant messaging software to use instant messaging i handheld field types are located on on your hanane a separate pick list CERA Unfied First name Lee Picture 2 GRAA Unfilled First name Lee Company Example Inc A Title A x Work 55 G Select triangle 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 122 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Defining custom fields You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any Tungsten T5 Handheld additional contact information you want such as spouse s or children s names favorite color or any other information 1 2 Press Contacts faz
96. more accounts during synchronization By default HotSync Manager is set to synchronize all accounts you configure in the conduit each time you synchronize You can choose to exclude a specific account from synchronization or to exclude all email accounts Select Set Selection As Default to apply the options you selected each To exclude a specific account Uncheck the box Select this check box to synchronize this email subsequent time you account when you perform a HotSync operation on the VersaMail configuration screen synchronize Otherwise the settings apply only To exclude all email accounts from synchronization Click the HotSync Manager icon in the the next time you taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen select Custom select VersaMail and synchronize then click Change Select Do Nothing Synchronizing an account After you set basic and advanced synchronization options and exclude any accounts if desired you can synchronize your handheld with your computer Synchronizing multiple accounts You can include more than one account when synchronizing The maximum number of accounts you can synchronize is as follows e 1 Simple MAPI account for example an account set up using Outlook Express or Eudora e 1 Extended MAPI account for example an account set up using Outlook e 1 Lotus Notes account e 5 combined direct POP or direct IMAP accounts If you try to synchronize more than the limit for
97. noise that can make beaming go slower or in some cases prevent it from working at all When someone beams information to my handheld it doesn t receive the info e If you are receiving info from another Palm Powered device confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are 4 to 39 inches approximately ten centimeters to one meter apart and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different e Move your handheld closer to the sending device e Make sure your handheld has beam receive enabled e Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the receiving device Tungsten T5 Handheld 610 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions When someone beams information to my handheld get a message telling me it is out of memory e Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the info you are receiving For example if you are receiving a 30KB application you must have at least 60KB free e Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications I cannot send information to another Bluetooth device e Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your handheld and the other device e Make sure that the receiving device has a compatible Bluetooth application installed e The receiving device must be within range of your handheld approximately 25 to 30 feet 8 to 10 meters Other Blu
98. number of incorrect password attempts Use this feature along with encryption for the highest level of security Tungsten T5 Handheld 468 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Marking information as private Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info 1 Open an application 2 Create a new entry or select the entry that you want to make private 3 Mark it as private a For existing Contacts select Edit b Select Details c Check the Private box Contact Details il d Select OK Show in List Y Mobile Category Personal mG Private b e In Contacts and Memos select Private i aaa Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 469 CHAPTER 22 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Setting the level of privacy Add further protection to your private entries by setting the privacy level hidden masked Hiding or masking private entries 1 Open Security a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 6 c Select Security Select the display option for private entries a Select the Private Records pick list b Select one of these options and then select Done Show Display private entries Mask Block entries with a gray bar you can see the bar onscreen but you can t see the entries content Hide Make private entries invisible Ny Continued 470 CHAPTER 22 Tip Use a password to protect confidential work or
99. of your Bluetooth device Check handheld the user guide for your device to enable the What types of connections can make cl fatures With Bluetooth technology you can make the following connections e Connect to your computer wirelessly to synchronize your handheld e Access the Internet or an email account using your mobile phone In order to use a mobile phone you must dial your ISP or sign up for an account with a high speed wireless carrier e Send and receive text messages using your mobile phone Share files by forming a trusted pair with a Bluetooth device such as a camera handheld or printer Browse the Internet or access your email account by linking through your desktop computer s network connection or establishing a connection to a Bluetooth LAN Access Point Tungsten T5 Handheld 255 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices What is device discovery Discovery is the process in which your handheld searches for other Bluetooth devices within its range approximately thirty feet As each device is discovered it shows up in your Discovery Results After you find the devices you are looking for you can select the devices with which you want to connect The Bluetooth application on your handheld can be turned on and off and the application has a Discoverable setting that can also be turned on and off The following is a description of setting combinations and the resulting discovery states Bluetoot
100. of your handheld s entire internal drive to your computer 99 CHAPTER 5 Tip Use File Transfer to back up the contents of your handheld s internal drive to your main computer In the File Transfer window right click the folder next to the handheld icon and then click Save to PC Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Open File Transfer a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into your handheld b Double click the File Transfer icon amp on your computer desktop to open the File Transfer window The File Transfer window opens to display the contents of the internal drive on your handheld if an expansion card is inserted into your handheld s expansion slot the window displays the card s contents as well IMPORTANT If another task is running that uses the USB sync cable such as synchronizing or transferring music files with RealPlayer File Transfer waits until the task is complete before displaying the contents of your handheld or an expansion card gt T One File Transfer ar Fie Edit View Help 3 O B osae A a m5 Angus INTERNAL Updater Y Continued 100 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d N NOTE File Transfer recognizes any security preferences you set for your h
101. off between security and convenience 1 Open Security Preferences a Go to Applications Password Quick Unlock b Select Prefs Auto Lock c Select Security Private Records v Show Y Continued 484 CHAPTER 22 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Open the Encrypt Data dialog box a Select Options b Check the Encrypt data when locked box c Select Choose Applications Select the applications you want to encrypt and then select OK Y Continued Security Options i M Encrypt data when locked O Encrypt private records only Encryption type v RC4 Intrusion Protection Encrypt Data Select applications to encrypt Favorites Calc Calendar Contacts Dialer Expense Memos Note Pad 485 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private 4 amp OPTIONAL To encrypt only the private entries in the Security Options applications you selected check M Encrypt data when locked the Encrypt private records only box M Encrypt private records only Encryption type RC4 Intrusion Protection 5 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done ee ga Limiting the number of password attempts Synchronize your handheld with your You can set the number of incorrect password attempts that are allowed before selected computer frequently to information is deleted from your handheld This feature called intrusion protection protects prevent loss of sensiti
102. oien ne E a Ea T E 236 Chapter 12 Writing Memos ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 237 Creating A MEMO asics ccascasceecaesisscaceencetnesdecinaseseceasissdeadueastebaderenitedeneanatnesdd 238 VIEWING ANG editing MEMO istisini asion ssncd ane casetacetvenacaneseee sheets 239 Moving memos in your MEMOS list oo eect eee e ee eeeeeeeee eee ee ee eteeeeeeeeeeeeee 240 Deleting ai MeMO sirepna enian E 241 Working with Memos on your COMpuUtEer sssssssssssessrrsssssesreserrnnnnnnnnnssnns 242 Related topie Sesde aa 243 Chapter 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad 244 Creating ainOte irnir eniin ar E I aA EEE I E EN E a 245 Choosing the pen and paper background colors sssceeeeeeees 246 Seting AM GAN meissie aer 248 VIEWING and editing MOUS cicesscaccscnessaaesencaseaesag eae ssucenaecesacezenedesdendahestteets 250 Deleting ANOLE siiicar aa KAN GENESE 251 Working with Note Pad on your COoMpuUter ssssssesssssssssssrssssrsrnnnnnennsnns 252 Related TOPICS rsio saus aia naaa a a odeia ii di 253 Chapter 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices 254 What can do with the built in Bluetooth technology c scseeeeesnees 255 What types of connections can make eeesseeeeeeesteeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 255 What is device discovery ccccccceccsteeeeeesteeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeesees 256 Entering basic Bluetooth settings c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 257 Setting UP a phone CONNECTI
103. on your Privacy Keeping notes private by turning on security options handheld go to www palmOne com Categories Creating categories so you can organize notes support tungstent5 Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Notes Questions Tungsten T5 Handheld 253 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices What can do with the built in Bluetooth technology Entering basic Bluetooth settings Setting up a phone connection Accessing email and the web wirelessly Setting up a connection for wireless synchronization Setting up a connection to your Windows desktop computer Setting up a connection to a network Creating trusted pairs Setting advanced Bluetooth features Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Your handheld helps keep your world organized by storing contact information recording appointments and so on Now your handheld can actually connect you to the world wirelessly using Bluetooth wireless technology Need to make a phone call Select the number in Contacts and your mobile phone begins dialing How about browsing the web or sending an email message from your handheld without a cable Your handheld s built in Bluetooth functionality helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices so you can enjoy the convenience of cable free connectivity Benefits of your handheld s Bluetooth tech
104. pick list b Select the symbol you want to appear when you add new expenses c Select OK 4 Done Creating a currency symbol Preferences a MM Use automatic fill when entering data Default curren If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries you can create your own symbol 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 8 2 Open the Custom Currencies dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Custom Currencies Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 455 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses 3 Create the custom symbol Custom Currencies Create your own custom a Select a Country box currencies by tapping on the country name below b Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 456 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Deleting expenses Delete individual expenses or an entire category of expenses at once Deleting an individual expense 1 Go to Applications and select Expense amp 2 Select the expense you want to delete 3 Delete the item a Open the menus b Select Delete Item in the Record menu 4 amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the expense on your computer 5 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 457 CHAPTER 20 Tip To combine expenses from different categories rename on
105. remove it from the album Y Continued 192 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos 5 Select Done 4 Done Moving a photo or video within and between albums Tip Move photos within 1 albums to easily put the slide show of your child s birthday party in the sequence you want 2 Move a photo or video within an album Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move b Use the stylus to drag the photo or video you want to its new position Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 193 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Tip You can also move a photo or video by adding it to a different album The item is removed from the original album Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Move a photo or video between albums e Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move Open the menus Select Edit Details from the Media menu and then select the photo or video you want to move Select the Album pick list and then select the new album for the photo Select Done 4 Done Photo Details iy Name Date 12 8 37 11 44am Size 31 KB 432x624 Select to Album v BUnfiled move photo or video 194 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Sorting photos and videos Tip You must be in an album to sort manually i
106. screen 539 space characters 535 551 space information handheld 112 speaker 21 539 special characters 55 62 63 533 specifications 619 speed communications 544 545 548 Speed Dial screen 433 435 Speed pick list 545 548 speed dial buttons 433 spreadsheets 26 107 276 452 creating and viewing 175 transferring to handheld 78 square root button Calculator 463 SSL connections 287 290 359 385 start pages See Home page Start with pick list 419 starting HotSync Manager 86 266 locked handhelds 477 Outlook applications 89 starting HotSync Manager 27 static electricity 579 620 621 status bar icon descriptions 22 stereo headphones 20 stopping downloading operations 412 information searches 48 Internet connections 411 playback 212 storage 567 568 storing device names 273 web pages 423 stylus 6 20 54 196 578 Subject fields 312 subject lines e mail 297 312 Subjects Only option 298 summary view e mail 321 supported file types 179 204 switching between applications 10 41 571 594 symbols 62 63 66 118 533 Sync IMAP Folders screen 384 synchronization options applications 88 e mail 347 349 352 handheld 10 83 85 93 594 synchronization software 88 114 synchronize defined 8 Synchronize Active Accounts option 346 Synchronize incoming e mail option 354 Synchronize to local check box 350 Synchronize unread mail only option 354 synchronizing applications 84 88 596 caution for 114 e mail 344 3
107. service profiles you probably need to enter only your username password and telephone number If you re creating a new service profile you may need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile 1 Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Network 2 Open the Details dialog box a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add details to b Select Details Y Continued Preferences Details Connection type PPP Idle timeout 1 Minute Query DNS IP Address QM Automatic 554 CHAPTER 25 Key Term DNS Domain name system The Internet uses this system to translate the names of host computers into IP addresses A DNS number identifies the server that handles the translation Each IP address has four numbers from 0 to 255 that are separated by periods Key Term IP Internet protocol Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs a unique identifier an IP address Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address upon login while others assign a permanent IP address Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Adjust any of the following settings RY NOTE Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any of these settings Connection type Select the pick list and choose the communication protocol for this service PPP SLIP or CSLIP Most email application us
108. shes Scectescncnaveessesaaatcevertiaaxars apace stiee 213 Creating a playlist viressssesstesssteceneatssntacavasccecdevenseacueecuixsadeugens eceaetedanieck 213 Playing Songs from a playlist ccceccccesssseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeesseeeeeess 215 Editing a playlist sapissi naka aa 216 D leting a playlist mersaria aaa Naa 218 Viewing Song INFO sessciicicsecscisiesss tecnsadetecenssidecscasvesseecceevaseendevassendveueis conde 219 Working with RealPlayer On your computer cee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeees 220 Related tOpiCS ssnin tens ssadedaadasetasncenacdecesnseachensuasaccuysentsdedeaeanneets 221 Chapter 11 Managing Your TaskS ccccssseeeseseeeeeeeees 222 Creating a LAS Kosier E 223 Sekino an Alan srira siai raa EET 224 Scheduling a repeating task standard interval cccsseeeeeeeeneees 225 Scheduling a repeating task unusual interval cccceeeeeeeenees 227 Organizing your taSkS csseeccecesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseseeeeeeeesseeeneeeess 229 Marking a task COM Plete sssrinin nn andaian ioan 230 Deleting tasks syni snaa a a 231 Deleting a specifie task sissisodan aen 231 Tungsten T5 Handheld viii Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting all your completed tasks ececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeenneaaes 232 CUSTOMIZING your TASKS NSE moraci ssiri riadas 233 Working with Tasks on your COMpUter sssssssssssssssrirrrsrsssssresrrnnnnnnnnnnssnns 235 RelateditopiCSrsui
109. slot on your handheld the application you want may be installed on the card instead of on your handheld To view the applications installed on the card select the pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select the expansion card s name from the list Entering information My handheld doesn t respond to taps correctly If your handheld is not responding to taps correctly you need to align the screen Tungsten T5 Handheld 590 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions When I tap Menu on the status bar nothing happens e Tap the upper left corner of the screen to try and open the menus e Align the screen and try tapping Menu again e If nothing happens you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus Switch to a different application and try tapping Menu If it works in the second application then the first does not use menus e If tapping Menu does not work in the second application try aligning the screen again can t get my handheld to recognize my handwriting For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the stylus you need to use Graffiti 2 writing Use the Graffiti 2 help to learn how to write characters NOTE Your handheld recognizes strokes entered with the stylus other than Graffiti 2 strokes in the Note Pad application only e Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area not on the display part of the screen If you want to write o
110. software Tip To learn how to install extra handheld software from the CD see Installing the additional software from the CD Tungsten T5 Handheld ay Palm Desktop software What s on the CD The Tungsten T5 software installation CD includes desktop software for your computer and additional software for your handheld The desktop software lets you use your computer to view enter and manage info for many of the applications on your handheld Make sure you install the desktop software so that you can back up and save the info on your handheld onto your computer The additional handheld software lets you do more things with your handheld When you set up your handheld you may install some or all of these applications You can install any of the applications at any time after you set up your handheld as well The software installation CD includes titles such as the following palmOne Quick Install Windows only View enter manage and back up info for Calendar Contacts Tasks Memos and Expense on your computer You can also view manage and back up info for Note Pad and Media Expense and Media are Windows only When you synchronize your handheld with your computer this info is updated in both places This application installs automatically during the initial CD installation process N NOTE During CD installation you can choose to synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook on your computer
111. synchronizing 476 synchronizing wirelessly 255 265 Tungsten T5 Handheld synchronizing with user profiles 11 14 16 system requirements for 2 timing out 594 troubleshooting 538 585 turning itself off 589 turning on accidentally 541 turning on and off 6 541 upgrading 4 7 viewing applications on 497 waking up 274 handwriting 591 See also Graffiti 2 writing hard resets 477 581 582 588 header options e mail 380 headphone jack 20 579 headphones 20 579 headsets 539 579 help xxii 17 25 60 476 615 Help menu 593 hiding address fields 399 currency symbols 459 private entries 468 470 high speed connections 264 high speed data services 550 high speed wireless carrier 255 highlighting menu commands 45 See also selection highlight hints 25 476 See also help History dialog box 464 History list 416 Holiday Files folder 172 holidays 140 142 144 Home icon 24 home page 402 417 419 Home Page check box 418 Home Page icon 417 Home Page option 419 Home screen displaying icons on 603 opening applications on 34 Home screen See Applications View hosts 555 HotSync cable connecting to PCs with 8 disconnecting 593 synchronizing with 83 HotSync icon 27 HotSync log 84 HotSync Manager See also synchronizing not responding 597 restoring information from 582 starting 27 86 266 turning off 86 HotSync Manager icon 83 593 HotSync menu 98 HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide 593 HotSync technology 83 how to inform
112. the HotSync Manager and make sure that the application is selected e Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook can t synchronize wirelessly using my handheld s Bluetooth technology e Make sure that the HotSync Manager is running on your desktop computer The HotSync Manager icon G must appear in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen e Click the HotSync Manager icon G and verify that there is a checkmark next to Local Tungsten T5 Handheld 595 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions e Your handheld may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer Try validating the virtual serial port you re using or create a different virtual port and change the HotSync Manager settings to use the new virtual port To change the virtual serial port click the HotSync Manager icon g Select Setup and then select the Local tab Select a port from the Serial port pick list When you synchronize wirelessly your handheld attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port on your computer First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port If it cannot find that port it then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port However some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not support synchronization Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating system for instructions on creating changing the virtual port for serial communication If th
113. the Outbox Tip A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited moved or deleted However if you edit the message you must manually send the message If the manual send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry If you perform a soft reset or synchronize during send retry the retry cancels You must manually send any During automatic send retry any message that the VersaMail application is trying to send is ina locked state You cannot edit move or delete these messages If you try to modify a message in messages in the Outbox the locked state an error message appears If a send retry fails after the third try the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state You can send the message again manually or edit move or delete the message However if you edit the message you will need to manually send the message If the manual send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox show the message s status M Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the next send retry You can edit move or delete a message in this state A Send retry is currently in process you cannot edit move or delete a message in this state A Third automatic send retry has failed Y
114. them into categories and sorting them Privacy Keeping messages private by turning on security options Support i l Sharing e Exchanging messages with other palmOne handheld users by beaming If you re having problems with SMS or with anything else on your handheld go to e Sending messages to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth www palmOne com wireless technology on your handheld support tungstent5 them Connecting Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth technology on your handheld to send and receive messages wirelessly Tungsten T5 Handheld 396 Browsing the Web Accessing a web page Quickly jumping to a page Changing how you view a page Bookmarking your favorite pages Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet Downloading files and pages Communicating with other users Returning to a web page you recently visited Changing your Home and start pages Setting advanced browser options Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld You use the web for so many things checking email finding driving directions getting news buying gifts Now you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go Use your handheld to make an Internet connection through your mobile phone and the web browser opens the entire web to you Benefits of the web browser e Carry the web with you e View web pages in handheld friendly format e
115. to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The use of shielded I O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices Failure to do so may violate FCC rules IMPORTANT Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the manufacturer s Regulatory Engineering Department Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the user s authority to operate this equipment Caution Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 617 Tungsten T5 Handheld Responsible Party Zire Product Family palmOne Inc Tested to Comply 400 N McCarthy Blvd 4 Milpitas California 95035 FC With FCC Standards United States of America 408 503 7500 FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Canada Industry Canada IC This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this devi
116. to use to connect by that method d Select OK 4 Done 132 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Using Tap to Connect With Tap to Connect you can select a contact and dial a phone number or address an email or text message by selecting the appropriate entry on the contact screen By default Tap to Connect is not enabled Before You Begin You must have a 1 compatible mobile phone sold separately that includes Bluetooth wireless technology and 2 you must complete all the Press Contacts a Enable Tap to Connect prerequisites for the a From the Contacts list open the menus email and messaging applications b Select Options and then select Preferences To use Tap to Connect c Select Enable Tap to Connect and then select OK with your handheld s built in Bluetooth N Continued technology you must set up a phone connection To use it with your handheld s IR port run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection Tungsten T5 Handheld 133 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Make a connection with Tap to Connect a Select the contact you want 555 234 1939 bile 555 234 9191 Lee Tsai W mail tsailee example com Select to edit Connecting b Select the entry you want to use to connect For example to dial a phone number select the number you want to dial To address an ema
117. topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Basics Moving Around Entering Information Bluetooth Privacy Categories World Clock Locating the input area and other controls on your handheld e Opening applications e Using menus e Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information e Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases Customizing Bluetooth communication settings Keeping information private by locking your handheld with a password Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information Viewing the date and time in other cities 566 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld In this chapter A Chinese proverb says Life just E T E TOE gives you ume and space it s up to cards can use you to fill it But doesn t it always seem that no matter how much space How can expansion cards help me you have you still need more Removing an expansion card Expansion cards sold separately provide a compact and limitless answer to the storage dilemma When one card becomes full simply use another card Inserting an expansion card Opening an application on an expansion card Opening files on an expansion card Viewing card information Renaming a card Copying applications to an expansion card Removing all information from a card Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Benefits of expansion cards e Back
118. toskies Tap and Drag v Selects Text c Select General Check or uncheck the Disable cookies box Select OK 4 Done 422 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Setting preferences for storing web pages Key Term Your handheld stores web pages automatically in cache Cache The cache in your handheld is a block of memory that stores web 1 pages so you can view them again without accessing the Internet Cached web pages are 2 saved thereby saving the content you ve viewed a Open the menus even when you exit the web browser Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Advanced Tip Remember that your handheld has a limited amount of memory Choose a cache size that lets you store at least a few pages but still leaves room on your handheld for other data and applications A value of at least 1MB is recommended Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 423 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web 3 Tungsten T5 Handheld Change the size and content of the cache by using the following options Set memory limit for storing pages Sets the amount of memory used for your cache Pages are cached so they load faster the next time you view them Cookies Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies Clear Cache Clears the cache immediately and frees the memory Clear cache on exit Check the box to cl
119. update or add to this information Owner information does not include your username or passwords 1 Open Owner Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Owner 2 Modify or enter the text and then select Done 4 Done 540 CHAPTER 25 Tip When Keylock is on your handheld does not respond when you press the application buttons To use your handheld again press the power button and then select Deactivate Keylock Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Conserving battery power You can save battery power by preventing your handheld from turning on accidentally and by adjusting the Power Preferences settings Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident Does your handheld turn itself on accidentally in your briefcase pocket or purse You can lock the buttons on the front of your handheld to prevent this from happening and to prevent the battery from draining 1 Open Keylock Preferences Preferences a Go to Applications Keylock Activation PEs Never b Select Prefs Automatic Manual c Select Keylock Keylock prevents your handheld from turning on if a button or key is pressed accidentally Y Continued 541 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Select one of these settings and then select Done Never Keylock always remains off Automatic Keylock turns on automatically when you turn off your handheld or when your handheld go
120. use of the expansion card slot e Turn the Bluetooth feature off when you re not using it or turn the discoverable setting to off Tungsten T5 Handheld 587 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions When I connect my handheld to the AC charger it does not charge e Confirm that your handheld is firmly connected to the AC charger e Confirm that your AC charger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your handheld is charging If your battery is completely drained you ll need to charge it for a few minutes before you can turn it on and see the battery icon My handheld is not responding Tip On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen If this happens first check that Keylock is not turned on After a soft reset the Preferences screen appears with the Date amp Time option highlighted so you can reset the date and time if necessary NOTE Ifyou had a network connection that was cut off your handheld may not respond for up to 30 seconds Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset If Keylock is off and your handheld is still not responding you need to reset your handheld A soft reset tells your handheld to stop and start over again This does not affect any of the information or applications on your handheld If your handheld does not respond after a soft reset you need to perform a hard reset If you
121. viewing a Change the page name or Size 22 0K category if you want Tungsten T5 Handheld 413 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Viewing a saved file You can use the web browser to view web pages or image files that are on the handheld s internal drive or an expansion card The types of file that can be viewed include HTML HTM GIF and JPG Tip Suppose you have an HTML file on your 1 Press the Files button desktop computer that you want to carry with yon Sige ane ue 2 Select a file or folder to open it onto handheld s internal drive or expansion card A web browser icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list if it is a and use the web browser file that is automatically opened in web browser to view the page on your handheld 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 414 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Communicating with other users You can communicate with others by means of email or beaming Sending email by means of an Internet email account You can use your Internet email account to send an email message and attachments 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Log in to your Internet email account a Go to the web page that allows you to log in to your email account b Enter your username and password 3 Compose your email message 4 Send or save the email message 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 415 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Returning to a web page you recently visit
122. visit the Application screen check the Remember Last Category box Y Continued 516 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 5 Select a photo for the background a Check the Background box b Select the picture box c Select a picture d Select Done e Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo f Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 517 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Making the screen easier to read In many applications you can change the font style to make text easier to read There are four font styles available In certain lighting conditions you may also need to adjust the brightness to read the information on the screen Changing the screen fonts Memo 4 4of6 gt create data Small font Small bold font Large bold font Tungsten T5 Handheld 518 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 1 Open an application 2 Open the Select Font dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Font 3 Select the font style you want to use and then select OK Select Font Small bold Font A EJ AJA Large bold Large Small 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 519 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Adjusting the brightness 1 Tap System Info on the status bar 2 Drag the slider to adjust the brightness level and then tap Jul 10 2004 outside the dialog box 1 1 08 pm Battery 4
123. year appear and which symbol separates the segments Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week Numbers Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols 4 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 530 CHAPTER 25 Did You Know You can change the input area anytime by selecting the status bar or input area icons Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Customizing the way you enter information Your handheld lets you choose how you enter information You can choose the input area or the writing area choose Graffiti 2 strokes and create shortcuts to make entering information faster Customizing the input area You can configure your input area your preference for keyboards or for Graffiti 2 writing You can also choose to see your strokes as you write 1 Open Input Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Input Select the type of input area you want e Keyboard ide e Classic Ny Continued Preferences Input Select an Input Configuration M Show Graffiti Strokes 531 CHAPTER 25 Tip Right after you write a character your handheld interprets a quick tap on the screen as a period character If you want to tap a button either wait a few seconds or tap the Full screen writing icon on the status bar Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld
124. you select No go to step 9 c Select Next Y Continued CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Network Service Do you want to setup your handheld to connect to the Internet and send e mail Network Service Setup Do you subscribe to high speed data service GPRS from your carrier v Yes 261 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Tip Contact your ISP for 8 nek AOL or If you selected Yes in step 7 Network Service Setup Select the area where your Earthlink Or your a Select the pick lists and select phone service is registered wireless carrier for the correct information for v USA example Orange or your cellular carrier i Cingular if you are not Select year carrier sure about these settings b Select Next and then select a a alae Done 9 If you selected No in step 7 a Select Next b Enter the phone number you use to dial in to your ISP and the username for your dial up account c Select the Password box enter your account password and select OK This is the password you use to access your dial up account d Select Next and then select Done 4 Done You now have set up your phone connection to browse the web and send and receive email messages Tungsten T5 Handheld 262 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Accessing email and the web wirelessly After you set up a connection with a mobile phone you can send and receive
125. 02 writing memos with 238 Memos icon 27 Memos list 238 239 240 menu bar 46 Menu icon 591 menu shortcuts 47 menus 45 46 icon on status bar 22 639 messages See also e mail text messages automatically resending 311 connection types for 255 displaying unread 159 168 downloading large 336 339 receiving 255 388 removing confirmation 251 sending plain text 308 309 setting alarms for 509 Messages option 298 Microsoft Exchange accounts 345 349 Microsoft Internet Explorer See Internet Explorer Microsoft Outlook applications that synchronize 79 transferring into to handheld 77 Microsoft Outlook See Outlook Microsoft Windows systems See Windows information Microsoft Word application 240 Microsoft Word documents 335 Microsoft Word files 26 276 missing applications 26 590 missing icons 590 mobile devices 122 128 mobile phones accessing e mail accounts from 293 accessing Internet with 255 attaching modems to 544 beaming to 278 connecting to 255 258 264 549 605 connecting to Internet from 264 creating trusted pairs for 258 604 dialing 130 131 429 Tungsten T5 Handheld high speed connections and 261 key exchanges and 272 passkeys and 260 604 requirements for 133 258 Modem Wait option 379 modems connecting to IR port from 544 entering initialization strings for 379 548 setting up connections for 547 551 Money category 491 money See currency Month View 152 164 166 169 Month View icon 164 month setti
126. 152 169 170 expansion card information 27 expense reports 27 expenses 459 Graffiti 2 alternate strokes 534 hidden or masked entries 471 HotSync log 84 images 179 414 information 19 25 497 items in lists 43 45 memos 239 notes 250 PDF files 30 personal calendars 137 photos 179 568 pick lists 25 schedules 159 161 163 164 slide shows 186 song lists 211 space information 112 tasks 159 168 229 233 234 unread messages 159 168 URLs 401 web pages 403 412 414 World Clock 27 510 631 DNS defined 555 DNS addresses 555 Do not allow wakeup command 274 do s and don ts 578 DOC files 335 documentation xx 29 Documents application 26 creating files 175 editing files 175 opening files 176 viewing files 175 Documents To Go desktop application 175 domain name system DNS 555 down arrow controls 25 Download attachments option 299 354 Download dialog box 412 download options 338 downloading additional software 17 applications 95 97 335 attachments 335 336 339 e mail 286 297 298 381 files 335 412 images 335 large messages 336 339 multiple attachments 340 Palm Desktop software 3 photos 119 web pages 412 drafts 312 drained batteries 587 drawing freehand 196 244 drawing tools 196 Drive Mode defined 27 Tungsten T5 Handheld using 103 working on handheld 600 drivers 544 drop down lists See lists due dates 223 224 228 234 dummy expansion card 569 Duplicate Contact command 125 dup
127. 2 original color Personalize a photo Draw on Picture i a Inthe Thumbnail or List View select the photo you want ip Select the drawing tool button to change line size b Open the menus Select the text tool button to change font size c Select Draw on Picture from the Tediadl Media menu Tip Drawing tool Use the eraser selection d Draw on the photo using the Color button on the drawing tool to following tools erase drawings only select Undo to delete text You can only use Undo once to delete text fora given photo If you need to delete text after using Undo select Done and do Drawing tool Draw anywhere on the photo using the stylus Text tool Enter text in the field Tap anywhere on the screen to open a text field in a new location Color button Select a drawing color not save the photo and e Select Done then open the photo and try again Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 196 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos 3 Select one of the following to save or reject changes Replace Original Saves the photo with drawing in place of the Original photo with no drawing the original photo is lost Save as New Picture Saves both the photo with drawing and the Save New Picture You have drawn on this picture What do you want to do with the changes Replace Original Don t Save Changes Cancel original photo with no drawing You can enter a name for the new photo You c
128. 23 128 current date and time 500 504 e mail attachments 340 413 events 152 169 170 expansion card information 27 expense reports 27 expenses 459 files on internal flash drive 75 Graffiti 2 alternate strokes 534 hidden or masked entries 471 HotSync log 84 images 179 414 information 19 25 497 items in lists 43 45 memos 239 notes 250 PDF files 30 personal calendars 137 photos 179 568 pick lists 25 schedules 159 161 163 164 slide shows 186 song lists 211 651 space information 112 tasks 159 168 229 233 234 unread messages 159 168 URLs 401 web pages 403 412 414 World Clock 27 510 views Calendar 161 163 164 165 views multimedia files 180 virtual private networks 30 279 280 virus scanning software 585 volume adjusting alarm 509 539 adjusting modem 547 disabling speaker 539 Volume setting connections 547 VPN disconnecting 565 entering settings 562 564 VPN Link 30 VPNs 279 280 wW Wait For command 558 Wait For Prompt command 558 waking up handhelds 274 warnings 589 619 warranty 587 web addresses 398 421 See also URLs Web browser application saving web pages 413 setting browser options 420 web browsers 420 web pages accessing 398 399 400 Tungsten T5 Handheld bookmarking favorites 405 416 caching 423 changing bookmarks for 405 407 408 clearing cache for 424 displaying 414 downloading 412 finding information on 401 hiding address fields for 399 loading f
129. 24 number keyboard icon 24 numbers 57 66 463 533 O off line viewing 412 413 Office files 78 174 176 omitting passkeys 258 omitting passwords 551 on 520 Online Troubleshooting Guide 593 onscreen keyboards See keyboards opening applications 34 80 523 571 calendars 172 category lists 152 168 571 dialog boxes 25 44 files 572 Find dialog box 48 handheld 587 handheld menus 46 History lists 416 HotSync Manager 27 266 image files 335 masked entries 471 Note Pad 27 245 onscreen keyboards 24 67 photo albums 192 RealOne Mobile Player 220 RealPlayer 26 Reminders screen 304 text files 335 text messages 391 web pages 416 420 operating systems 2 optional information xxi options 25 85 order forms 421 641 organizing applications 49 491 information 49 490 orientation of screen 23 Outbox 312 317 318 Outbox icons 318 outgoing mail options 288 290 373 375 Outgoing mail server option 370 outgoing mail servers 279 284 Outlook marking completed tasks and 230 setting as default mail program 351 synchronizing with 10 89 115 594 595 Overdue task icon 160 overdue tasks 159 168 229 234 overlapping events 166 owner information 540 Owner Preferences screen 540 pager 122 paging through documentation xx Palm Desktop Installer icon 7 Palm Desktop software completing repeated tasks and 230 creating user profiles from 12 13 described 2 28 downloading 3 entering information in 80 82 importing informati
130. 24 Managing Clock Settings Setting the primary location Ce gt In World Clock you can set the location date and time for a primary location The settings for this Primary location primary location are used by all of the applications on your handheld Typically a city in the time zone in which you live 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the primary location Primary location Weer alor a Select the primary location pick list San Francisco pick list p y Sat Dec 25 2004 9 58 pm b Select the location you want to be the primary location If you need more choices modify the locations list 4 Done wv Tokyo London Sun 2 58pm Sun 5 58am Set Date amp Time Tungsten T5 Handheld 501 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Setting the date and time for the primary location Did You Know You can set the date and time in Preferences as you did during the initial setup of your handheld When the Daylight or in World Clock When you change the date and time in one application it is automatically Savings settings are changed in the other active the time changes according to the rule for the primary location For 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O example in North America the time changes at 2 00 a m in 2 Europe it changes at Select Set Date amp Time 1 00 a m 3 Set the date Set Date a Select the Date box Year mm aea LA
131. 45 347 349 352 handhelds 476 IMAP mail folders 383 384 385 info not updating 600 information 79 593 installing applications and 93 95 multiple e mail accounts 358 over networks 83 overview 76 related topics for 17 third party applications and 8 648 troubleshooting problems 84 593 598 upgrades and 4 usernames 281 wirelessly 255 265 with IR port 83 with Microsoft Outlook 10 89 115 594 595 with user profiles 11 14 16 system information icon on status bar 22 System Preferences screen 382 system requirements 2 System Sound pick list 539 T TAB files 107 tab delimited files 107 tapping application titles 46 arrow icons 25 check boxes 25 command buttons 25 entry boxes 25 menu items 46 problems with 579 588 590 screen elements 24 533 538 578 URLs 410 Task Preferences dialog box 224 233 tasks See also Tasks application adding contact information to 126 adding notes to 223 adding to Tasks list 233 archiving 231 232 assigning due dates to 223 224 228 attaching to e mail 236 Tungsten T5 Handheld categorizing 223 229 234 changing date due 234 combining with appointments 137 completing 230 creating 223 deleting 231 232 displaying 159 168 229 233 234 entering from Outlook 10 594 managing 222 marking as private 223 organizing 229 prioritizing 223 234 reordering 234 saving 223 231 232 scheduling repeating 225 227 setting alarms for 224 234 setting repeat intervals for 226 228
132. 4K expansion slot PalmPIMs Support 5K Pics amp Videos CE b Open the menus Prefs c Select Send on the App menu d Select the application you want to send N NOTE You cannot send an application that has a lock icon next to the application size 2 Send the application a Select Send b Select Bluetooth and then select OK 3 Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK The information is sent to the receiving device 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 441 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Using the Send command with the VersaMail application You can send information as an attachment to an email message using the Send command Follow the procedures for sending information a category or an application Select VersaMail in the Send With dialog box The VersaMail application opens displaying a blank message with the information you want to send as an attachment Address the message enter a subject line and then select Send or Get amp Send Using the Send command with SMS Ry NOTE You cannot send a category or an application with SMS You can send information as part of a text message using the Send command Follow the procedure for sending information Select SMS in the Send With dialog box The SMS application opens displaying a new text message with the information you want to send as the body of the message Address the message and then select Send Tungsten T5 Han
133. 532 537 troubleshooting problems with 591 GSM mobile phones 544 H handheld connecting to AC charger 21 customizing 27 preinstalled applications for 26 resetting 21 viewing applications on 19 viewing information on 19 Handheld Settings Overview screen 357 Handheld view Web Pro 403 handhelds accessing features 46 adding additional software 110 568 adding applications to 1 561 577 adding owner information 540 adding user information 7 11 backing up e mail databases from 381 beaming to See beaming benefits of 18 charging battery for 4 543 578 588 635 checking space on 111 components of 2 connecting to other devices 544 connecting to PCs 8 connecting to power adapter 543 587 controls described 19 customizing 11 17 512 disconnecting from HotSync cable 593 do s and don ts 578 freeing up space on 109 113 158 589 getting additional information about xxii getting help with 615 getting unexpected results 538 locking 477 480 540 losing 540 maintenance information for 578 naming 257 not making sounds 589 not responding 541 579 588 opening 587 protecting 256 260 recharging battery 4 5 543 587 related topics for 17 31 removing items 109 replacing information on 90 92 resetting 477 579 588 restoring information on 582 running out of space on 568 setting auto off delay for 543 setting idle timeouts for 555 setting power preferences for 541 543 setting up 1 6 7 17
134. 555 compact discs 208 company phone lists and memos 11 17 completed tasks 230 231 232 234 components handheld 2 Compress Day View check box 168 compressed files 336 computers connecting to 8 255 267 copying information to 448 customizing connections for 547 Drive Mode and 103 106 File Transfer and 99 102 managing schedules from 172 overwriting information on 90 92 preinstalled software for 28 removing Palm Desktop software 114 setting up mobile connections for 268 627 setting usernames and passwords 268 synchronization options for 85 87 synchronizing with 79 83 265 598 troubleshooting File Transfer problems 599 troubleshooting synchronization problems 593 updating information from 90 92 conduit configuration screen 345 Conduit Settings command 14 conduit shortcuts 357 conduits 88 356 359 conference calls 146 conferences 145 Confirm note delete check box 251 confirmation messages 251 confirmation tones 570 conflicting events 168 conformity declaration 618 Connect to setting 547 connecting headphones to handheld 20 headsets to handheld 539 to AC charger 21 to Bluetooth devices 21 255 257 547 to dial in servers 551 to mobile phones 258 264 to networks 550 553 to other devices 254 255 544 to personal computers 8 255 267 to power adapter 543 587 to power sources 588 to the Internet 255 411 551 Connection pick list 551 Connection Preferences screen 544 546 Tungsten T5 Handheld C
135. 6 27 04 2 59 menu and selecting Send 5559191 Sorry willbe l ate pm 16505551234 _ ididuhear fro have some ideas about the meeting Did You Know You can set an alert that lets you know a new message has arrived Open the Preferences menu and check the Alert sound box Select the Ny Continued Alarm pick list to choose a sound Tungsten T5 Handheld 391 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know You can change how your 4 Store delete or reply to the message messages are listed You can sort the messages in Select Done The message is kept in the Inbox order of one of the following Alphabetic Select Reply A new message is created with the sender s phone number in the Date Phone Number and To line Any selected text is copied into the new message Status You can also choose to display the date Select Delete The message is sent to the Trash category the message was received Open the Options menu and select Preferences Select from the Sort by pick list and select Show date Archive the message You can store your message in the Archive category a Open the menus b Select Archive on the Message menu 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 392 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Editing a draft text message Did You Know You can store your message in your Draft folder and work on it later by opening the Message menu and selectin
136. 60 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your daily schedule Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time You can scroll between days in the current week or jump to any other date 1 Open Day View a Press Calendar Oss b Select the Day View icon a enema 4SM EATIS Day selector Birthday icon 4 Adam Spear Alarm icon eBetacandidate No time icon 5 Repeat icon Event duration Note icon Category marker Day View icon Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 161 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Do any of the following to view your daily schedule e Select the day selector to view another day in the same week select the arrows to scroll to the previous or next week or select Go To to choose a specific date Select the Repeat icon the Alarm icon or Details to open the Details dialog box Select the Note icon to view the note text Select the Birthday icon to view the birthday entry Select the category marker to assign the event to a color code 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 162 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5 way to scroll to the next or previous week To go to Day View for a particular day press Center on the 5 way to insert a highlight press Right or Left to select a day and then press Center on the 5 way again Did You Know Reschedule an event within the same week by dragging the event box to the new time an
137. 7 Browsing the Web Tungsten T5 Handheld Select the Home Page box Preferences i Page General Advanced _ Home Page Start With v Last Page Viewed Z www com net org More v http Restore Default M Show Address Bar Enter the URL you want as your Home page by doing one of the following e To make the page currently displayed your Home page select Current URL e To select one of the last five home pages you used as your Home page select the Previously Viewed pick list and select a URL e Enter a URL on the Address line Select OK twice 4 Done 418 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Changing your start page You can select the start page you want your handheld to open to when you first open web browser 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the Page tab 3 Select the Start with pick list and select the page you want to start with when you first open the web browser Home Page The page you have set as your Home page Last Page Viewed The last page you viewed before exiting the web browser Bookmarks The Bookmarks dialog box opens The web browser does not connect to the Internet 4 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 419 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting advanced browser options You can change options on your handheld t
138. 72 Cut icon 47 cutting text 71 cycling through calendar views 159 D daily events 138 142 daily schedules 161 162 166 daily tasks 226 228 data 114 See also information data entry caution for 20 defined 66 input area for 19 methods for 50 51 531 data services 258 410 databases 107 381 Date amp Time Preferences screen 525 527 date formats 529 530 dates See also calendar assigning to appointments 138 142 assigning to repeating tasks 227 228 changing 154 451 502 checking 500 displaying current 504 displaying due 234 displaying in World Clock 510 entering current 64 525 528 flagging series of 145 incorrect 589 Tungsten T5 Handheld recording completion 234 reserving in calendar 140 resetting 525 527 scheduling reminders for 120 selecting on calendar 138 223 setting alarms for specific 153 225 249 setting due 223 224 setting location specific 502 525 setting repeat intervals for 143 144 145 154 setting sequence 530 sorting by 250 viewing scheduled 159 162 163 164 viewing specific 163 Day View displaying overlapping events in 166 scheduling events for 138 140 selecting 138 161 setting display options for 152 166 168 setting timeframes for 170 Day View icon 138 Daylight Savings settings 502 506 Days To Synchronize Mail option 354 DBA files 107 Deactivate Keylock button 541 deadlines 140 decimal separators 530 Default Currency pick list 455 default settings overwriting
139. 76 478 582 saving 41 109 592 searching for 48 selecting 19 70 setting up multiple handhelds for 7 11 sharing 20 119 237 437 448 577 synchronizing 79 593 transferring to expansion cards 448 updating 79 88 upgrades and 7 viewing by category 497 infrared port See IR port Infrared setting 547 initialization strings modems 379 548 input area 19 24 icon on status bar 22 inserting expansion cards 20 570 installation CD 2 7 28 110 585 installation prerequisites 111 installing additional software 28 110 applications 28 571 Palm Desktop software 3 7 28 related topics for 17 instant messenger IM accounts 122 Int l button 67 interactive tutorial 7 internal flash drive 75 backing up 100 difference between program memory and 75 viewing contents 75 599 international keyboard 67 Internet See also web sites accessing 255 277 browsing 255 connecting to 255 411 551 disconnecting from 410 e mail accounts and 415 retrying connections for 411 selecting service provider for 264 setting up network connections for 262 Internet Explorer 2 See also web browsers Internet mail servers 350 Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP 283 637 Internet protocol IP 555 Internet Service Providers ISPs 255 278 284 550 invalidating warranty 587 IP Address check box 555 IP addresses 555 IR port beaming from 443 444 445 creating connections for 544 location of 20 setting up connections for 547 synchronizing
140. 8 viewing unscheduled time slots for 168 archive folders 109 archived items 109 156 232 ASF media files 179 assigned passwords 551 assigning actions to pen stroke 524 passwords 468 473 477 551 usernames to handheld 11 asterisk characters 118 Attach Signature check box 289 316 attachments adding 340 341 downloading 335 336 339 reading 340 413 sending events as 136 173 sending files as 340 342 sending memos as 243 449 sending multimedia files as 202 sending notes as 253 sending photos and videos as 343 sending tasks as 236 Attachments screen 341 Audible Player software 29 audio applications 20 203 audio files 204 207 authentication 271 290 295 296 376 Authentication option 290 authentication servers 295 561 Auto Empty check box 332 auto get mail feature constraints 280 306 failing 304 retrying 305 scheduling 300 301 setting notification options for 302 Auto Lock Handheld option 478 Auto Disconnect option 379 Auto Empty Mail from Trash option 378 auto off after interval 587 auto off delay 543 589 autofill option 421 automatically locking handhelds 477 478 available storage space 573 B back panel controls 21 backgrounds adding photos as 168 513 517 customizing 168 513 517 selecting color of 246 521 backing up information 28 internal flash drive 100 backing up mail databases 381 Backup ALL Databases check box 382 backup cards 576 Backup folder 381 basics 6 7 585 battery cautions
141. 9 168 wireless connections for 386 e mail accounts accessing from Internet 415 changing 291 295 368 connection types and 278 creating 286 344 defining as synchronize only 291 deleting 292 632 displaying summary information for 356 excluding from synchronization 358 managing 291 scheduling auto get for 300 305 selecting 293 297 setting up secure connections for 359 synchronizing multiple 358 synchronizing with client 349 351 testing 290 upgrading 277 e mail applications 344 350 555 e mail folders 319 e mail providers 278 283 284 See also ISPs eBooks 30 Edit Accounts option 368 Edit Categories command 229 Edit Categories dialog box 150 151 491 492 493 Edit Connection dialog box 545 Edit currencies command 453 Edit List dialog box 505 507 Edit menu 71 72 Edit Playlist dialog box 213 editing 70 239 245 250 See also changing electrical discharge 579 electrostatic discharge 620 621 email accessing 26 Email address option 370 emergency information 491 empty screen 588 Empty Trash dialog box 331 Tungsten T5 Handheld emptying Trash folder 331 332 378 Enable Background Playback check box 212 Enable device name cache command 273 Enable Smart Addressing option 378 enabling buttons and controls 533 encryption 279 377 End command 559 entering current date and time 64 525 528 information 19 50 51 67 79 531 owner information 540 passkeys 260 272 passwords 262 284
142. 90 92 restoring 523 selecting 86 Default View pick list 167 Delay command 559 delays 479 543 Delete command 114 Delete Contact dialog box 127 Delete dialog box 114 Delete Event command 156 Delete Event dialog box 156 Delete From pick list 114 Delete icon 47 Delete Item command 457 Delete Memo command 241 Delete Memo dialog box 241 Delete messages on server option 286 Delete Note command 251 Delete Old Messages dialog box 329 Delete Task command 231 Delete Task dialog box 231 deleting applications 113 576 appointments 156 bookmarks 407 categories 493 connections 544 546 contacts 127 desktop software 7 e mail 286 328 329 331 e mail accounts 292 e mail filters 367 events 156 158 expense records 457 458 files from handheld 109 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 537 information 72 109 477 576 589 locations 507 mail folders 325 memos 241 notes 251 630 passwords 476 photos 192 199 playlists 218 private entries 476 service profiles 556 songs 217 tasks 231 232 description fields 138 139 deselecting options 25 Desktop overwrites handheld option 90 92 desktop software See also Palm Desktop software downloading 17 overwriting information in 90 92 removing old 7 updating handheld from 90 92 desktop software installing 28 Details dialog box 494 548 554 device name cache 273 Device name field 257 device names 273 274 540 Device pick list 112 devices 20 255 256 544 See also Bluetooth d
143. AN Access Points 255 Bluetooth Manager 258 Bluetooth setting 547 Bluetooth settings screen 263 Bluetooth technology 254 255 BMP files 179 335 bold fonts 519 bonding trusted pairs 272 Bookmark icon 406 407 Bookmark Page dialog box 405 bookmarks adding 405 416 changing 407 408 displaying list of 406 Bookmarks dialog box 419 Bookmarks option 419 bottom arrow controls 25 brightness 518 587 broken envelope icon 304 browsing options 420 421 422 427 browsing the web 26 263 398 416 budgets 451 built in applications 26 113 Business Card command 444 business cards 124 444 business expenses 452 See also Expense application buttons activating 45 533 assigning to applications 523 calculator 463 locking 541 not responding 532 541 579 588 opening applications from 41 quick 19 reassigning application 523 restoring defaults for 523 selecting dialog box 44 tapping command 25 Buttons Preferences screen 523 Cc cables 579 cache 273 423 424 cache size 423 424 cached web pages 423 Calculator application 27 benefits of 462 buttons described 463 categorizing with Expense 491 copying and pasting from 464 displaying calculation history 464 re entering numbers 463 related topics for 466 625 troubleshooting 466 Calculator icon 27 calculators 27 462 calendar adding appointments to 138 changing events on 154 163 changing repeat intervals for 154 color coding appointments 139 149 customizing 166 167 530
144. AOT Ey Marking a task complete Tip You can check off a task to indicate that you ve completed it You can set Task Preferences to record the date that you finish your 1 tasks and you can show or hide finished tasks To change these settings 2 open the Options menu Check the box on the left side of A All Date AE and select Preferences the task Personal 4 Done Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 Ry NOTE Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks differently Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task and Microsoft Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task Tungsten T5 Handheld 230 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey Deleting tasks If a task is cancelled you can delete it from your Tasks list When you delete a repeating task you delete all other instances of the task You can also delete all your completed tasks Tip You can also delete a specific task by selecting the task selecting Details and then selecting Delete Tip If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks you can refer to them later by importing them Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting a specific task 1 2 Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 Select the task you want to delete Open the Delete Task dialog box Delete Task 77 Q Delete selected task a Open the menus b Select Delete Task on the M Save archive copy o
145. Be sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke When you lift the stylus from the screen your handheld recognizes the stroke immediately and prints the character at the insertion point on the screen 54 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing J Did You Know e Write the characters exactly as shown In the following tables Don t write the dot It s only there Gratta characters ade to show you where to begin writing the character with two strokes are recognized after the second stroke Make the e The Graffiti 2 writing area has two sections Write lowercase letters on the left numbers on the right and capital letters across the middle second stroke quickly e Write at a natural speed and do not write on a slant after the first so that the correct character is e Press firmly recognized e Write large characters F Did You Know Write uppercase letters the same way you write lowercase ones The only difference is where you write them If you re already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm Powered device Graffiti 2 writing will be easy to master Characters are entered in exactly the same way except for i t k and the number 4 These letters are now made with two strokes just the way you would write them if you were using a pen and paper Also
146. Card De Beam your business card to other handhelds by IR port holding down the Contacts application button until the Beam 3 i Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete dialog box appears 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 444 CHAPTER 19 Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your meeting schedule and then beam the entire category to your business partner s handheld Tip When you receive a beamed item you can file the item in a category using the Receive dialog box Tungsten T5 Handheld Sharing Information Beaming a category 1 Select the category you want to beam a Open an application b From the list view select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the category you want This takes you to the list view within the selected category Beam the category a Open the menus b Select the Beam Category menu item in the leftmost menu c When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at the IR port of the other handheld A IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete 4 Done 445 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Beaming an application Tip Select the Beam From 1 pick list to beam an application from an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot Select the application you want to beam a Go to Applications b Open the menus
147. Deleting a memo Working with Memos on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Your handheld contains applications for storing the most common types of information contact names and numbers appointments and so on Memos is the tool to use for capturing information that is meaningful to you but does not fall into one of these categories From meeting notes to recipes and favorite quotations Memos provides a quick and easy way to enter store and share your important information Benefits of Memos e Store essential but hard to remember information e Easily retrieve and share information 237 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Tip In the Memos list you can also just start writing to create a new memo The first letter is automatically capitalized Tip Use Phone Lookup to quickly add a name and phone number to a memo Tungsten T5 Handheld Creating a memo 1 2 y Done Go to Applications and select Memos 6 Create a memo a Select New 1 Power Tips 2 Action Items 11 5 3 Quote of the Day 4 Birthday Wish List 5 Edits for Draft 2 6 Hot New Restaurants b Enter your memo Select Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the Graffiti 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo c Select Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the memo Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often 238 CHAPTER 12 Wri
148. Disconnect O Disconnect on Exit Modem Wait 0 Timeout Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing out To change tap the Timeout field and enter a new value Ny Continued 378 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Is Tip The default Timeout setting is 45 seconds It can be any number Cont d Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple email greater than 0 seconds transactions in a short amount of time however if you set the number too low your Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave the connection attempt may Versa Mail application This feature is an alternative to Auto Disconnect This time out before you make option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in a connection with the the VersaMail application but automatically disconnects when you move on to email service provider a different application on your handheld If this option is not selected you must manually disconnect from your ISP Modem Wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem uses to initialize itself If you have a modem select and enter a number of seconds for the wait The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3 and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0 4 Done Tungsten T5
149. EN55022 1998 CISPR 22 1997 Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions e IEC 61000 4 2 A1 1998 01 ESD Immunity 4kV Contact and 8kV Air Discharge e IEC 61000 4 3 1995 RF Immunity 80 1000MHz 3V M 1kHz 80 A M e ENV 50204 1996 RF Immunity 895 905MHz 3V m 200Hz 50 AM e IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EFT Immunity 1kV on AC port 5 50nSec 5kHs Rep Freq e IEC 61000 4 5 1995 Surge Immunity 1 2 50uSec 2kV peak Common Mode 1kV peak Differential Mode e EN61000 4 6 1996 Conducted Immunity 150kHz 80MHz 3V RMS 1kHz 80 AM e IEC 61000 4 11 1994 100 Voltage Dip 0 5 period 30 Dip 25 periods and gt 100 Dip 250 periods Authorized palmOne Representative David Woo Senior Compliance Engineer Date November 3 2004 Battery Warning Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and in accordance with your local regulations Warning Explosion Hazard e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 e When in hazardous location turn off power before replacing or wiring modules and e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous 619 Tungsten T5 Handheld Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillve
150. Entering additional contact information cccsccceceseeereeeeeseeeeeeess 121 Selecting contact field types ccccccceceseeeeseeeeeeeseceneeeeseeenneeeesenaes 122 Defining custom fields ciscasiciisstisscccscecssecceseessscnnesesnssceceaeetsceneveeens ened 123 Selecting a contact as your business card eeeeeeesseeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaees 124 Copying contact information into multiple contacts ccccceeeeeees 125 Locating a contacton YOUN St 55 sscesacessece nancesneccxcasysasdungces anetencessatnagunesseete 126 Deleting a contact sissciisseasstidcnsessscxeedensieaiabenscncecdeennnsanhadevacsncaaeeseecacaerareeeds 127 CUStOMIZING the COMPACTS ISU sisside 128 Making connections from COntacts cccccccsscceecssneeeeeeseneeeessesnteesseeaes 130 Using Quick Connect iissccccccsssssccccstssssccccetacsccecestanscecestanscenerenausenesstands 130 Customizing Quick Connect settings ccccesseesesesseeeessenneeeeeesenaes 132 Using Tapto CONNEC seriado Cendvtucws sanndatessececctexseandx cate sensa cote tienes 133 Working with Contacts ON your COMPUTE ceeeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeateees 135 MGlabe CLO I CS issn se ceenensatedeceaatnedecaneannenatassaneaduieeh setdernaseata 136 Chapter 7 Managing Your Calendar ccssseeeeee 137 Scheduling EVENS s scccccccsssssscessssssseccssseaseendecensseedeeeansseeddeaenseendeaensanens 138 Scheduling an appointment ccc ceeeceeeeeseeeceeeeseeeneeeeesseeaeeeeeseaaes
151. Favorites View essees 513 Changing entries in Favorites c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeese 514 Customizing the Application View ccccesscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeess 516 Making the screen easier to read cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenneaes 518 Changing the Screen fonts cccissscccccssssscieseseseeccesevsseenceusvssecenvesssencs 518 Adj sting the Brightness sisssecscssvssineticccadennsaetendeencuecsseandanes sectavevasenexs 520 Changing sereen COlOMS sisi cccacashsss cassis sinccteced saacanuessseueeunesidesxbecead eess 521 Changing handedness orientation of the screen ccccccceceeeeeeeees 522 Assigning a button to your frequently used applications 06 523 Setting the date and time ccccccseesccecessseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeessseeeeeess 525 Selecting a lOCALION smesne i 525 Resetting the date and Times isieccessscssecnesssedecncessnascecessacaccenessandaanessecne 527 Selecting formats for dates times and numbers eeceeeeeeeeeeees 529 Tungsten T5 Handheld xvi Customizing the way you enter information cessseeeeesssseeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 531 CUSTOMIZING TNE INPUL ALES seicscccesssassccgcesecccsevesdenesenansnseuqes anadai teats 531 Using the full screen writing area oo eeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 532 Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneaeenessenaas 534 Setting Up SHOMCUIS
152. HAPTER 19 Sharing Information In this chapter Using the Send command Beaming Other ways of sharing information Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld You have to get this memo to your boss now Or the photo of the grandkids in their Halloween costumes to your mom After you ve used your handheld to create or capture that important business and personal information it s time to share it with others Your handheld comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing Benefits of sharing information so that you can choose e Keep others up to date with the quickest most convenient way of meaningful business and personal sending your info information e Choose the most convenient sharing method from a variety of options e Create an informal backup copy of important info 437 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Before You Begin ails You must complete all the prerequisites for the messaging application To use your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology you must set up a phone connection To use it with your handheld s IR port run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection Did You Know You can also easily send information from the desktop component of many applications For example you can send photos from the palmOne Media desktop application See the online desktop help for information Tip If yo
153. IMPORTANT You must have a Windows computer to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer On a Windows computer the VersaMail conduit is installed automatically when you install Palm Desktop software To synchronize email for a given account do the following from your handheld for a e If you plan both to send and receive email wirelessly from your handheld and to synchronize given account leave the email on your handheld with email on your computer you must set up the email account on Synchronize Only your handheld with the correct settings If you plan only to synchronize email on your handheld Account box unchecked with email on your computer you do not need to set up the account on your handheld on the Account Setup screen e Enable synchronization on your computer e Select the synchronization options for the email account Setting up an account on your handheld If you plan both to send and receive email wirelessly from your handheld and to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer you must set up the email account on your handheld If so note the following on the Account Setup screen for each email application or connection type Tungsten T5 Handheld 344 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Microsoft Exchange account Select IMAP in the Protocol pick list Lotus Notes If you want to synchronize to a local mail file instead of a server mail file select POP in the
154. INDEX connections 546 547 contacts 68 118 121 126 362 e mail accounts 281 286 344 e mail messages 308 312 415 expansion cards 568 expense records 451 453 454 files to handheld 74 115 filters 363 login scripts 557 memos 237 238 239 multi day events 145 new locations 505 notes 245 owner information 540 passwords 268 471 472 477 personal calendars 138 personal signatures to e mail 289 316 playlists 213 214 reminders 120 244 repeating events 142 143 repeating tasks 225 227 service profiles 550 551 554 ShortCut strokes 536 songs to playlists 217 To Do lists 222 223 225 trusted pairs 271 unscheduled events 141 untimed events 140 145 user profiles 12 Addit software 27 additional references and resources xxi xxii address field Web Pro 399 Address Lookup screen 314 622 addresses 20 119 362 555 See also contacts addressing e mail 122 313 314 315 378 536 text messages 389 adjusting alarm volume 509 539 brightness 518 587 modem volume 547 speaker volume 539 Adobe Acrobat Reader xx 30 agenda lists 137 See also Calendar application Agenda View customizing Tasks lists and 233 described 159 opening 159 setting display options for 166 168 Agenda View icon 159 Alarm check box 153 224 alarm clock 153 224 499 508 See also alarms clock Alarm icon 161 Alarm Preferences command 509 Alarm Preset settings 171 Alarm Sound pick list 248 539 alarm tones 153 171 234 248 509 alarms See
155. LY To open Calendar on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder and then click Date Book Tungsten T5 Handheld 172 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Sharing e Beaming events to other Palm Powered devices e Sending events to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Support VersaMail Sending events as attachments to email messages If you re having problems f f f f with Calendar or with Privacy Keeping events private by turning on security options anything else on your Categories e Editing and deleting categories handheld go to www palmOne com e Viewing events by category support tungstent5 Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar Questions Tungsten T5 Handheld 173 Managing Your Office Files In this chapter How can create and manage Office files Related Topics Tungsten T5 Handheld With its ability to store large amounts of important information your handheld lets you take your office with you including your Microsoft Office files With the Documents application you Can Carry create view and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files di
156. London trip you can that you want to see in the pick palace dla hts easily delete the related list Category v Paris expenses with the Purge Type Airfare command a Select the Currency pick list Payment v VISA and then select Edit Currency currencies Vendor City N Conti d Attendees Z iTi ontinue Tungsten T5 Handheld 453 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Cont d b Select one of the Currency pick lists and select the name ee a echa of the country whose currency display in currency list Select Currencies i Currency symbol you want to display Currency 1 United States pick list Currency 2 EU Euro c Select OK and then select OK Currency 3 United Kingdom again Currency 4 w Japan Currency 5 None 4 Done The expense list now displays the currencies you selected Presetting the currency symbol Tip Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense If you re entering several expenses that all use the same currency change 1 the preset currency to that symbol to save time When your re finished 2 with those expenses change it again to the next one you ll use Go to Applications and select Expense a Open Expense Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 454 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses 3 Choose the default currency a Select the Default Currency
157. Make sure your handheld is connected securely to the USB sync cable and that the cable is connected to a USB port on the back of your computer e Make sure no other applications such as HotSync Manager or RealPlayer are using the USB sync cable To check press the Home button 4 If Favorites opens then no other applications are using the sync cable If Favorites does not open then another application may be using the cable Try to synchronize If synchronizing doesn t work palmOne File Transfer doesn t work either If File Transfer was working but stops disconnect and reconnect your handheld If this does not solve the problem perform a soft reset can t see a file moved from my computer to my handheld Your handheld stores information in two locations program memory and the internal flash drive When you view files on your handheld using File Transfer on your computer or Files on your handheld only files on the internal drive are displayed If you used palmOne Quick Install to move a file to your handheld depending on the file type the file may be located in your handheld s program memory If this is the case you can t view the file using File Transfer or Files but you can access it by using the appropriate application If you want to be able to see the file in the File Transfer window or the Files screen copy it to your handheld s internal drive using File Transfer Tu
158. Month enter 12 on the Set the repeat interval a Select Day Week Month or Year as the repeat unit Every line and then b Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repeats select Day as the Repeat By setting c Select the End on pick list and select an end date if needed d If you selected Week in step c select the day of the week the event repeats If you selected Month in step c select Day to select the week within the month such as the 4th Thursday or select Date to select the same date within the month such as the 15th e Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 144 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event that is longer than a day Reserve a block of time for events that span several days such as a vacation conference training class or an extended project Did You Know Reserve a specific block of time during the day or use events without times to flag a series of dates For example you can reserve vacation time from 6 23 6 30 using a repeating event without a time and then schedule a specific excursion from 9 00 to 3 00 on 6 24 and dinner with a friend at 6 00 on 6 25 Tip Need to enter an event that extends beyond midnight Enter an end time that is earlier than the start time Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar Oss Enter the event and then select the event description Set the repeat interval Event Details Timer gigg
159. Note Pad 3 Select the pen and paper colors a Select Pen and then select the ink color you want to use b Select Paper and then select the background color you want to use c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 247 CHAPTER 13 Tip Change the alarm sound by opening the Options menu selecting Preferences and then selecting a sound from the Alarm Sound pick list Tungsten T5 Handheld Writing Notes in Note Pad Setting an alarm To use a note as a reminder set an alarm for that note 1 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Open the note a Select Done to display the Note Pad list b Select the note you want to set an alarm for 1 Welcome to Note Pad 7 2 2 Groceries 7 5 3 Bob 7 5 4 Flowers 7 5 5 Bank 7 5 Y Continued 248 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad You can also open the Set 3 Set the alarm Alarm dialog box by alia selecting a note and a Open the menus tapping the right edge of the screen next to the note title b Select Options and then select Alarm c Select the Date box and then select the year month and date you want the alarm to sound Set Date 4 2006 gt Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec SM TW T F S 1 Set Alarm 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 d Select the time you want the alarm to sou
160. ON cccccceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeaeeess 258 Accessing email and the web wirelessly ccseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaeees 263 Setting up a connection for wireless synchronization sscsceeeeeeees 265 Setting up a connection to your Windows desktop computer 267 Setting UP a CONNECTION tO a network cccccceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeseeeeees 269 Creating trusted Pais igisi tyson seen iia ar an aE aAA 271 Setting advanced Bluetooth features cccccceccceccesseeeeeeesseeeeeesesseeeeess 273 Storing recently found device NAMES s ssssssssssssssrrssssrnsssrrnrssren nn 273 Allowing your handheld to wake up when it is turned off 274 Related topie Ssss e E E a EE 275 Chapter 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 276 Upgrading an existing email ACCOUNT cceeceeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeaaaaees 277 ADoutemail ACCOUNTS sesinin ance a a NaS 278 Account and connection types siciis cecaisedssesnacvdss ceccnnseaseaduaazieSeogeenext sae 278 Using am enmiail Provider sipsirin oiana aaa 278 Using a corporate email ACCOUNT ceceeceeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeteeeeenneaeeaees 279 MIPINS eiiaoe a EEEE 280 Creating n aCCO Nt spiana a aaa iA a 281 Setting basic account OPTIONS ccccccesceeeseeeceeeeeeseneeeeesseeneeeeesenaaes 282 Setting advanced mail options cceceeeeseeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesenaaes 286 Testing your MEW ACCOUNT ce
161. S siiis 326 Forwarding an email message ceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneneeeneneeaaees 326 Deleting a MESSAGE is siccicesiissancnssrsescedeendecctavenssrcquadessancneeeessssnaapeayaecte 328 Deleting Old MESS AGE S vs ieivssias teins vied sacnesssetxeveevstoathcasstendescavsena daa 329 Emptying the trash cassisenceesdessccvesssescauseenscecasssesevarveestsscneneedveecausnabsceds 331 Setting the trash to be emptied automatically cccccccseeeeeesnees 332 Marking messages as read or unread ee eeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteaaeeeeees 333 Working With atta CHM GINS sissies aiai 335 Downloading an attachment to your handheld sss 335 Working with a downloaded attachment ceceetceeeeeeeteeteeeeees 336 Downloading large attachments sccccceceeeeeeeeeeneneeaaeeaeeeeees 339 Attaching MeS aeea a tse 340 Attaching photos and videos ssssssssssssssssssrsrnsssssresnnnnnnnnnneennennnnnnnnn 343 Synchronizing email on your handheld with email on yo r G MPUTE sinir assess an n r a a Eaa eede 344 Setting up an account on your handheld ccccecesseeeseeeneeeeeeeenes 344 Enabling synchronization on your COMPUTED ssssssssssssesrrrrrsssesrens 345 Setting synchronization options for your email account s s s 347 Setting mail client synchronization options cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneees 349 Setting Microsoft Outlook as your default email program 351 Setting advanced email synchronization Op
162. SB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into the Multi connector on your handheld b Press the HotSync button on the USB sync cable 2 Select the profile you want to Sate load on the handheld and click OK User Profiler 4 Done The next time you synchronize that handheld Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 16 CHAPTER 1 My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with setup or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Managing Info Customizing Common Questions Synchronizing your handheld with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer Synchronizing wirelessly using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Using your company s network to synchronize information Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific application Transferring information to your handheld from an outside source such as a file containing your company s phone list Adding applications to your handheld Installing additional software from the CD Deleting applications from your handheld View
163. SM I P l authentication ESMTP F Username Username information username username c Do any of the following Port Number The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Use Secure Connection To send outgoing mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the Use Secure Connection box Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 375 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont d My server requires authentication ESMTP Check this box if the outgoing server SMTP requires ESMTP authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the information displayed is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password d Select OK twice 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 376 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Adding APOP to an account To encrypt your username and password when they travel over the network some services require APOP to work properly while others do not work properly if APOP is used APOP works only with accounts that use the POP protocol Tip If you aren t sure if your 1 ISP or web em
164. Select the Delete pick list and select one of these options No Data No information is deleted after the set number of failed attempts Private Records All entries marked private are deleted after the set number of failed attempts All Data All information you entered and all applications you installed on your handheld are deleted after the set number of failed attempts b Select OK Intrusion Protection After 7 Attempt s Private Records All Data If an incorrect pusswuru i gt attempted 7 times all of your data will be deleted Select OK two more times and then select Done 4 Done 488 CHAPTER 22 My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with private entries or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Around Managing Info Customizing Maintaining Common Questions e Opening applications e Using menus Creating a backup of your information Entering your owner information in case your handheld is lost or stolen Doing a hard reset Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy 489 CHAPTER 23 Using Categories to Organize Information Adding a cat
165. TER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Tip Select the scroll arrows at 4 ihe bottomor the Media View photo or video details Media Details iy 4 Name Pois TE vee a Open the menus Date 12 8 37 11 44am other photos in the Size 31KB 432x624 alumi b Select Edit Details from the MEN E ES Media menu c In addition to viewing photo or video details you can do the following Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name Move to different album Select the Album pick list and select a new album location for the photo or video Add notes Select the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video 5 When finished viewing details select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 190 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Organizing photos and videos Tip You can organize your photos and videos in the following ways If a photo is stored on your handheld you can only add it to an album located on the handheld Likewise if a photo is stored on an expansion card you can only add it e Create albums and place your photos and videos in those albums e Move photos and videos within or between albums e Sort photos and videos in the List View to an album that is on the Organizing photos and videos in albums same card Use the copy feature to move a photo 1 from your handheld to a Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE card and vice versa Tip 2 Open the Manage Albums screen
166. Unmatched categories will be placed in Unfiled Source file character set windows ANSI z 3 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 108 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats 2 Import the file into Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer b Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to import information c Click File and then click Import d Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file 3 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Restoring archived items on your computer In many applications you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your handheld or desktop software to an archive folder on your computer This frees up space on your handheld while ensuring the information is available if you need it in the future You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop software The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info about how to restore archived files Refer to these Help files for details Tungsten T5 Handheld 109 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Installing the additional software fr
167. VersaMail If you choose to synchronize with Outlook info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with Outlook You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize with Outlook Other info such as photos and notes is synchronized with Palm Desktop software IMPORTANT Applications files and folders moved to your handheld s internal drive with File Transfer are not automatically backed up during synchronization Use File Transfer to copy or move the updated files and folders to your computer or to back up the contents of your handheld s entire internal drive to your computer 79 CHAPTER 5 Tip The Palm Desktop online Help has lots of info about how to use Palm Desktop software File Transfer and other desktop applications such as Media Open the Help menu and select Palm Desktop Help Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer WINDOWS ONLY 1 Open an application in Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop b Click the icon in the launch bar to open the application Palm Desktop Launch bar New Edit Do one of the following e Click New in the lower left corner of the screen to create a new entry e Click an existing entry and then click Edit in the lower left corner of the screen Y Continued 80 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Han
168. a NEE 402 Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited 402 Changing how you view a page ssssssssssssssssssssssnnnnnsnnesnnrernnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnna 403 Bookmarking your favorite pages ccccceccsseeeesenseeeeeesenaeeessenneeeeesseenaes 405 Adding a HOOKING Sys sissies sce tacee chan o EE 405 Viewing a bookmarked or Saved page c eceeceeeeeeteeeeeeesenteeaeens 406 Editing information about a bookmark or Saved page nsss 407 Arranging the bookmark list dipisono 408 Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet ccccessseeeeeeeee 410 Disconnecting from the Internet ccccccessseeeceessereeeeeseeeeeeeessseeeeeess 410 Connecting tothe IMSKNE E ssiiscicasscetsnavesaccdcserssnecceess aiou ranas 411 Downloading files ANd pages ccccccessseeceeeseseeeeeeesenceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeea 412 Downloading a Tileston aiaa 412 Saving a WED Page sess ccissssscccedssccceedsseecceseessescceevasseccceedssecncetess sens 413 Viewing a saved PIS ccssstzancdssaczeances aecdethuascaddadae aaia 414 Communicating with other USerSsS ssssssssssssssssssrssrnsnsenssrennnnnnnnnnenseennnnns 415 Sending email by means of an Internet email account 0008 415 Returning to a web page you recently visited eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 416 Changing your Home and Start pages ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteaeeeeeeeeeeeeens 417 Changing YOur Home Page sicciissssccisestts scnecessspeeuasanavseccasncessec
169. a a da a aa a d 602 Note Padme aa aaa aa aaa Aa ces a Ea E A aaae 603 Medid ocina a vane E LR 603 FRG AI AV OT 5 Sale ste se coexist ienes ee a aaa e aa eaa Sea ee Ea 603 TASK S e n a tants sales ana suede Semetac tence sea sveatoum encanta 604 Connecting wirelessly cceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseceeeeeeseseseeeeeesseeeeeeess 604 The VersaMail application ccccccccccececssesseeeeseenseeeseeseneeeeesseenaeeeesseaaes 606 PTA ACY soos asec oi caida atten eee veoh eE ae aa tect a E Eaa 609 SMAMING E E E E E A a A E A E N A T 610 Problems with incompatible applications ssssssssssssssssrirssrssssssssrersnnnns 611 Tungsten T5 Handheld xviii Chapter 29 Getting Help ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 615 Self Help TESOULCES senceco e seenddedebeuenvedustennns 615 Technical SUP POM siteisiin aeaa aaa daaa ada 616 Product Regulatory Information cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 617 UNC EA E E E EE EAT 622 Tungsten T5 Handheld xix About This Guide Tungsten T5 Handheld This guide tells you everything you need to know about your handheld the things you ll do every day the advanced features that let you get the most out of your handheld and the things that make your handheld not only useful but fun Tips for viewing this guide Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide as you view it in Adobe Reader e To magnify the page click t
170. a custom Notes installation and have replicated the server mail file to another directory on your desktop make sure that it is the path found in the notes ini file Any account with Eudora on your computer If you are using Eudora as your email application you must set up MAPI in Eudora Select Options from the Eudora Tool menu and then do one of the following e f Eudora is the only email application that you use select Always as the MAPI setting e If you use more than one email application select When Eudora is running as the MAPI setting Make sure that your username and password are set up correctly within Eudora This information is needed to log in to Eudora to retrieve and synchronize your email Eudora must be running for you to synchronize The VersaMail application synchronizes with your Dominant Personality in Eudora 5 1 or later Internet based account on your handheld with your Internet mail server In the Mail Client pick list select Direct POP to server Any account with your IMAP mail server In the Mail Client pick list select Direct IMAP to server Other email applications Select Microsoft Exchange 5 0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option if your email application is compatible with extended MAPI If your email application is compatible with SMAPI select Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail Client option Tungsten T5 Handheld 350 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Settin
171. aby WD 5 Feeling Good 6 Return To Paradise 7 Wait Til You See Her Save Tracks WD 8 Dont Explain como 9 See Line Woman BD print Jewel case 10 Summertime mao M 11 Strange Fruit M 12 Hare Krishna Hail Krishna Eject Y Continued arse SEES Album Save Tracks Select Tracks to Save Track Name M 1 Spanish Grease 2 How Long Has This Been Going On M 3 Who Needs Forever W 4 Is You Is Or Is You Ain t My Baby 5 Feeling Good 6 Retum To Paradise M 7 Wait Til You See Her M 8 Dont Explain M 3 See Line Woman a 10 Summertime m Save to Location C Documents and Settings Joe Sadusky My Documents My Music Format MP3 mp3 96 Ster peo Change Settings To get CD quality MP3 encoding capabilities please click here a 209 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music For tips on using Prepare your handheld RealPlayer on your 3 ee eee computer go to the Help a Go to Favorites and then select Music D menu in RealPlayer or visit www real com b Connect your handheld to your computer using the USB sync cable IMPORTANT Do not press the HotSync button on your cable 4 Select the songs you want to transfer a In RealPlayer on your computer click Burn Transfer b If necessary select palmOne Handheld from the Current Burn Transfer Device drop down list c Drag the song files you wa
172. ace 14 8M of 15M a Select the Device pick list and 7 Address T select one of these options Calendar Connection 5 Contacts Handheld Get information Dute Baok about applications stored on Expense your handheld Memo Fad i Sie Expansion card name Get information about applications stored on your expansion card Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 112 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d b Select one of the following options and then select Done Version Displays the version numbers of all of your applications Size Shows how much space each application occupies The bar at the top shows the total space currently in use on your handheld or expansion card Records Shows the number of records in an application 4 Done Removing information You can remove applications from your handheld and remove Palm Desktop software from your computer Removing an application from your handheld If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed you can remove them from your handheld or from an expansion card Ry NOTE You can only remove add on applications patches and extensions that you install You cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your handheld 1 Go to Applications Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 113 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Betwe
173. acters you are receive text messages charged for one message If you create a message that is 161 to 320 characters you may be charged for two messages and so forth A counter appears at the top of the page to indicate the number of characters Even though a message has more than 160 characters the message appears as one message to the person receiving the message you must set up a phone connection on your handheld to send and receive information wirelessly 1 Go to Applications and select SMS B Key Term SMS Abbreviation for Short Message Service 2 More commonly known Select New as text messages SMS messages can be JEJ 0 unread OAR a Length 0 received by most mobile Unread Sse LAR phones message 336558986 have some ide 5559191 Sorry will be l 36505551234 ididu hear fro Read message Tungsten T5 Handheld 388 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Tip If you are concerned about the length of your messages you can have a warning appear when multipart messages exceed the specified number of parts Open the Options menu and select Preferences Select Details and then select the number of parts from the Warn over pick list Did You Know You can create a signature that you use to sign your messages by opening the Options menu and selecting Preferences Enter a signature on the lines You can add your signature to your message by opening the Op
174. acts 4 In this chapter Adding a contact Copying contact information into multiple contacts Locating a contact on your list Deleting a contact Customizing the Contacts list Making connections from Contacts Working with Contacts on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Say good bye to a paper address book that you need to update manually every time someone moves changes their email address or gets a new work extension With Contacts not only is it easy to enter information such as names addresses and phone numbers but it is just as quick to view update and organize contact information You can easily share info with other handhelds and dial phone numbers or send messages directly from a contact entry using your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology and a compatible mobile phone You can even add photos of your loved ones directly to their contact information screen Benefits of Contacts e Carry all your business and personal contact information in your hand e Keep track of who is who e Keep in touch 117 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Adding a contact Tip If the first character you enter inthe Last Name or Company field is an asterisk or another symbol that record 2 always appears at the top Press the Contacts a button Add your contact information of the Contacts list That s a
175. ader VPN Client Software Tutorial Tungsten T5 Handheld Works with the palmOne Media desktop application Required to prepare videos in certain formats for viewing on your handheld N NOTE QuickTime is included on the CD for Windows computers only For Mac computers QuickTime is included in Mac OS X Access more software and functions after you download WebSphere Everyplace Micro Environment to run Java J2ME on your handheld Download requires Internet connection Enjoy hours of entertainment with this solitaire game With a simple conversion view PDF files that are tailored to fit your handheld s screen Purchase and download eBooks from the web so you can read them when you want where you want Create a secure wireless connection to your corporate network in order to safely send and receive email messages access the corporate intranet and more Download requires Internet connection additional fees apply Learn to use the popular features of your handheld The Tutorial includes a tour of your handheld and step by step instructions Access it from the CD 30 CHAPTER 2 Basics Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5
176. ail provider Select the account to which you want to add APOP supports APOP check with your email provider a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Mail Servers c Select the Account pick list and then select Edit Accounts d Select the name of the account and then select OK 2 Add APOP a On the Mail Servers screen select Details b Select the Options pick list and then select Advanced Incoming c Check the Use APOP box and then select OK 3 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 377 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Any advanced preferences you set are account specific they apply only to the account you are currently in Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting advanced account preferences 1 Open the Advanced Preferences screen a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the Advanced tab Select any of the following preferences Enable Smart Addressing Displays a list of addresses that match the letters you enter in the To field You can select the address you want from the list Auto Empty Mail from Trash Determines how often email messages in the trash are automatically deleted a Preferences a General Advanced System M Enable Smart Addressing M Auto Empty Mail from Trash v Older Than 1 Week Timeout O Auto
177. alm Desktop software Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files Calendar vCal iCal VCS ICS and Calendar archive DBA Contacts vCard VCF comma delimited CSV TXT tab delimited TAB TSV TXT Contacts archive ABA Memos Comma delimited CSV TXT tab delimited TAB TSV TXT Memos archive MPA Text TXT Tasks Tasks archive TDA WINDOWS ONLY 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats 2 Import the file into Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop b Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the information into Y Continued 107 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d c Click File and then click Import d Follow the onscreen instructions to map the fields in your file to the fields in Palm Desktop software and import the file Imported fields Specify Import Fields Palm Fields Data in Conference Contacts csv A Scan Records gt Record 2 To change the field order click a field name on the left and drag it up or down the list to match the data on the right If the ALL category is selected before importing records the category field will be available in the field list Drag the category field to match the data tion on the right Only existing categories will be matched
178. almOne Media or with VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages anything else an your Common Answers to frequently asked questions about palmOne Media handheld go to Questions www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 202 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music In this chapter Transferring MP3 files to your handheld Transferring music from a CD to your handheld Playing music on your handheld Managing playlists Viewing song info Working with RealPlayer on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Are you tired of listening to small talk during that long commute on the bus or train Do you need something smaller than a CD player when you re out for a walk or at the gym RealPlayer lets you play music on your handheld Simply transfer songs onto your handheld and then listen through the built in speaker or stereo headphones sold separately Benefits e Listen to songs in the popular MP3 format e No separate MP3 CD or mini disc player required e Be your own DJ 203 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Transferring MP3 files to your handheld Before You Begin The RealPlayer software that comes with your handheld is compatible with the popular MP3 audio Windows Install the file format Use RealPlayer on your computer to copy MP3 files to your handheld s internal drive RealPlayer desktop application on your c
179. an also select the pick list to save the updated photo to a different album Don t Save Changes Saves only the original photo with no drawing Cancel Returns to Draw on Photo screen 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 197 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Copying a photo or video You can copy photos and videos from your handheld to an expansion card and vice versa Tip Copy an entire album by 1 opening the Album menu selecting Album and then selecting Copy Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE Album to Card or Copy 2 Select a photo or video to copy Album to Handheld Select the album you a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing want and then select the photo or video you want Done when copying is complete b Select the photo or video 3 Copy the photo a Open the menus b Select Copy to Card for photos or videos on your handheld or Copy to Handheld for photos or videos on an expansion card from the Media menu 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 198 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Deleting a photo or video Tip Delete an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Album Details Select the album Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE you want and then select 2 Select a photo or video to delete Delete on the Album Details screen a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the a
180. and drag the cursor over all the text you want to select Selecting a word e Tap twice on a word to select it e Place the cursor before or after the word and drag it over the word to select it Selecting a line e Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it This selects the final return character or space as well as any text e Place the cursor before or after the line and drag it over the line to select it Drag up or down to select the final return character or space as well as any text Drag left to right to select text only Tungsten T5 Handheld 70 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Copying and pasting information Tip Copying and pasting information on your handheld is similar to editing with word processing ThereareevenTaster applications on your computer ways to copy and paste information e Use Graffiti 2 gestures 1 Select the information you want to copy e Use the Graffiti 2 Command stroke and the 2 menu shortcut for cut Copy the information copy or paste X C P a Open the menus e Select the text write the command stroke and b Select Edit and then select Copy then tap the icon for cut or copy Move to the place where you want to 3 place the info write the command stroke again and tap the icon for paste 4 Tap where you want to paste the information Select Edit and then select Paste 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 71 CHAPTER 4 En
181. andheld 1 Open an entry a Open an application b Select an entry or select New Tap Input on the status bar to open the input area Tap abc or 123 to open the alphabetic or numeric keyboard respectively Ny Continued Tap to open keyboards 66 CHAPTER 4 Tip When a keyboard is open you can tap abc 123 or Int l to open any of the other keyboards Tungsten T5 Handheld 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld amp OPTIONAL Selectfrom among four different keyboards abc lowercase Backspace Carriage return Caps shift Tap here to display lowercase keyboard ABC uppercase int international Apanaar Jz x c v e fn int ABC abc 123 Tap here to display Tap here to display Tap here to display uppercase keyboard numeric keyboard international keyboard Tap the characters to enter text numbers and symbols 4 Done 67 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Entering info from Contacts into another application Tip Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter their name and phone number into the appointment you create in Calendar This feature is In the applications that PP available in Calendar Memos Tasks and Expense use Phone Lookup you can also enter the first few letters of a contact s last name where you 1 Open an entry want to enter the contact information On
182. andheld In this chapter Dialing a number Using speed dial Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld You have been using Quick Connect in Contacts to set up client meetings and you now you are feeling hungry You can quickly dial the local pizza parlor even if their number is not in your Contacts list Tap out the number on the Dialer keypad select Dial and your mobile phone begins dialing Your call history stays on your handheld for easy access later Benefits of Dialer e An easy to use keypad on your handheld screen for dialing numbers that are not in Contacts e Keep your call history on your handheld e Quickly dial numbers using speed dial 429 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Dialing a number Before You Begin Tapping in a number on your handheld is sometimes easier than using your mobile phone Before you can dial a number you must set up Entering a number a phone connection on your handheld 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Tap the telephone number on the keypad Dialer Digits appear in the numeric display Enter phone number and select Dial Select Clear to delete last digit from numeric display Select and hold to clear entire numeric display Select and hold the 0 key to add a plus to the number sequence 3 Select Dial 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 430 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Redialing the
183. andheld For example if your handheld is locked File Transfer displays an alert message stating that you must unlock your handheld before using File Transfer A message also appears if your handheld is not connected to your computer or is unavailable for any other reason Drag copy or move files folders or applications from the desktop into the File Transfer window to the location you want on your handheld s internal drive N NOTE If you use File Transfer to install an application in the Applications folder on your internal drive and if the application is designed to run from a flash drive you can run the application on your handheld Work with files on your handheld a Press the Files button b Browse to find the file you want c Select the file to open it N NOTE If there is no application for the file a beep alert sounds Y Continued Files Internal Drive 2 W EE A Ee ae O Internal Drive Applications Documents Music Photos amp Videos 101 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Did You Know You can work with files 4 and folders in the File Transfer window in many of the same ways that you Access or move files from your handheld to a computer that has File Transfer installed N NOTE Use Drive Mode if you are at a computer that does not have File work with files and Transfer installed The computer must support standard USB removable d
184. andheld 295 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you need to enter new 2 authentication information enter your Add ESMTP a On the Mail Servers screen username tap the see step 1 select Details Password box enter a password and then b Select the Options pick list and select OK Check with then select Advanced Outgoing your email service provider for c Check the box authentication username and password information N NOTE Check with your system Mail Servers a Options w Advanced Outgoing Port Number M My server requires authentication ESMTP Username administrator before selecting this option If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered In most cases the information displayed is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password d Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 296 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Getting and reading email Did You Know You can choose to see only the subjects of your email which includes message size sender and You can set up your subject so that you can decide if you want to download the entire message Or you can choose to get the entire message for all of your incoming email If you choose to get the entire message the a hode
185. are reading You can change the font size or style of incoming messages to make them easier to read Did You Know The font settings you 1 choose apply to all incoming messages not just the current one a On the message screen open the menus Open the Select Font dialog box b Select Options and then select Font 2 Customize the font Select Font Font Palm a Select each pick list Font Size Style and select the Size v 9 option you want Style v Plain Sample b Select OK This is a sample Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 310 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Sending an email message Tip If you set up the account 1 to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer only Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 4 you must synchronize so 2 Open a new message that messages you compose on your a Open the menus handheld can be sent out through your computer s b Select Accounts select the account you want and then select New email application Ade uC 0 0 New Message Did You Know You can set up your handheld to automatically try resending any messages that are not sent correctly oe Did You Know When you put addresses in the copies cc field they are visible to all other recipients Addresses in the blind copies bcc field are hidden from all other recipients Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handh
186. as Inbox Outbox Drafts and Trash You can create new folders so that you can store email messages by subject person or project 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen select the folder pick list in the upper right corner and then select Edit Folders Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 324 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select any of the following Edit Folders 9 a To create a new folder select New and then enter the new folder name b To rename a folder select the folder name from the list on the screen select Rename and then enter the new folder name c To delete a folder select the folder name from the list on the screen and then select Delete N NOTE For IMAP accounts only check the box if you want the change create rename delete to take place on the server as well as on your handheld 3 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 325 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email messages When you receive an email message you can reply to it or forward it to someone else You can also open web addresses URLs within messages Forwarding an email message Did You Know You can forward email 1 messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder On a folder screen select the folder pick list in the upper right corner and then select the folder that contains the message you want to forward Did You Know 2 Select the messag
187. assword when they travel over the network Some services require APOP to work properly while others do not work properly if APOP is used If you aren t sure if your ISP or web email provider supports APOP check with your email provider Root Folders IMAP only Defines the root folder on your IMAP server Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 372 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you are using the 7 F a even senaui ned Cont d e Mail IMAP only Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the have an IMAP account i you must configure the Sent Mail IMAP only Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the outgoing mail settings to server send mail d Select OK 6 Manage outgoing mail server SMTP settings a On the Mail Servers screen select Details b Select the Options pick list and then select Outgoing Mail Mail Servers i Mail Servers a Options Address Servers Options Outgoing Mail Your Name tE see advanced Outgoing Your Name for display only O Reply To Address 4 O Reply To Address O BCC Outgoing Msgs to O BCC Outgoing Msgs to Cx Cancel COK Cancel Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 373 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont d Tungsten T5 Handheld c Do any of the following Display Name_ Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply To Address Enter the email addres
188. ategories to Organize Information Deleting a category If you delete a category the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category Tip In Expense you can 1 delete a category including its contents with the Purge command e To delete a category within an application open that application e To delete a category for applications go to Applications 2 Delete the category a In Calendar select an event and then select Details b Open the list of categories Calendar Select the Category pick list All other applications Select the pick list in the upper right corner and then select Edit Categories c Select the name of the category you want to delete and then select Delete d Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 493 CHAPTER 23 Tip You can also enter new information into a category by opening the application and then selecting the category from the upper right corner Select New and enter the information Tungsten T5 Handheld Using Categories to Organize Information Placing information into a category You can place individual entries into categories within an application For example you may want to place some of your contacts into a category called Medical You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups You may want all of your games in one category or all of your multimedia applications in another Then you can go right to the group of applica
189. ation xxi HTM files 335 414 HTML files 335 410 413 414 HTML messages 308 309 328 hyperlinks 402 See also URLs 636 l icons application 516 523 Command toolbar 47 input area 24 missing 590 VersaMail application 306 318 357 ICS files 107 335 idle timeouts 555 image files 179 335 414 images changing download preferences for 420 downloading 335 IMAP mail folders 383 384 385 IMAP mail servers 345 350 IMAP protocol 279 283 IMAP servers 284 286 334 importing contacts 136 information 12 107 Inbox 290 304 319 Inbox icons 306 incoming mail options 286 371 372 Incoming mail server option 370 incoming mail servers 278 284 incompatible applications 611 incorrect dates and time 589 Info command 112 Info dialog box 112 information accessing 41 468 backing up 28 beaming 443 447 categorizing 490 494 caution for entering 20 Tungsten T5 Handheld caution for hard resets and 581 changing categories for 495 combining in different categories 492 copying and pasting 71 creating owner 540 creating user specific 7 11 defining abbreviations for 535 536 deleting 72 109 477 576 589 displaying 19 25 497 duplicating 125 editing 70 entering 19 50 51 67 79 531 importing 12 107 in program memory 75 keeping private 467 469 losing xxi 45 managing 28 not finding 592 organizing 49 490 password protecting 471 472 473 receiving from outside sources 17 related topics for 73 449 489 restoring 4
190. ations from your computer to an expansion card and Support Info installing other files such as photos videos or music If you re having problems with expansion cards or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 577 Maintaining Your Handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with years of trouble free service Taking care of your handheld helps keep it working properly and ensures that it s available when you need it Handheld do s and don ts To protect your handheld from damage and ensure reliable performance follow these guidelines Handheld do s e Use the carrying case that came with your handheld It provides protection if your handheld is accidentally dropped e Use only the stylus to tap the screen no pens pencils paper clips or other sharp objects e Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your handheld e Keep the battery charged e Keep the screen free of dust or anything else that could make it dirty e For general cleaning use a soft damp cloth If the screen becomes dirty use a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution 578 CHAPTER 27 Tungsten T5 Handheld Maintaining Your Handheld e Use only 3 5 mm stereo headphones in your handheld s headphone jack e Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect y
191. ature to HE e R lant messages messages box and then enter the text of the signature b Select Next Ny Continued Cancel Tungsten T5 Handheld 289 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you need to enter new 4 De f nae Set additional outgoing mail options 4 i authentication a j versaMadil a intormatom enter vo t Advanced Outgoing Options r y a Select any of the following username tap the O Use Secure Connection SSL Password box enter a Port Number The default is 25 the Did al tah oe password and then port number most SMTP servers Username select OK Check with use If you are not sure about the your email service correct port number check with ea Tap done to complete setup provider for your system administrator Toe Previ authentication username and password Use Secure Connection To send outgoing mail over a secure Secure Sockets information Layer or SSL connection check the Use Secure Connection box Authentication Check the box if the outgoing server SMTP requires ESMTP authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered In most cases the information displayed is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password
192. be converted for best use on optimized for your handheld File Transfer Windows only Use File Transfer to transfer files and folders to your handheld s large internal flash drive On your handheld to open a file on the internal drive use Files and select the file or open the appropriate application and browse to the file File Transfer provides a live window to your handheld s internal drive and copies or moves the items you select instantly you do not need to synchronize Files remain in their native format and are not optimized for use on your handheld Unlike the program memory your handheld s internal drive is not automatically backed up during synchronization but you can use File Transfer to save_ the contents of the internal drive to your computer Ry NOTE On Mac computers use Drive Mode to transfer info to your handheld s internal drive 76 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know When you transfer files using synchronization the files are always placed in the corresponding folder on your handheld for example the Music folder for MP3 files or the Documents folder for Office files If you transfer files using File Transfer save them to the corresponding folder so you can easily locate them or copy or create your own folder structure to organize your project files any way you like Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer When would I use each method T
193. blems Calculator Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses with Expense or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Categories e Creating and editing categories e Organizing expenses by type and sorting them Customizing Setting number formats Tungsten T5 Handheld 461 CHAPTER 21 Performing Calculations In this chapter Calculator buttons Viewing recent calculations Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Whether you re figuring the tip on a restaurant bill or balancing your checkbook it s always nice to have a calculator on hand And because it s part of your handheld there s no need to carry a separate calculator Benefits of Calculator e Always have a calculator with you e Store calculations for later use 462 CHAPTER 21 Performing Calculations Calculator buttons Tip Use the memory buttons to store and recall a number you enter in multiple calculations Clear any value in the Calculator memory Tip If you make a mistake entering a number in the middle of a calculation use the CE button to re enter the number without starting the calculation over Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current calculation Place the current number into memory The current number is added to the total that is already in the memory Tapping this button does not affect the current calculation i
194. bottom arrow to scroll the display one line at a time To scroll to the previous screen tap the scroll bar just above the slider To scroll to the next screen tap the scroll bar just below the slider Select a button such as OK Cancel or Details to perform a command or to open a dialog box Command buttons appear at the bottom of dialog boxes and application screens Tap the Tips icon to view shortcuts and other useful information for the screen where the icon is located When you have finished viewing the tip select Done Tap an entry box to open a dialog box where you can enter info for that field Select the arrow to display a list of choices and then select an item in the list Check or uncheck a box to select or deselect it When a box is checked the corresponding option is selected and active When a box is unchecked the corresponding option is deselected and inactive 25 CHAPTER 2 EERS Tip Can t find some of these applications Press the Home button twice to view all applications in Applications View Tungsten T5 Handheld What software is on my handheld Your handheld comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use Favorites EA Files amp Calendar Contacts TE Documents palmOne amp Media O RealPlayer Bluetooth Prz VersaMail d Web Customize a list of your favorite applications files and folders so that you can locate and open them quickly View
195. built in Bluetooth technology you must set up a phone connection To use it with your handheld s IR port run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing Your Contacts Making connections from Contacts You can set up your contacts so that you can do tasks like dialing a phone number creating an email or text message accessing the web or sending an instant message requires additional software sold separately directly from a contact screen Contacts gives you two tools to perform these tasks Quick Connect Lets you select a connection type and opens the application for making that type of connection directly from a contact s information screen Tap to Connect Opens the application to perform a connection task directly by selecting the appropriate entry phone number email address and so on from a contact s information screen Using Quick Connect If you have a compatible mobile phone sold separately that includes Bluetooth technology you can use Quick Connect to dial a phone number address an email or a text message go to a website or send an instant message requires additional software sold separately directly from a contact 1 Press Contacts faz Y Continued 130 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Make a connection using Quick Connect a Select the contact you want b Press Righ
196. cceeeee 180 Viewing a photo or video in the List VieW ssssssssseesrerrssssrsersnns 184 Tungsten T5 Handheld vii VIEWING ai slide SA OW sessir iussionem oiiaao aa 186 Rotating a PROtono da a iaaa 188 Viewing and editing photo or video details eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 Organizing photos and VIGEOS cccccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeessesseeeeess 191 Organizing photos and videos in albuMS sssssssssssssssresssssrrnssssrenn 191 Moving a photo or video within and between albums c00 193 Sorting photos and videos cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesseeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeseenas 195 Copymg a photo OF VideO issscesssienscecestandeanes Sete a aa a ai 198 Deleting a PhOto OF VIdCO 5 oie isceci ccdsesdteeceesnssacenscennsteguneesdeendsnenseececaneanee ce 199 Sharing Photos and videos ccecseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceneeeeeseeseeeeeeseeneeeeess 200 Working with palmOne Media on your computer ccecceeeseeeeeeeeeneees 201 FRCL aLE OC ODICS ieee cveresivancexssseataceentagtececss abe tacune site a E a EE EA 202 Chapter 10 Listening to MUSIC cccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 203 Transferring MP3 files to your handheld ecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseenaes 204 Transferring music from a CD to your handheld c cssceeeeesseeeeeeeeees 208 Playing music on YOU handheld sss iccaiscdseccccnesndsacnedansdescgneseds senesearneeds 212 Mamaging playlists vas isda cece ch ce actu sescaauace
197. ccount is removed from your handheld The account still exists on the server For example deleting your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes the account only from your handheld Your email account still exists at Yahoo com Synchronize your handheld with your computer to free up the memory associated with an account after you delete it Tungsten T5 Handheld You can delete all but one of your email accounts you must have at least one account 1 Select the account you want to delete Open the menus Select Accounts and then select Account Setup Select the name of the account to delete and then select Delete Delete the account b Select Yes in the Delete Account dialog box to delete the account and all associated email messages Select OK 4 Done Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit ahoo Work Email VersaMail Delete Account Are you sure you want to permanently remove the Work Email account 292 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Selecting a different service for an email account When you set up a phone connection on your handheld you pair each connection with a network service You also select one of these services to be the default for all network activity on your handheld including sending and receiving email For any given email account however you can switch to a different service for that acc
198. ce and finds three more new messages the Reminders screen notification indicates five new messages for that account If auto get discovers new messages but then fails for any reason the Reminders screen shows the account name and an error message You can select the error message or open the VersaMail application for that account for more detailed information on the failed auto get 5 02am Reminders O Git CJi VersaMail mail account Scheduled get failed Auto Get Mail The last scheduled get failed You may wish to perform a manual get at your convenience user cancel 0x121F You can choose to disable notifications for auto get mail failures Auto get mail retries If the interval for a scheduled auto get is set at Every 1 hour or less frequently and an auto get fails for any reason the VersaMail application tries to retrieve email every 30 minutes until either the next scheduled auto get occurs or the end time for scheduled email retrieval is reached If the interval is set for more frequently than Every 1 hour the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled auto get Tungsten T5 Handheld 305 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Resource issues with auto get mail The auto get mail feature can cause the following resource constraints Decreased battery life If you set the auto get interval for more often than once per hour your handheld s battery charge may drain more quickly
199. ce must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device L utilisation de ce dispositif est autoris e seulement aux conditions suivantes 1 il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre pr t accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique re u m me si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Caution Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s website www hc sc gc ca rpb CE CE Compliance Statement This product was tested by palmOne Inc and found to comply with all the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC RTTE directive 99 5 EC and Low Voltage Directive as amended Declaration of Conformity palmOne Inc Declares the Product Handheld PDA with Bluetooth capability 618 Tungsten T5 Handheld Model Name Number Tungsten T5 Manufacturer s Name palmOne Manufacturer s Address 400 N McCarthy Blvd Milpitas 95035 5112 Conforms with the following specifications e EN 55024 1998 Emissions amp Immunity e
200. ce the a Open an application application recognizes the contact name the b Select an entry or select New contact information is In Expense only Select Details and then select Attendees entered automatically without bringing up the Phone Lookup screen 2 Add the contact from Phone Lookup a Tap where you want to enter the contact b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Phone Lookup Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 68 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Cont d d Select the contact and then select Add Dec 23 03 4sMEWITIF s Anderson Mark 415 555 9308 M Cepeda Juan 909 555 9702 W Hanon Matt 203 555 9820 M elly Jardin 650 555 3970 W Nguyen Mai 650 555 9984 H O Leary Patrick Pastori John Simon James Veddi Maria Venkat Raj Westman Paul 650 555 6692 H Look Up 3 amp OPTIONAL To add another contact repeat step 2 4 Done The name and phone number of the contact are automatically entered Tungsten T5 Handheld 69 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Editing information Editing information on your handheld is similar to editing with word processing applications on your computer Select the information and then apply the correct command Selecting information There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete Selecting text Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select
201. ceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneaaeaaeeeeeeenenees 290 Managing email ACCOUNTS sisirin inina aandaa 291 Editing an email ACCOUNW ccvesaccacadsscenezancascsccenedaiavagcuescedecsntesasacve ai 291 Deleting an email ACCOUNT sisiccicdissiacdecieesecceestedaeschacduesecuneeenneecucteayaecds 292 Selecting a different service for an email ACCOUNT cccceeeeeeees 293 Adding ESMTP to an account sits ccicccdsscccetdsssecccceessiesceecsssenceedessecnes 295 Getting and reading email ccceecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaeeeenee 297 Switching among email accounts ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseenaes 297 Getting email MESSAGES ceeseeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeess 298 Auto get mail with notification cccccsseeceseseeeeesenseeesssenaeeeeeseenes 300 Scheduling auto Get mail oo eececeeeceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseaaes 300 Auto Get NOLTICATIONS sy cccisisss cncecissseeneceasspenncuderieanceeedviecnceeevsbenceeevayaece 302 Setting Notification Options cccceeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeneeeeessseneeeesseaaes 303 Viewing and using the Reminders SCreen eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 304 AULO Get Mall retre Siss snose a 305 Resource issues with auto get Mail ssssssssssssssssssssssssssnnnrnsnsssssrens 306 Inbox icons in the VersaMail application c cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 306 Reading email MESSAGES sesisiccedecsssecceecess ecccedeasde
202. cent items drag the stylus across each item 2 Attach the photo or video a Select the Type pick list and then select Photo Video b On the Select Media screen select the Album pick list to go to the album containing the photo or video you want and then check the box to the left of the photo or video Or browse to locate the photo or video on your handheld s internal drive and then check the box to the left of the photo or video c Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 343 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Synchronizing email on your handheld with email on your computer Tip WINDOWS ONLY If you are synchronizing To manage your email on your computer as well as on your handheld you can synchronize an an account with Microsoft email account on the handheld with an email application on the desktop You can use many Outlook on your popular email applications called clients such as Microsoft Outlook Eudora Lotus Notes Outlook computer you must also Express or any other email clients that use MAPI set Outlook as your default email program When you synchronize an account messages from your computer are downloaded to your handheld only Messages from your handheld are not transferred to your computer during Tip synchronization If you intend both to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer and to send and receive email messages wirelessly
203. ces 293 network settings 550 561 networks accessing accounts for 260 accessing corporate 280 accessing e mail from 255 closing connections for 553 connecting to 550 553 corporate e mail accounts and 279 280 creating login scripts for 557 560 customizing connections for 547 deleting service profiles for 556 dialing in to 544 losing connections to 588 selecting communications protocol for 555 setting IP addresses for 555 setting up connections for 261 269 553 setting up service profiles for 550 551 specifying as trusted device 268 270 synchronizing over 83 new lines 238 New Profile screen 12 13 next arrow icon 25 No time icon 160 Normal view Web Pro 403 Note Pad See also notes Tungsten T5 Handheld backing up information in 28 categorizing information in 491 495 clearing 245 creating notes from 245 deleting notes in 251 displaying notes in 250 getting help with 252 253 opening 27 245 overview 244 related topics for 253 selecting pens 247 setting color preferences 246 247 troubleshooting 603 Note Pad icon 27 notes See also memos Note Pad attaching alarms to 248 attaching to e mail 253 backing up 28 categorizing 245 253 creating 245 deleting 251 editing 245 250 marking as private 245 253 saving 245 selecting 43 250 setting background colors for 247 sharing 253 sorting 250 notification options e mail 303 317 Notify Sound pick list 303 number formats 461 529 530 number keyboard
204. characters in the input Left side of the screen Write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc input area Right side of the screen Write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area area Middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides Write uppercase letters N NOTE For a brief period of time after writing a character a quick tap on the screen is interpreted as a period character Wait a second to tap buttons or place the cursor so that the action is not interpreted as a period character Turn full screen writing on and off by tapping Full screen writing B on the status bar Write capital or uppercase letters in the middle ied Unfiled Last name Kwan Write letters on the left side Full screen writing Tungsten T5 Handheld Write numerals on the right side 53 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Writing Graffiti 2 characters Did You Know Graffiti 2 writing 1 automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence or a new entry 2 y Done Tungsten T5 Handheld Open an application you use to enter information like Calendar Tap the screen where you want your character to appear Position the stylus in the correct part of the input area if selected or in the correct part of the screen if full screen writing is on Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps
205. ction Y Continued 544 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld 2 Open the Edit Connection dialog box a Select the IR to PC handheld connection b Select Edit 3 Change the speed setting a Select Details b Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed c Select OK d Select OK again and then select Done 4 Done Edit Connection i Name IR to a PC Handheld Connect to v PC Via v Cradle Cable Details Speed 57 600 bps Flow Ctl Automatic 545 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Creating your own connection settings Tip If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need or if you re already using all To delete a connection the connections as they are you can create a new connection that you created select it on the Connection Preferences screen and 1 From the Connection Preferences screen select New then select Delete Preferences Connection Edit Connection Available Connections radle Cable IR to a PC Handheld Connect to v Modem Via v Cradle Cable Dialing TouchTone Volume v Low Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 546 CHAPTER 25 Tip You can also customize Bluetooth connection settings Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Enter the basic settings Name Enter a name for your connection settings This name will appear on the Connect
206. culstor icon and hold any of the four application icons and Memos icon Taske icon selectthe new application you want from the list The new application s icon replaces theicon you oa keyboard atei keyboard tapped con con Application Open the corresponding application icons Note Pad Memos Calculator Tasks Letter keyboard Opens the alphabetic keyboard icon Number Opens the numeric keyboard keyboard icon N NOTE You cannot display the input area in the main Favorites View However if you perform a task such as adding or deleting a favorite you can display the input area Tungsten T5 Handheld 24 CHAPTER 2 EERS Key Term Slider The solid area on the scroll bar The slider moves to indicate the relative position within the entry or list Tip You can also use the 5 way navigator to select an item from a pick list and to select some command buttons Tungsten T5 Handheld Application controls Previous next arrows Tips icon Event Details Entry box Location Category y Unfiled Pick list Scroll bar Repeat v None Private O Box OR Cre Cee E Command button Previous next arrows Scroll bar Command button Tips icon Entry box Pick list Box Select the left and right arrows to view the previous and next entry where up and down arrows appear select them to view the previous and next screens of information Drag the slider or tap the top or
207. d day Tungsten T5 Handheld Viewing your weekly schedule Week View shows your schedule for an entire week The time frames that appear on the screen are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences 1 Week selector Open Week View T Multi day event a Press Calendar 5353 b Select the Week View icon No time icon H Event Scroll arrows After hours event Week View icon Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule e Select the week selector to scroll between weeks or select Go To to choose a week e Select a date to go to that day in Day View e Select an event to view the event description and location e Select the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day during the selected week 4 Done 163 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your monthly schedule Tip Month View shows your schedule for a whole month You can scroll between months or jump to You can also press Right any other month and Left on the 5 way to scroll to the next or revious month To go to 1 p 9g Open Month View Day View for a particular Month selector date press Center on the a Press Calendar Ore aa 5 way to insert a Event ven highlight press Right or b Select the Month View 3 fa sge 7 8 Left to select a date and f 10 a 11512 13514 15716 then press Center on the icon 17 18 19 20 21 22523 i teres EE A A ET No time
208. d mail ONLY For IMAP accounts retrieves unread email only To get all email and not just unread email deselect Get unread mail ONLY Maximum Message Size Enter the maximum message size that you can receive Leave mail on server POP only Leaves email that you receive on the handheld on the server also d Select OK Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 371 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Advanced incoming mail 5 options are different depending on the connection type you selected and the server b Select the Options pick list and then select Advanced Incoming protocol POP or IMAP Manage advanced incoming mail server settings a On the Mail Servers screen select Details Mail Servers i Mail Servers i Tip Options v Address Servers The Deleted Mail and port umbar rear Sent Mail fields are case yN oA coming sensitive and the folder name should be spelled exactly as it is on the server Options v Advanced Incoming Port Number 110 O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use APOP A y Q f T c Do any of the following Port Number Usually 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Use Secure Connection To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the Use Secure Connection box Use APOP POP only Encrypts your username and p
209. d remain there until you empty the trash Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Choose settings for deleting old messages a Select the Folder pick list and then select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete b Select the Older than pick list and then select One Week One Month or Choose Date If you select Choose Date select a date from the calendar Delete messages a Select Delete b Select Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Delete Old Messages Delete all messages in the Folder w Inbox Older than w One Week Delete Confirmation Delete message s from the handheld O Also delete message s on server IMPORTANT If you delete a message on the server you cannot retrieve it and view it again later c Select OK 4 Done 330 Tip You can set a preference to automatically empty the trash Did You Know Many email providers such as Yahoo have size restrictions for mail storage If your mailbox on the server becomes full messages are returned to the senders Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Emptying the trash When you delete a message it moves to the Trash folder Deleted email accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your handheld To increase memory you should empty the trash regularl
210. dding song lists 213 benefits of 203 deleting playlists 218 displaying song details 220 editing playlists 216 getting help with 213 220 221 opening 220 playing songs from 215 setting period of inactivity for 212 troubleshooting 603 turning off 212 RealPlayer compatible formats for 204 converting songs on CDs 208 getting help with 205 210 installing 29 opening 26 transferring MP3 files 204 transferring songs from CD 208 RealPlayer icon 26 reassigning application buttons 523 reboots See resetting handheld Receipt Details dialog box 453 Receive Format pick list 309 receiving e mail 263 297 298 receiving messages 255 388 recently visited web pages 402 recharging battery 4 5 543 587 recipes 241 Recipient List screen 313 314 Record menu 444 record screens 44 records deleting expense 457 entering information in 119 getting number of 113 hard resets and 581 moving between 44 644 setting privacy levels for 470 sorting 136 243 459 specifying as first 118 recovering memory 589 recurring events 138 redialing phone numbers 431 related items categorizing 491 related topics xxi Remember Last Category check box 516 reminders canceling 509 creating 244 scheduling 120 138 setting alarms as 508 specifying notes as 248 Reminders screen 304 317 remote access accounts 550 remote connections 379 remote devices 273 remote servers 425 550 removing applications 113 576 appointments 156 bookmarks 407 categories 493 c
211. deleting accounts 292 deleting e mail 328 329 disconnecting from network services 293 294 displaying account information 356 downloading attachments 335 336 339 emptying Trash folder 331 332 filtering messages with 363 365 367 forwarding messages 326 Tungsten T5 Handheld getting e mail 300 301 icons for 306 318 357 marking message status 333 moving messages 322 323 opening 277 282 related topics for 386 replying to e mail 327 secure connections and 385 sending e mail 308 311 314 setting mail formats for 308 setting message preferences 309 370 371 373 377 378 setting notification options 303 317 setting preferences for 359 360 setting up authentication servers 295 setting up e mail accounts 282 290 351 switching e mail accounts 297 synchronizing e mail 345 347 349 352 troubleshooting 386 upgrading e mail accounts for 277 282 version numbers 111 113 videos adding notes to 190 attaching to e mail 343 copying 200 448 deleting 199 finding 182 playing 182 previewing 180 sharing 200 sorting 195 transferring to handheld 78 viewing details of 190 View Bookmarks command 406 View By pick list 516 View Log command 84 viewer 413 viewing application groups 494 application icons 590 603 application information 17 112 applications 497 appointments 159 162 163 164 bookmarks 406 calculators 27 Category pick list 168 169 Command toolbar 47 contact information 1
212. deo organization e Store multiple videos and photos 178 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Supported file types Did You Know You can copy a photo or video from your computer and save it directly on your handheld or on an expansion card sold separately inserted into the expansion slot If you view a photo in a popular format from an You can view photos in popular formats such as JPG BMP TIFF uncompressed and GIF on your expansion card inserted handheld On a Windows computer when you copy a photo in a popular format to your handheld Into your handheld s using the Media desktop application from within Palm Desktop software it is saved on your expansion slot the photo handheld in its original format If you copy a photo in a different format it is saved on your remains in its original handheld in JPG format format On a Mac computer all photos you copy by dragging them onto the Send To Handheld droplet Tip icon are saved on your handheld in JPG format If you want to carry a video on your handheld to view on another computer use palmOne File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac on To view a video on your handheld on a Windows computer open Media from within Palm Desktop software add the video and then synchronize to send the video to your handheld On a Mac computer drag the video to the Send To Handheld droplet and then synchronize The video is converted to a format ASF MPEG 4 your han
213. der 1 In the Inbox or another folder screen select the folders pick list and then select the folder that contains the message you want to delete 2 Tap the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete To select adjacent messages drag the stylus so it hits the bullet to the left of each message Lift the stylus and drag again to select more adjacent messages Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 328 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To delete messages on 3 Delete the message or messages the server when you empty the trash on your a Open the menus handheld select the Delete Msgs on Server b Select Delete from the Message menu setting in the VersaMail Preferences Many email providers have size restrictions for mail storage If your mailbox on the server becomes full messages are d Select OK returned to the senders 4 Done c Select Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now IMPORTANT If you delete a message on the server you cannot retrieve it and view it again later Tip You can also tap the message icon next to a selected email message Deleting old messages and then select Delete 1 Open the Delete Old Messages dialog box a Open the menus b Select Delete Old from the Message menu Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 329 Messages you delete from a folder move to the Trash folder an
214. dheld IMPORTANT A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your handheld including the username that identifies the handheld This is another reason why it s important to synchronize often so you have an up to date backup available Before you do a hard reset be sure to synchronize Applications files and folders moved to your handheld s internal drive with File Transfer are not automatically backed up during synchronization Use File Transfer to copy or move the updated files and folders to your computer or to back up the contents of your handheld s entire internal drive to your computer 1 2 Press and hold the power button While holding the power button use the tip of the stylus or a similar object without a sharp tip to gently press and release the reset button inside the hole on the back of your handheld Wait for the Palm Powered logo to appear and then release the power button When you see the message that warns you about erasing all of the info on your handheld do one of the following e Press Up on the 5 way navigator to finish the reset and show the touchscreen e Press any other button to do a soft reset 4 Done 581 CHAPTER 27 Maintaining Your Handheld Restoring your information after a hard reset If you synchronized before doing a hard reset you can now put that information back on your handheld However you may need to re enter some of your personal settings as well
215. dheld must be on to be discoverable Tip If you are trying to conserve battery life turn Discoverable mode off Tungsten T5 Handheld Entering basic Bluetooth settings 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Enter the basic Bluetooth settings a b Select On Select the Device Name field and enter a name for your handheld This is the name other Bluetooth devices see when they connect to your handheld By default it is the username you use during synchronization but you can change it Select the Discoverable pick list and select Yes or No 4 Done Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth is Off Network v No Network Service Service 257 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Setting up a phone connection Before You Begin If you have an IR phone you must download the IMPORTANT To use Bluetooth Manager to set up a phone connection you must have a GSM mobile phone that is optionally enabled with GPRS data services Phone Link application This is how you form a trusted pair between your handheld and your mobile phone Once you from the web Go to have set up the trusted pair connection you automatically connect to your phone when you want http a Bluetooth connection www palmOne com us support downloads phonelink html to download the software You can also launch the above link from Phone Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Link Updater
216. dheld 442 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Beaming Tip Using the IR port on your handheld you can beam information from within an application such as Por best reouliewhan hr or piped a sari an P ora ra to sree Palm Powered devices You can beaming the handhelds also beam a category of information or even an entire application should be between 4 and N NOTE The receiving handheld must be turned on Depending on the receiving handheld 39 inches 10 centimeters model not all information may be sent correctly and one meter apart and there should be a clear path between them Beaming information from within an application Tip Beaming works best for 1 Select the information you want to beam smaller items If you have larger items you can use a Open an application Bluetooth wireless technology Expansion cards are convenient for sharing very large items b Select the entry you want Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 443 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Tip The leftmost menu in 2 most applications is named Record Beam the information a Open the menus Tip b Select the Beam menu item in the leftmost menu In Contacts you can create a contact with your c When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at own information and the IR port of the other handheld select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business
217. dheld and Your Computer 3 Enter the information and then click OK 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 81 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer CHAPTER 5 MAC ONLY 1 Open an application a Double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer b Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application gt 2 Do one of the following e Click New in the upper left corner of the screen to create a new entry e Click an existing entry and then click Edit in the upper left corner of the screen Y Continued 82 Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 5 Key Term HotSync Technology that allows you to synchronize the info on your handheld with the info on your computer Key Term HotSync Manager Software you use to choose synchronization settings and that must be active when you synchronize Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization select the username whose information you want to synchronize and click OK Or create a new username Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Enter the information and then click OK 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Synchronizing your handheld with your computer You can synchron
218. dheld can play and is optimized for viewing on the handheld your computer These For both Windows and Mac computers note that there are numerous video formats and even applications transfer the many variations within the ASF MPEG 4 format Not all types can be converted to a format that s video to your handheld in viewable on your handheld If you can t open and view a video in the desktop Media application its native format with no on a Windows computer you won t be able to view the video on your handheld conversion so you can view it on the computer in NOTE On a Windows computer Windows Media Player is required for Media to play videos the format you prefer that have been prepared for playback on your handheld If you do not have Windows Media Player on your computer use the link on the software installation CD to download the application Download requires Internet connection additional fees may apply Tungsten T5 Handheld 179 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Viewing photos or videos Did You Know You can view photos and videos in the following ways Photos and videos i o p located inthe Photos amp Thumbnail View miniature preview versions of your photos and videos Videos folder on your handheld are backed up to your computer when you synchronize List View names and dates of photos and videos on your handheld or an expansion card Slide show View all photos and videos in an album automatica
219. dheld so you can listen to music and other audio applications Lets you enter information on your handheld by writing or tapping To use the stylus slide it out of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil Using your fingertip instead of the stylus is OK but don t use your fingernail a real pen or any other sharp object to touch the screen 20 CHAPTER 2 Basics Back panel controls Key Term USB Short for Universal Serial Bus the type of connector or cable that s commonly used to connect accessories to a computer Tungsten T5 Handheld Bluetooth radio internal Speaker AC connector part of Multi connector Multi connector Y Speaker Reset button Multi connector Bluetooth radio internal Reset button Lets you listen to alarms game and system sounds and music Resets your handheld if it stops responding Lets you connect a USB sync cable included or a cradle sold separately to your computer so you can synchronize or exchange information Also lets you connect the AC charger to your handheld either directly to the connector or through the USB sync cable so you can charge it Enables your handheld to connect with other devices sold separately that use Bluetooth communication 21 CHAPTER 2 EERS Tip Using the status bar Use the Find dialog box to locate specific items of information in your handheld s program The status bar at the bottom of
220. ding 150 deleting 493 displaying 497 516 placing information in different 495 related topics for 498 renaming 492 scrolling through 497 selecting 445 categorizing applications 491 496 contacts 128 136 491 494 events 139 173 445 expenses 452 458 459 information 490 494 memos 243 notes 245 253 tasks 223 229 234 Category command 496 Category dialog box 496 category lists 152 168 495 571 category marker 160 168 Category pick list 493 495 cautions 579 587 CDs 208 CE Compliance Statement 618 cellular carriers 262 challenge response prompts 558 Change Repeat dialog box 143 227 Change your synchronization option 10 594 changing alarms 154 bookmarks 405 407 408 cache size 424 calendar events 154 163 category names 492 date and time settings 502 e mail accounts 291 295 368 e mail filters 367 e mail messages 318 626 fonts 310 320 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 537 home pages 417 419 information 70 locations 505 506 owner information 540 passwords 369 473 pen widths 245 playlists 216 preset connections 544 preset formats 529 privacy settings 154 repeating events 155 screen colors 521 screen fonts 518 519 server profiles 551 speed dial entries 435 text colors 168 time zones 506 untimed events 141 URLs 405 407 World Clock 510 character entry 62 66 118 See also data entry character searches 48 charging battery 4 543 578 588 chat rooms xxii check boxes 25 checki
221. displaying appointments for 159 162 163 164 displaying conflicting events in 168 finding overlapping events on 166 opening 172 removing appointments from 156 reserving dates 140 scrolling through 163 164 selecting dates on 138 223 setting repeat intervals for 143 144 145 Calendar application applying color coding options 150 152 benefits of 137 categorizing information in 494 checking schedules in 159 161 163 164 choosing display options 166 defining repeating events 142 143 deleting categories 493 deleting events 156 158 displaying categories in 497 entering birthdays for 120 entering event locations from 146 getting help with 172 importing information for 107 opening 26 138 related topics for 173 Tungsten T5 Handheld rescheduling events 154 163 running on PCs 172 saving information for 139 156 158 scheduling events 138 140 145 setting alarms 153 171 setting alarms from 508 509 setting display options 167 171 transferring information to 68 troubleshooting 173 601 Calendar icon 26 Calendar Preferences dialog box 153 170 calendar views 161 163 164 165 calibration 538 Call History List 432 Call Waiting 552 calling card numbers 552 camera 568 cancelled actions 45 cancelled appointments 156 cancelled tasks 231 capitalization 54 62 238 Card Info application 27 573 Card Info icon 27 card readers 575 carrying cases 568 categories adding 491 beaming 445 benefits of 490 changing 154 color co
222. documentation included with your phone for information The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pair Bluetooth link or bonded pair My handheld cannot connect to my mobile phone Use the following steps to test the connection 1 Tap Bluetooth B on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen You can select the indicator even if it is dimmed 2 Make sure On is selected 3 Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to your phone 4 Select Connect If the connection is successful open the application that requires the connection and complete the desired task If the connection is not successful try the following steps e Make sure that your phone is equipped with Bluetooth technology that Bluetooth is enabled and that the power is on e You may need to set up a connection with your phone See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process My phone connection drops before finish using it You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen Tungsten T5 Handheld 605 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions get an error message when try to dial a phone number using my handheld e Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your handheld e You may need to set up a connection with your phone See the documentation included with y
223. drop down list c Drag the song files you want from the My Library window on the left into the palmOne Handheld window on the right d Real Guide G3 Music My Library Burn Transfer T 0 Search l E oo gt CA Burn Transfer Home Current Burner Device EJ paimone Handheld w How To W My Library Drag clips From the My Library list below into the device view at the right palmOne Handheld Name gt My Library ve Name Description All Media View all the aud Music View all your M Videos View all your Vig Create your owl autoPlaylists Generate playliq gt Purchased Music view all your pu Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 205 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tip You can also transfer MP3 5 files by dragging a folder of files or individual files to Transfer the selected songs to your handheld a Be sure your handheld is on and that RealPlayer is open If it is a green the File Transfer Connected light appears in the lower left corner of RealPlayer on your application on your computer desktop and then dragging the item s to the b Click Start Transfer When the transfer is complete the tracks you selected Music folder in the File should say On Device The files are transferred to the Music folder on your Transfer window This is handheld s internal drive useful if you want to copy anientie tolderet musici
224. dsseends 70 Copying and pasting information c cccceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseesteeesesseeenes 71 Deleting INfOLMAtiON sicisscesssccccnceserceuetdes cesineies saedeancedeacdiendes eevdntendeastvns 72 PRC AG CHOI CS cies cxcentanatatins concede eran txanveventadecnsnetecacksteanteanesse EEE 73 Chapter 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer ecceceseseeeeeeees 74 Program memory and the internal drive escceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeees 75 How can I work with information ccccccccesseeeeceenneeeecseneeeessennaeeeessnnaees 76 When would use each Method ccccccseeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeseesseeeeeessseeeeenees 77 SYNCHFONIZING INFOTMALION sssrinin 79 Entering information using desktop software ccccessseeeeeeeettteeeeeees 79 Synchronizing your handheld with your COMPUtEL cceeeeeeeees 83 Synchronizing With a Cable cccccccccseeceecssseeneeeeseeeeeeseesseeeneeseeseesenens 84 Customizing your synchronization settings esseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Choosing how your computer responds to Synchronization TEQUESTS nioni adneu 85 Setting synchronization Options ccccccccesseeeeessseeeeeeeseseereeeesssseeneess 87 Choosing whether application information is updated 005 88 Installing applications to your handheld ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Installing applications from a Windows COMPUTET cceeeseeeeeeees 93 Using Quick Install
225. dy of the email message plus any attachments up to the maximum message size Y Continued 336 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Tap the red paper clip icon in the Paperelip icon upper right corner If the I From Travis Washington attachment is not downloaded a lt trwashjr hotmail com gt paper clip icon doesn t appear Subj these are funny even though the message was sent with an attachment You must download the attachment in Scope out the new MSN Plus Internet for the paper clip icon to appear Software optimizes dial up to the max Y Continued v Tungsten T5 Handheld 337 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know You can save any type of attached file regardless of file type Tip After viewing an attachment you can save it to the internal drive or to an expansion card Tungsten T5 Handheld 4 Select Save to save the attachment to your handheld s internal drive or to an expansion card or do one of the following depending on the attachment file type Viewable file text Word document task HTML graphic and so on Select the name of the attachment you want to view and then select View If there are multiple viewers registered on your handheld for the attachment file type either use the default viewer shown or select a viewer from the list For example if you have two photo viewing applications on your handheld and you
226. e Inbox of the account you want to switch select Get Mail b Select Details Select the new service a Check the Always connect using box A pick list of available services appears The currently used connection is displayed by default b Select the connection you want to switch to from the Service pick list c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Details Get only M unread mail days M Download Attachments Max Message Size 5 KB O Always connect using Details M Get unread mail ONLY M Download Attachments O Use Fil pera aT ers O Auto I Compuserve Max Mess Earthlink Servic UUNet CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 294 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Adding ESMTP to an account Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on an SMTP server If you aren t sure if your ISP or web email provider supports ESMTP check with your email provider 1 Select the account to which you want to add ESMTP Mail Servers i Account v EOTS Work Email a In your Inbox or on another Protocol w v saMail folder screen open the Username Edit Accounts menus Password b Select Options and then O Always connect using select Mail Servers c Select the Account pick list and then select Edit Accounts d Select the name of the account you want to change and then select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 H
227. e category to match the other category s name Did You Know There is another way to delete a category Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories Select the Delete command to delete the selected category and move all of its entries to the Unfiled category Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing Your Expenses Deleting an entire category of expenses 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense 3 Open the Purge Categories dialog box Purge Categories New York a Open the menus b Select Purge on the Record menu Delete the category and all of its items a Select the category you want to delete b Select Purge c Select Done 4 Done 458 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Customizing the expense list You can change the appearance of the expense list Did You Know Customizing the expense list makes it easy to see how much you spent on each type of expense For example to see how much you spent on taxis sort your expenses by type so that all your taxi expenses appear together in the list Use categories to further refine your list Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Expense a Select Show Select the pick lists to change any of the following items and then select OK Sort by Sort expenses by date or type Distance Show distance in miles or kilometers Show currency Show or hide the currency symbol in the expense
228. e event description Set the repeat interval Event Details Time a Select Details Date Alarm b Select the Repeat pick list and Location select how often the event Category w Unfiled repeats Daily until Every week Repeat Every week Every other week Every month Private O PEVE VER N NOTE If you select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date c Select OK 4 Done 142 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval Some events don t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals so you need to set up your own repeat intervals For example set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day schedule a class that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month or enter annual holidays that occur during a particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Press Calendar Oss 2 Enter the event you want to repeat and then select the event description Open the Change Repeat dialog box a Select Details b Select the Repeat pick list and select Other Event Details Time Date Alarm Location Y Continued e Change Repeat i None Day Week YET Every Endon w No End Date Repeat by EINE Date The 4th Thursday of every 12th month 143 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip To enter holidays such as 4 Labor Day or Thanksgiving select
229. e first O Disable Images faster few letters in a field your b Select Options and then O Disable JavaScript handheld remembers the select Preferences O Disable Cookies last item you entered in 2 airaa ae that field that started with c Select General ee een those letters and fills in the field 3 Check or uncheck the Disable Auto Complete box to enable or disable autofill 4 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 421 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Cookie Some websites store information ina small text file called a cookie that is saved on your handheld A cookie usually stores information about you and your preferences for that website A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit Allowing a website to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your handheld A cookie stores only the information you provide while visiting the website Tungsten T5 Handheld Allowing websites to remember personal information By default your handheld saves the cookies it receives If you want more privacy you can tell your handheld not to accept cookies 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the General Preferences dialog box Preferences Page General Advanced a Open the menus O Disable Auto Complete O Disable Images faster b Select Options and then C Disable JavaScript select Preferences Hi Disable
230. e is that you take this precaution before connecting your handheld to your computer placing the handheld in a cradle or connecting it to any other device You can do this in many ways including the following e Ground yourself when you re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground e For example if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three prong grounded outlet touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body e Increase the relative humidity of your environment e Install ESD specific prevention items such as grounding mats Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following e Low relative humidity e Material type The type of material gathering the charge For example synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton e The rapidity with which you touch connect or disconnect electronic devices While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD 621 SYMBOLS exclamation points in Tasks list 234 asterisk characters 118 period character 532 NUMERICS 12 hour clock See clock 12 hour formats 530 24 hour clock 528 529 24 h
231. e on and the device automatically accepts communication bypassing the discovery and authentication Discoverable setting is set process to No you can receive connections only from devices with which you 1 have previously communicated 2 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Begin the discovery process a Select Setup Devices b Select Trusted Devices c Select Add Device d Select Trusted Devices to begin the discovery process The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active 3 Select the device you want to j Discovery Results add as a trusted device Show v All Known Devices Select a device If the device you want to add BlueGate AP does not appear on the discovery BRAD i r 8 PalmNokia3600 results list select Find More to A Palm search again a Pico a Pico 3 Sglais Continued a Tungsten T5 Handheld 271 CHAPTER 14 Tip You can delete a trusted device or view the details about a trusted device such as the device address and your most recent connection In Bluetooth Manager select Setup Devices and then Trusted Devices Select the appropriate device and select Details Tungsten T5 Handheld Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices 4 Enter the same passkey on your handheld and the other device and select OK IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a built in passkey others enable you to choose the passkey see the doc
232. e page The web browser can also open when you select an HTML file that you receive as an email attachment Tungsten T5 Handheld 410 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Connecting to the Internet Tip If the connection is not 1 established do one of the following Go to Favorites and select Web amp Select Cancel to stop the 2 connection process Connect to the Internet Select Change Network to a Open the menus select a different service to connect to b Select Connect in the Page menu Alternately you can enter a URL on the address line and select Go 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 411 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Downloading files and pages You can download files or save files for viewing when you are not connected to the Internet Tip If you decide that the download process is taking too long you can stop it To stop a web page from downloading select the Stop icon inthe action bar To stop a file from downloading select Cancel in the Download dialog box Did You Know The maximum file size you can download through web browser is 2MB Tungsten T5 Handheld Downloading a file 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page you want to view Select the link of the file you want to download Select a download option Application name Downloads the file to an application For example if you are downloading a Word document the file down
233. e steps to disconnect from Drive Mode before you unplug your handheld from your computer a Eject the handheld from your Windows computer by selecting the Safely Remove Hardware XP or Unplug or Eject Hardware 2000 icon A in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen On a Mac computer select the Eject command from the File menu or drag the drive icon to the Eject icon on the Dock b Select Turn Drive Mode Off on your handheld screen and then select Turn Off 4 Done Other ways of managing information You can move and manage information on your handheld and your computer in the following additional ways e Importing information from other applications into Palm Desktop software e Restoring archived info on your computer e Installing additional applications from the software installation CD e Checking space and version numbers of applications on your handheld 106 CHAPTER 5 Tip Palm Desktop Help has lots of information about importing from other applications including step by step instructions Open the Help menu in Palm Desktop software and select Palm Desktop Help for more details Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Importing information from other applications Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to your handheld Don t spend time retyping it Instead import the info into P
234. e the Mail Service Yahoo b Select the Mail Service pick list Protocol v POP iiternet Massaga Acoass and then select your email is Protocol IMAP provider Select Other if your Tip provider is not listed If your email provider appears on the Mail Enter the basic account information Account Setup amp Enter aname for this account e g My Mail and select settings a In the Account Name field enter a descriptive name Account Name VersaMail O Synchronize Only Account c If you chose Other select the Protocol pick list and then select POP or IMAP Service pick list you don t IMPORTANT Do not check the Synchronize Only Account box If you plan need to select a protocol only to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer do The correct protocol is not set up the account on your handheld Instead follow the steps for setting automatically displayed synchronization options on your computer later in this chapter d Select Next Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 283 Ti Your username is usually the part of your email address appearing before the symbol not your entire email address Check with your ISP if you are not sure what username to enter Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server Tungsten T5 Handheld 4 Enter the account username and password a Enter the us
235. e the PPP or SLIP protocols Idle timeout Select the pick list and select how long your handheld waits before dropping the connection with your ISP or dial in server when you switch out of an application that requires a connection 1 Minute 2 Minutes 3 Minutes or Never Query DNS Check the Query DNS box if you re not sure whether you need to enter DNS addresses Many systems do not require that you enter DNS addresses If you do need DNS addresses uncheck the DNS box tap the space to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields and then enter the appropriate sections of each address IP Address Check the IP Address box to use a temporary IP address Uncheck the IP Address box to enter a permanently assigned address Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 555 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Deleting a service profile 1 Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Network Delete the service you want to delete a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete b Open the menus c Select Delete in the Service menu d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 556 CHAPTER 25 Tip Windows You can also create login scripts with a text editor on your desktop computer Create a file with the extension PNC and then install the file on your handheld using palmOne Quick
236. e to forward Forwarded messages are From Travis Washington always sent as text only a Select the email message to lt trwashjr hotmail com gt A A i Subj cool site even if you received the open it original message in check this out HTML format b Select Forward Fwd www futurefacing com There are now three new levels of v Select Forward 3 Address and send the message 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 326 Replies are always sent as text only even if you received the original message in HTML format From the message screen you can also select Reply from the Options menu tip To reply to a message from the message list tap the envelope icon next to the message you want and then select Reply on the list Or open the Options menu and select Reply Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Replying to an email message You can reply to an email message as you are reading it or you can start the reply when you are viewing messages in the message list 1 Create the reply a Select the message you want to reply to b Select Reply Select reply options and send your reply a Reply Options In the Reply Options dialog box select options for replying to the sender only or to all email recipients for including original message text with your reply and for inserting a gt character at the beginning of each line in the original
237. e virtual serial port you want to use is used by other applications exit those applications before setting up your computer for wireless synchronization Some of my applications do not synchronize If you have synchronized successfully but you can t find the information from your handheld on your computer check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing information NOTE Ifyou upgraded from a previous handheld go to www palmOne com intI support select your country select the Tungsten T5 handheld from the main page and click the Upgrade link WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager icon in the lower right corner of your screen and then select Custom Check that the application is set to synchronize the files If it is not select the application click Change and then choose Synchronize the files Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize Otherwise it applies during the next synchronization only MAC ONLY Double click the HotSync Manager icon G in the Palm folder From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings Select your username from the User pop up menu and be sure that the application is set to synchronize Tungsten T5 Handheld 596 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions can t open the HotSync Manager On a Windows computer uninstall Palm Desktop software from your computer and then reinstall the software from the software installation CD On a Mac c
238. ear the cache each time you exit web browser Uncheck the box to keep the cache from session to session Select OK 4 Done Preferences i Advanced Set memory limit for storing pages 1 1MB Cookies 0B Clear Cookies Cache 1K Clear Cache O Clear cache on exit 424 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Setting preferences for using a proxy server Your handheld comes with the proxy server turned off You can turn the proxy server on and Key Term configure a proxy server Proxy Server A server that provides access to files from other servers by retrieving them either 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp from its local cache or from the remote server 2 Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Advanced Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 425 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Set your proxy server preferences a Select Set Proxy b Check or uncheck the Use proxy server box to use or not use a proxy server c If you want to use a proxy server select the Use Proxy box and enter the appropriate server address and port number Preferences i Proxy Settings f a You may need to set up a proxy Page General_ server to access the Internet Set memory limit for Please consult your systems storing pages _1 1 MB administrator ISP or network provider to obtain the appr
239. ecific files and folders even links to the web Certain items are included in Favorites by default but you can customize the list to contain any items you want To access an item from Favorites press the Home button Ay and select from the list Press Right or Left on the 5 way navigator or select the buttons in the upper right corner of the screen to move to another page of favorites Buttons Home 34 CHAPTER 3 Tip You can customize the Home button to open Applications with one press and Favorites with two Did You Know You can also open applications using the quick buttons on the front of your handheld Tip When no item is selected press Right or Left on the 5 way to scroll through application categories Did You Know Applications View displays an icon for opening Favorites Favorites View contains an entry for opening Applications Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Using Applications Applications View shows all of the applications on your handheld Use the category pick list in the upper right corner of the screen to view applications by category or to see all applications From the pick list you can also select to view the contents of your handheld s internal flash drive or of an expansion card if one is inserted in the expansion slot To access an item from Applications press the Home button Ay twice and select an icon Category pick li
240. ed Tip Using the Back and Forward icons to browse through the pages you recently visited one page at a time can be tedious Instead open the History list to go to a page you recently visited You can go back to a page you remember visiting but did not bookmark Use the History list to jump directly to that page Items in the History list are sorted chronologically You can delete all pages saved in the History list by selecting Clear Pages you ve recently visited are still available in the cache and you can visit 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp those pages by using the Back and Forward icons Tip 2 Open the History dialog box Create a bookmark to save the location or create a saved page to b Select Page and then select History save the content of a web page indefinitely a Open the menus Select the web page you recently visited 4 Done History Clear All Tungsten T5 Handheld 416 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Changing your Home and start pages You can change the page that your Home Page icon A goes to or change the page that the web browser starts with when it is first opened Changing your Home page You can choose a Home page from any web address Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the Page tab Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 417 CHAPTER 1
241. ed items In addition to putting individual entries into a category you can also put entire applications into categories For instance you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator into a category called Money 1 e To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above open that application e To add a category for applications go to Applications 2 Add a new category TETRI ee Hoff W a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and then sadusky Joe Unfiled 4 Spear Midyne gy A select Edit Categories Je le b Select New and enter the name of the new category c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done 491 CHAPTER 23 Using Categories to Organize Information Renaming a category Tip If you want to combine 1 items in different categories rename one category to the other category name e To rename a category within an application open that application e To rename a category for applications go to Applications Did You Know 2 Rename the category Some categories like All and Unfiled come with a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and then select Edit Categories your handheld and cannot be changed b Select the name of the category you want to change and then select Rename c Enter a new category name and then select OK d Select OK again 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 492 CHAPTER 23 Using C
242. eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 470 Viewing an entry that is masked c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenenees 471 Using a passwords sssadacessaccccecssganvavess aiarad eaa 471 Creating a PASSWORKG siiccaneassscecegusdiectggusce aA ERa 472 ChanGing ai PASSWONG sirrinin aa sees deucen sen dhsevanstary 473 Deleting a PASSWOMG isses osaan aade adanan aaa daa aaa 475 Deleting a forgotten password cccccccesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeess 476 Locking your handheld sciis a aaa 477 Locking your handheld automatically assssssssssssssssssrrnrnrnnssssreessnnns 478 Locking your handheld manually seesseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeees 480 Using Quick WlOGK sicsissncassacccccsvhced cacesscie cccdsh seed ctessvendsendssacedeardsssaed cvassiaads 481 Creating a Quick Unlock combination cceeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 481 Deleting your Quick Unlock COMbINAtION cecceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 483 Encrypting your informati ON a 484 Limiting the number of password attempts ccccesssseeeesesseeeeeessnaes 486 Related topissa aa a O E daa NEE E 489 Chapter 23 Using Categories to Organize Information 490 Adding a Cate gry isiin aa a 491 RENAMING a CALEGOLY sisceissocrseesssccyssca es qulvvaresevdewnid aiae 492 XV Deleting a CALC GOKY sussuri ianoaiiaea aA 493 Placing information into a category ccccccecessceececseeeeeesentaeeeeesenaeeeeesenaas 494 Placing an entry into a category sssssss
243. eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 575 Removing all information from a card ccssecceceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 576 PACA OOD CS iss secccacessecanzensstenagaass aacceuers ets cnceaes a E EO 577 Chapter 27 Maintaining Your Handheld 00 578 Hatidheld do s and On TSi ccangenaseaccusents seadensenects 578 Handheld O S sicvsszsavstuesagtiectens araanessaisacecass netdecnessactaantesensecseruaieacanmevecs 578 Handheld QO ts JccesscssetsceeseareestasntseecadiessisnaswecensesdQedeed caduasesssedaedinsece 579 RESEttING your handheld js z3sccccsssccdocsedsacadenasesnaseatesebandexadsvenadancensdenedenantadys 579 Doing a soft TOSCL cccccssccececeansscdceeiviessccesvanensceesavnandesedvneascsestanancsetenienss 579 DOING a hard TESS a srities Eonar eas 581 Restoring your information after a hard reSet ccscccccessseeeeeseseeeeeeees 582 Related GOP ICS 5525 dccacesstanazcasnaszadcass dacnesiesansdacaae ve daeaceangtanndsseazendent dandenaesn ates 584 Chapter 28 Common Questions ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 585 SOLU E E E E EEEE DEEE E EAT AE E AT 585 FRAN Gh iiisge a a a a aE DA 587 Moving around io eaa iiaea enaa aeaa aAa aa eaa IE iaa 590 Entering MformatiON sasssa naii ginanian inaandaa anida 590 SV MCMLOMIZIIMG eannan ai ria EEE TEE A AEREE Ai TESA 593 File Transfer Drive MOdC ceccssccccceessneeeeeseneeeeeseceaeeeeseeaaeeeseeenaeeeesseaaes 599 Calendal asire na E e a E ea SEEE AT EE A ETE 601 MEMOS isnie a a
244. een so that when you tap an element on the screen your handheld detects exactly what you want it to do Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Correcting problems with tapping Is your screen not responding to taps Are you getting unexpected results when you tap For example when you tap the number keyboard icon does the Find dialog box open instead If this happens it s time to align the screen 1 Open Touchscreen Preferences CEFA Touchscreen Tap the target Tap the center of each target with your stylus This aligns the b Select Prefs 6 touchscreen digitizer a Go to Applications c Select Touchscreen 2 Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible and then select Done N NOTE You need to tap at least three targets maybe more if you don t tap carefully 4 Done 538 CHAPTER 25 You can choose different types of sounds for Calendar Tasks and World Clock Go to the application open the Options menu and then select Preferences When you connect headphones to your handheld the external speaker is automatically silenced the Sounds amp Alerts settings are maintained and all volume levels are automatically adjusted for use with headphones Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Selecting sound settings Are sounds too soft or too loud Set the volume levels for the system game and alarm tones or turn sounds
245. eft corner of the screen 1 20 04 Yy Continued ae a bounce video 1 20 04 A friends z hee 1 20 04 Tungsten T5 Handheld 184 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Tip If a photo is larger than your handheld s screen either because of its original size or because you have zoomed in tap and drag with the stylus to view different parts of the photo Tungsten T5 Handheld To see a full screen view of the photo or to play a video select the item from the list A video automatically starts playing when you select it For photos press Up or Down on the 5 way to zoom in or out If you zoom out icons appear for rotating or sending the photo Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the List View screen 4 Done 185 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Viewing a slide show Tip By default both photos and videos in an album are displayed during a slide show To view photos You can set how long a only select Preferences from the Options menu and then uncheck the Show videos in Slide Show box photo is displayed in slide show mode before the next item appears by opening the Options 1 menu selecting Options selecting Preferences and then selecting a time interval from the Slide 2 Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the location on your Show Delay pick list The handheld or an expansion card of the photos or videos you want to view defau
246. egory Renaming a category Deleting a category Placing information into a category Viewing information by category Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld If you re like most people you use your handheld to manage your work life and your personal life Yet these two areas contain so many details your children s after school activities your conference schedule your shopping list for the week and entertainment Categories help you organize different aspects of your life no matter how you choose to group them Benefits of categories e Better organize your information e Easily retrieve the information you need 490 CHAPTER 23 Did You Know You can have up to 15 categories in an application Tip Colors make it easy to find the info you need in Calendar Tip Add a category in Contacts that contains all of your medical numbers for quick access Other useful categories in Contacts are Emergency for fire ambulance and police Children for your children s school and friends and Entertainment for restaurants or theaters that you visit often Tungsten T5 Handheld Using Categories to Organize Information Adding a category You can add categories in many applications Contacts Expense Memos Note Pad Tasks and palmOne Media In palmOne Media categories are called albums Place individual entries into these categories to easily get to a group of relat
247. egory List Display the Day Month category pick list By default the Show Category pick list doesn t appear M Timed Events M Untimed Events M Daily Repeating Events Timed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific time Untimed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time Daily Repeating Events Show events that repeat every day 7 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 169 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Setting alarm and time options Tip You can view and schedule events in time slots that are before or after the start or end time You just need to scroll to those time slots Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar Oss Open the Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences Select the start and end times of your typical day This time frame appears in your Day View and Week View Y Continued Preferences Li Start Time 8 00 am End Time s O New events use time zones O Alarm Preset Alarm Sound Alarm Remind Me 3 Times Play Every v 5 minutes 170 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 Set any of the following alarm settings Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event When you check this box you also need to enter the default number of minutes days or hours before the event that the alarm sounds For events without a time the alarm settings are based o
248. eld Customizing Your Handheld Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone Phone Preferences let you configure your handheld to exchange messages and dial phone numbers when your handheld is connected to a GSM mobile phone sold separately The GSM mobile phone account must also include data services 1 Open Phone Preferences Braferences E Select the connection for your a Go to Applications phone applications b Select Prefs 6 connection BT to Nokia 3650 c Select Phone 2 Select the connection a Select the Connection pick list and select your mobile phone from the list b Select Test to make sure the settings work with your phone c Select Done 4 Done 549 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Customizing network settings Before You Begin Your handheld includes software that lets you connect your handheld to your Internet service provider ISP or to a dial in remote access server using a mobile phone After you configure your network settings you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network e A mobile phone with a Preferences screen or by using a third party application Bluetooth radio or an IR port sold separately You need the following Setting up a service profile A Hi nl Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial in server You can create save and provider account tnat reuse service profiles You can create additional service
249. eld Front panel controls 5 way navigator Screen Home Files Calendar Quick buttons Contacts Screen Displays the applications and information on your handheld The screen is touch sensitive Display the input area by tapping the Input icon on the status bar Use the input area to enter info with Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard 5 way navigator Helps you move around and select info to display on the screen Quick buttons Turn on your handheld and open Favorites Calendar Contacts or Files Tungsten T5 Handheld 19 CHAPTER 2 Basics 2 es i Key Term IR Short for infrared Beaming uses infrared technology to send information between two IR ports that are within a few feet of each other Did You Know Beaming lets you quickly share appointments addresses phone numbers and more Tungsten T5 Handheld Top and side panel controls IR port Expansion card slot IR port Expansion card slot Power button Headphone jack Stylus Stylus Power button Headphone jack Beams information between handhelds and other devices that have an IR port Lets you insert an expansion card sold separately to back up info and add memory applications and accessories to your handheld Turns your handheld on or off and lets you turn Keylock on if active Lets you connect standard 3 5 mm stereo headphones sold separately to your han
250. eld 311 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Subjects longer than one 3 line are shown ona single line with an ellipsis Address and compose your message New Message To myemployees mei a Enter the recipient s email symbol to the right of the address by entering it directly subject line Select the entering it from Contacts or_ ig ae a using Smart Addressing ee subject b In the Subject field enter the Know subject of your email Open the Edit menu to access the editing features available for a message you are composing Did Yo c In the area below the Subject line enter the text of your email amp OPTIONAL Attach one or more files to send with your message Ti p If you open another application whne youTe 5 Select one of the following options to send your message working on a message the message is Send Sends the email immediately automatically saved as a draft Outbox Stores email so you can compose email offline and then send it all during one connection with the server To send your email select Get amp Send Drafts Saves your message so you can work on it at another time 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 312 Tip You can t see the whole list of addresses in a field if the list is longer than two lines To see the whole list tap the word To cc or bcc Tip It s OK to enter commas instead of semicolons between
251. elect Edit End Last Sunday of October List and do steps b through e ist an ps roug b Select Add c Selecta city in your time zone and then select OK d Select OK again and then select Done e Select the Location pick list and select the city you just added 3 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 526 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Resetting the date and time In most cases you won t need to reset the date and time However you may need to do this if you do a hard reset on your handheld 1 Open Date amp Time Preferences EEE a Go to Applications Location v San Francisco Set Date b Select Prefs 6 Set Time c Select Date amp Time 2 Select the location Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 527 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 3 Set the date Year a Select the Set Date box arrows b Select the arrows to select the current year c Select the current month 1 d Select the current date 4 Set the time a Select the Set Time box CE b Select the hour and minute boxes and then select the arrows to change them c Select AM or PM and then select OK NOTE If you re using a 24 hour clock format you won t see the AM and PM options 5 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 528 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Selecting formats for dates times and numb
252. elect OK 4 Done 158 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Checking your schedule Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date while other times you want to gt 4 Tip T see an overview of a week or month Press the Calendar button repeatedly to cycle through the four different Viewing your appointments and tasks together views The Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due today If there s room on the screen the Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next Did You Know dates that have events scheduled on them The Agenda View shows how many unread messages you have in the 1 VersaMail application Press Calendar Or Did You Know N NOTE If Calendar is already open select the Agenda View icon instead You can use a favorite photo as the background Y Continued for your Agenda View Tungsten T5 Handheld 159 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Do one of the following to view your schedule e Select an appointment to go to it in Day View e Select a task to go to it in Tasks Thursday Nov 20 8 00 0 Walk dog 9 00 0 Dentist Category marker Santa Cruz Location 12 00 Lunch with Joe 2 00 Meet with sales team tomorrow No time icon Movie with Midyne O 1 Update project schedule O 2 Distribute meeting notes Overdue task icon S Agenda View icon 4 Done 1
253. elect the year 8 11 12 GED 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 c Select the month 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 d Select the date Y Continued 140 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip ou n change AENOR 3 Add an unscheduled event line without a time to a scheduled appointment a Select New Select the event description select b Select No Time Details select the Time box and select the start ne tisi and end times 9 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 5 00 6 00 Set Time Start Time End Time No time zone 4 Enter a description on the line that appears at the top of the screen Ry NOTE A diamond appears in the time column to show that the event doesn t start at a specific time 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 141 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling a repeating event standard interval There s no need to re enter events that take place on a regular basis Just set up a repeating event This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog a weekly team meeting a monthly game night with friends and annual events like anniversaries and holidays Tip To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year see Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar Oss Enter the event you want to repeat and then select th
254. email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection N NOTE Bluetooth functionality must be on if you want to use wireless features You must also set up an email account on your handheld before you can send or receive email messages Did You Know You can tap Bluetooth on 1 the status bar to quickly open the Bluetooth settings screen from any Open the email application or the web browser application on your 2 Verify Bluetooth status handheld Bluetooth a Tap Bluetooth B on the Power Tip status bar to open the You can also check the Bluetooth settings screen You Biudtooth is OR Bluetooth indicator next can select the icon even if it is to the battery indicator at dimmed meaning that the top of Favorites or Bluetooth is currently off Network v No Service Applications view to see Service PP b Make sure On is selected if Bluetooth is on Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 263 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Key Term Service Way of 3 connecting to a mobile Connect io youn phong phone to send a Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to information wirelessly connect to the Internet If you set up a phone connection the name of the for example through a service you configured is listed high speed GPRS carrier or a dial up b Select Connect account with an Internet service provider ISP Tip 4 Done You are now ready
255. en Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Open the Delete dialog box a Open the menus b Select Delete from the App menu 3 Delete the application a Select the Delete From pick list and then select Handheld or an expansion card b Select the application that you want to remove and then select Delete Select Yes and then select Done 4 Done Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer WINDOWS ONLY Ry NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software If you think you ll never want to synchronize your handheld with your computer again you can remove Palm Desktop software from your computer This process removes only the application files The information in your Users folder remains untouched IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software you also remove the synchronization software and can no longer synchronize your information Even if you want to synchronize with 114 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer another personal information manager like Microsoft Outlook you must leave Palm Desktop software installed on your computer Ry NOTE You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your computer 1 Open Add Remove Programs a From the Start menu select Settings and then select Control Panel b Double click the Add Remove programs icon 2 Remove Pal
256. ences a Go to Applications Password Quick Unlock b Select Prefs 6 Auto Lock Auto Lock box c Select Security Private Records v Show 2 Open the Lock Handheld dialog box a Select the Auto Lock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 478 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Select one of these lock options Lock Handheld il Never Always leave your Automatically lock handheld handheld unlocked When power is off When power Is off After a preset delay Automatically lock your Automatically lock handheld when handheld whenever you turn it power is off off Atapreset time Setatime when your handheld will automatically lock After a preset delay Seta period of inactivity after which your handheld will automatically lock 4 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 479 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Locking your handheld manually 1 Open Security Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs Pay c Select Security Private Records v Show Lock 2 Select Lock Select Lock Device This feature locks 4 Done your handheld and prevents others from using it without the password To unlock your handheld you must enter your password Tungsten T5 Handheld 480 CHAPTER 22 Before You Begin To use Quick Unl
257. ent description c Select the pick list and select Repeat v one when a World Clock alarm Minutes Hours or Days Private O sounds COR Cre Cee E d Enter how many minutes Did You Know hours or days before the event you want the alarm to When you set an alarm a sound and then select OK little alarm clock appears to the right of the event description 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 153 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also use the Event Details dialog box to change the alarm location category repeat and privacy settings Tungsten T5 Handheld Rescheduling an event Press Calendar Oss 2 Go to the event you want to reschedule a From Day View select Go To b Select the year month and date of the event c Select the event description and edit it if necessary IMPORTANT If you edit the description of a repeating event the new description appears in all instances of the event 3 Change the date and time a Select Details b Select the Time box and select the new start and end times c Select the Date box and select the new date d Select OK Ny Continued Event Details i Time Date Alarm Location Category v Unfiled Repeat v None Private O0 OR Cre Cee E 154 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 Tungsten T5 Handheld If you re changing a repeating event select one of the following Repeating Event i Q A
258. er and then click View Log If any problems occurred during synchronization a message appears on your computer screen asking if you want to view the log Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Synchronizing with a cable 1 Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into your handheld Synchronize your handheld with your computer a Press the HotSync button on the USB sync cable b When synchronization is complete a message appears at the top of your handheld screen and you can disconnect your handheld from the connector 4 Done 84 CHAPTER 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Customizing your synchronization settings You can set the following options for synchronization e Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your handheld Windows only e Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer setting whether synchronization is enabled automatically when you start your computer and choosing how much information to include in the synchronization troubleshooting log Mac only e Choosing how application information is updated during synchronization Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests WINDOWS ONLY In order for your computer to respond
259. erdue change the text color Show Messages Display the number of read and unread email messages Tip Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background Check If you want to see the the Background box select the photo thumbnail and then select a photo hours when you have Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo nothing scheduled as well as your appointments deselect Compress Da p r 5 Select Day and set any of the View But don t forget to following Dav View options Display Options e scroll down to see the g vay P i 5 anew Soredery st efault View v Agenda eventsal the end of your Show Category List Display the Month day or hide the input area category pick list By default the W Show Time Bars and display as much of Category pick list doesn t appear Compress Day View Day View as possible M Show Category Column Show Time Bars Display the bars that show the duration of an event and event conflicts Compress Day View Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with scheduled events Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and description The color of the category marker indicates which category the event is filed under Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 168 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 6 Select Month and set any of the TERET O following Month View options O Show Category List Default View Agenda Show Cat
260. ername you use to access your email b Select the Password box enter your email account password and then select OK c Select Next If you chose a common email provider from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen this screen is already filled in If not enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers a Enter your email address b Enter the names of your mail servers c Select Next Y Continued CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages VersaMail Enter a username and password for this account Username VersaMail Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address Incoming Mail Server pop mail yahoo com Outgoing Mail Server smtp mail yahoo com __ 284 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 Do one of the following Finish setup Select Done to finish setup and go to the Inbox of the account you set up where you can begin getting and_ sending email Set additional mail options Select Next to set advanced mail options 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld VersaMail Your VersaMail account is completed To exit tap done To set additional mail options tap next 285 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting advanced mail options The POP protocol does 1 f f not support retrieval of Set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account unread mail only from the server
261. error message or state you are experiencing e The steps you take to reproduce the problem e The version of handheld software you are using and available memory To find version and memory information follow these steps 1 Go to Applications 2 Open the menus 3 Select Info from the App menu 4 Select Version for version info and Size for memory info Tungsten T5 Handheld 616 Product Regulatory Information Tungsten T5 Handheld FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try
262. ers Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24 hour format or dates that begin with the month or year Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the applications on your handheld You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use your handheld For example in the United Kingdom time often is expressed using a 24 hour clock In the United States time is expressed using a 12 hour clock with an AM or PM suffix You can use the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences 1 Open Formats Preferences PaA Preset to a Go to Applications Time v HH MM am pm 2 36 pm b Select Prefs 6 Date M D Y 12 8 06 Dec 8 2006 C Select Formats Week starts Sunday Numbers 1 000 00 Y Continued 529 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld The country setting Select a country changes only the way the 2 nee ea lll 9 date ane time look It a Select the Preset to box to doesn t change your open the Set Country dialog handheld s time to that box country s time To do that go to Date amp Time b Select a country Preferences or to World Clock c Select OK 3 amp OPTIONAL Customize any of the following preset formats Time Controls whether the time is displayed in 12 hour or 24 hour format and which symbol separates the numbers Date Controls the sequence in which the day month and
263. es to sleep Manual Keylock turns on when you press and hold the power button until the system sound confirms that Keylock is on 4 Done Selecting power saving settings The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options 1 Open Power Preferences E a Go to Applications Auto off after v 2minutes On while Charging v Off b Select Prefs 8 Beam Receive v Off c Select Power Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 542 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Select the pick lists to change any of the following settings and then select Done Auto off after Select how quickly your handheld automatically turns off after a period of inactivity 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes or 3 minutes On while charging Select whether your handheld stays on continuously when it is connected to the AC charger When this option is off you can still turn on your handheld to view your info while your handheld charges but it turns off automatically after a period of inactivity Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed information on your handheld Turn this setting on to receive beamed info or turn it off to prevent receiving beamed info 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 543 CHAPTER 25 Tip You can use your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology to connect to other devices without using Connection Preferences Key Term ISP Acronym for Internet service provider
264. essages that you move into or out of the IMAP You can synchronize i folder or delete in the folder folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you When you synchronize a folder any email messages in the selected folder on the mail server are downloaded to the same folder on your handheld Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your handheld are moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server create in addition to the default folders Inbox SS B Outbox Drafts Sent and Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization Trash Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and or the mail server you may have to do some steps before you can wirelessly synchronize email messages between your Tip handheld and the server as follows If you have a folder on your handheld that e If you need to create a folder on both your handheld and the server create the folder on your matchesatolderonthe handheld and check the Also create on server box mail server you do not need to do anything before synchronizing e f there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your handheld you do not need to check the Also create on server box wirelessly You can turn folder synchronization on or off during a Get Mail operation and set synchronization options from a menu Tungsten T5 Handheld 383
265. eting a location 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the location you want to delete Edit List London New York a Select a Location pick list Rio de Janeiro San Francisco Si b Select Edit List c Select a location and then select Remove 3 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 507 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Setting the alarm clock Use World Clock to set an alarm within the next 24 1 hours Set alarms outside of this timeframe in Calendar 2 Set the alarm a Select the Alarm box Go to Applications and select World Clock O Remember to put your handheld on local time If b Select the time columns to set the hour and minute and then select OK you travel from San Francisco to London N NOTE Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location make London your primary location so that all your alarms ring on Alarm box time instead of eight World Clock ofo Set Alarm h lat San Francisco i iets Sat Dec 25 2004 9 58 pm Set an alarm while you re working to remind you when to leave to get to your appointment on ees gt London Sun 2 58pm Sun 5 58am time Set Date amp Time Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 508 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Tip To turn off an alarm before it sounds select the Alarm box and then select Alarm Off Tungsten T5 Handheld
266. etooth devices cannot find my handheld e Tap Bluetooth BB on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen and make sure that Bluetooth is turned on e Select Prefs and make sure the Discoverable setting is set to Yes Problems with incompatible applications palmOne Inc works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your handheld Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include e Fatal errors needing resets Tungsten T5 Handheld 611 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions e Nonresponsive handheld requiring a reset e Slow performance e Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality e Problems using Bluetooth technology or other features e Problems opening an application e Problems synchronizing You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the application and then operating your handheld After you have deleted the application try to replicate the operation that created the error If removing the application solves your problem contact the application developer for a solution Also go to www palmOne com us support contact incompatible_apps html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application Finding a third party application that is causing a problem If you have multiple third party applications in
267. eve lave Me Colt am Ey 3 Change any of the following settings and then select OK Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list If you turn off this setting your finished tasks disappear from the list when you check them off but they stay in your handheld s memory until you purge them Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the date you really complete and check off the task If you don t assign a due date to a task the completion date still records when you complete the task Show Due Dates Display each task s due date in the list if you assigned one and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue Show Priorities Show the priority setting for each task in the list Show Categories Show the category for each task in the list Alarm Sound Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 234 CHAPTER 11 Tungsten T5 Handheld WIEVareve CAOT Ey Working with Tasks on your computer Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the Tasks window e Entering editing and deleting tasks e Creating repeating tasks e Marking tasks private e S
268. evices Dial prefix check box 552 dial in connections 544 dial in servers 550 551 553 dial up accounts 262 264 dial up connections 547 550 Dialer application benefits of 429 dialing from 430 431 related topics for 436 troubleshooting 436 Dialer icon 430 Tungsten T5 Handheld Dialer keypad 430 dialing from handheld 429 430 431 432 434 dialing in to networks 544 dialing preferences 547 Dialing setting connections 547 dialog boxes 25 44 See also specific dictionaries 568 digital cameras 568 digitizer defined 538 Disable device name cache command 273 disabling options 25 Disconnect command Web Pro 410 Disconnect on Exit option 379 disconnecting from Internet 410 disconnecting HotSync cable 593 Discoverable setting 256 257 271 discovering Bluetooth devices 256 271 273 Discovery icon 267 271 Discovery Results screen 256 271 disk space requirements 3 Display Name option 288 374 Display Options command 167 513 516 Display Options dialog box calendar 167 clock 510 e mail 320 Home screen 513 516 display preferences 516 518 520 521 display See screen Display View icon 403 displaying application groups 494 application icons 590 603 application information 17 112 applications 497 appointments 159 162 163 164 bookmarks 406 calculators 27 Category pick list 168 169 Command toolbar 47 contact information 123 128 current date and time 500 504 e mail attachments 340 413 events
269. eview this Common Questions section for solutions to the problem Fix the problem before reinstalling the third party applications e If your handheld no longer has problems install the third party applications one application at a time using the following procedure a Open the Backup folder you moved to the desktop in step 2 b Double click a PRC file On a Windows computer the palmOne Quick Install window opens with the PRC file listed On a Mac computer the HotSync Manager window opens with the PRC file listed NOTE Alternatively on a Mac computer you can drag the PRC file to the Send To Handheld droplet instead of double clicking it c Click Done d Synchronize your handheld with your computer e Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations Tungsten T5 Handheld 613 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions f Do one of the following e If installing the application re creates your problem remove the application and contact the application developer for a solution Continue to reinstall your applications one application at a time to make sure another application is not creating a problem e If installing the application does not cause a problem go to step a and reinstall another application g Go to www palmOne com us support contact incompatible_apps html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application Ry NOTE Some applications use more than one PRC file You should continue to check each PRC file e
270. formation has been changed on your computer it will be replaced by the information from your handheld and you will lose the changes you made on your computer Do Nothing No synchronization occurs so any changes made on either your handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location Ny Continued 90 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis check the Set as default box If you do not select this box the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize Thereafter information is updated according to the default setting Synchronize the files 4 Click OK and then click Done 4 Done MAC ONLY 1 Select the application you want to customize a Double click the Palm Desktop icon yy in the Palm folder b From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings c From the User pop up menu select the appropriate username d Select an application e Click Conduit Settings Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 91 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Tip You should generally 2 keep the default setting Synchronize the files for Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization all applications Choose HotSync action for Photos an overwrite option only Synchronize the files if h ifi BS O Macintosh overwrites handheld l you a Speel I vra O Ha
271. from within Palm Desktop software 000 94 Using the palmOne Quick Install ICON ccecceseeeeeeesteeeeseentaeeeeeeeenaes 95 Using the palmOne Quick Install WINdOW cccccsesteeeeeenteeeeeeeenes 96 Installing applications from a Mac computer eceseseeeeeeeestteeeeesenee 97 Using the Send To Handheld droplet cccccsseccecsesseeeessssieeeesenee 97 Using commands in the HotSync MENU ccsscceeeeessteeeeseenaeeeessenaees 98 Tungsten T5 Handheld v Using File Transfer to transfer info to your handheld cccsseeeeeeenees 99 Using Drive Mode to work with info on another computer 000 103 Other ways of Managing information cccceescceccsssseeeeesseeeeeeseseeeeeess 106 Importing information from other applications cccceeeeeees 107 Restoring archived items ON your COMPUTED ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 109 Installing the additional software from the CD sesceeeeeseereees 110 Checking space and version NUMDEFSS ceeeeee eee eeeeeenteeaeeeeeeeeeneees 111 REMOVING information ccccecceesseeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseneeeessenaeeeeeeeea 113 Removing an application from your handheld ecceeeeeeeereeees 113 Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer sss 114 RElatEd TOPICS prineri ona oae E e a aaa 116 Chapter 6 Managing Your Contacts cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 117 Adding a COMLACE osteti noed niea a a a N 118
272. g Draft Tungsten T5 Handheld Go to Applications and select SMS B Edit the message a Select Draft from the categories pick list b Select the message you want to edit c In the message view select Edit and edit your message Send or store the draft message Select Send Sends the current message now Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later Select Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the Draft category Select Yes to keep your changes and return the message to the Draft category Select No to discard your changes and return the message to the Draft category 4 Done 393 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Setting advanced messaging features Go to Applications and select SMS W 2 Go to the Preferences menu a Open the menus b Select Preferences on the Option menu 3 amp OPTIONAL Set the following parameters Confirm Deleted Message Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from the Message menu To display confirmation messages select this check box Delete After Transfer Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you accept the data in the appropriate application To keep data messages after you transfer them to the application uncheck this box Ny Continued
273. g Microsoft Outlook as your default email program To synchronize Microsoft Outlook 97 98 2000 XP with a VersaMail email account you must set Microsoft Outlook as the default email handler You must check your username and password Tip Make sure your 1 username and password are set up correctly within f Outlook a Click Start navigate to Settings and click Control Panel On your computer open the Internet Options screen b In the Control Panel click Internet Options N NOTE For Windows XP click Network and Internet Connections and then click Internet Options 2 Set the default email program a Click the Programs tab b Select Microsoft Outlook as the default email program c Click OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 351 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting advanced email synchronization options For each email account you set up on your handheld you can set options for synchronizing email on your handheld with email on your computer You can also synchronize email folders on your handheld with folders on your computer 1 On your computer open the VersaMail configuration screen a Click the HotSync Manager icon on the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen b Select Custom c Select VersaMail from the list and then click Change 2 Enter the advanced synchronization options a On the VersaMail Configuration For User screen click the plus sign to the
274. g box select Subjects Only to download downloaded messages in subjects only or select Messages to download entire messages VersaMail Preferences Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 298 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip ley Se a Se ae 3 amp OPTIONAL Select advanced ve epee options for getting email Details synchronizing IMAP am Pa m unread madi folders from the Get Mail a Select Details and then select O mail from last 7 Options dialog box With any of the following M Download Attachments wireless IMAP folder Max Message Size 5 KB synchronization you can e Get only unread mail O Always connect using synchronize email IMAP accounts only messages between a e Get mail from last X days folder in an email account number of days you specify default is 7 e Download Attachments e Set Max maximum Message Size default is 5KB e Set the default connection type for this account on your handheld and a folder with the same name on your email provider s mail server b Select OK to return to the Get Mail Options dialog box Select OK 5 amp OPTIONAL If you are retrieving mail using a VPN connection you may be asked to enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN 6 Select OK 4 Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox Tungsten T5 Handheld 299 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Auto get mail with notification
275. ghlighting a contact in the Contacts list and then 1 Press Contacts B selecting Edit Copy Create a new contact select the Note icon and 2 then paste the info into a note Then cut and paste the text into the correct field in the new contact Duplicate a contact a Select the contact you want and then select Edit b Open the menus Did You Know If you duplicate a contact and do not edit the name 4 Done the contact appears in the Contacts list as lt Last name gt lt First name gt Copy c Select Record and then select Duplicate Contact Tungsten T5 Handheld 125 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Locating a contact on your list Tip You can also press Right 1 on the 5 way navigator or select the Quick Look Up icon at the top of the screen to open the Quick 2 Look Up line Press Up Press Contacts f Search for the contact Contacts amp gt 302 555 9512M and Down to select the a Select the Look Up line at the ita J T itm jtmcom bation ofthe serken and letter of the name you Nguyen Mar EESAN want in each box and enter the first letter of the Nosuch Don donn example com nam u wan find Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234 H press Right to move to ame you want to find Speier Lane 831 555 7534M the next box Taylor David 650 555 9278 W Technical Support D b Enter the second letter of the Teile ETE Did You Kno name and so on until you Venkat Raja raja an
276. gsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Using Drive Mode to work with info on another computer On a Mac computer use Drive Mode to move files between a computer and your handheld s internal drive If you are at a Windows computer that doesn t have File Transfer installed a computer at a hotel or your friend s house for example use Drive Mode to open move or copy files on your handheld With Drive Mode your handheld connects to your computer like an external USB removable drive The computer must support standard USB removable drives in order for you to use Drive Mode with the computer Most current operating systems such as Windows 2000 Windows XP and Mac OS X support USB removable drives Ry NOTE While you re using Drive Mode you cannot use any other feature of your handheld including using File Transfer or synchronizing You can however continue to receive alerts such as notifications of appointments or new email messages If you select an alert or attempt to use your handheld in some other way such as pressing a quick button a message appears asking if you want to continue using Drive Mode or disconnect from Drive Mode to use your handheld 103 CHAPTER 5 Lip If you are formatting your handheld s internal drive or an expansion card while in Drive Mode be sure to select the file system type FAT do not select FAT32 or any other file system type If you se
277. h Off When the Bluetooth setting is off other users cannot discover your handheld This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and a security chain and disabling the doorbell When Bluetooth is off you cannot access the Discoverable setting Bluetooth On and Discoverable No When your handheld and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously formed a trusted pair This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and disabling the doorbell but any friends who already have the key can enter By default the Discoverable setting is enabled when Bluetooth is on Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes When your handheld is on Bluetooth is on and the Discoverable setting is set to Yes you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device You are automatically connected with devices with which you have previously communicated but you can refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices This is similar to locking your front door with a dead bolt and enabling the doorbell Friends who already have the key can enter freely and if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection you can choose to open the door or ignore the request Tungsten T5 Handheld 256 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Key Term Discoverable Setting that allows other Bluetooth devices to find and connect with your handheld Your han
278. h for a name whose spelling you Shortcut Tett always forget or a b On the ShortCut Name line Directions complex email address enter the abbreviation Create a ShortCut ShortCut Entry 9 ShortCut Name a Select New c On the ShortCut Text line s enter the text you want to insert when you write the abbreviation d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 536 CHAPTER 25 Tip To delete a ShortCut open ShortCuts Preferences and select the ShortCut Select Delete select Yes and then select Done Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Changing ShortCuts After you create a ShortCut you can modify it at any time 1 Open ShortCuts Preferences Preferences ShortCuts br Breakfast di Dinner a Go to Applications ds Date Stamp dts Date and Time Stamp b Select Prefs 6 eetusk me Meeting c Select Shortcuts tolima stamp Edit the ShortCut a Select the ShortCut you want to change b Select Edit c Make your changes d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 537 CHAPTER 25 Key Term Touchscreen Another name for your handheld s screen and the internal circuitry that enables it to respond appropriately to taps Tip If your screen is not responding to taps use the 5 way navigator to open Touchscreen Preferences Key Term Calibration The process of aligning your handheld s touch sensitive scr
279. hat applies to one platform only In most cases if you see one heading check the following or preceding sections for the other Sometimes there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows procedure or text this feature is not available to Mac users Links appear as underlined words in sidebars and other places throughout this guide In this chapter Related topics Links on the first page of each chapter that send you to a specific section Links that send you to other topics in this guide to learn about more things you can do with an application or feature xxi Sidebars Before You Begin E Tungsten T5 Handheld Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of procedures Tip A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully a shortcut a pointer to a related feature Did You Know An interesting fact about the topic being described may include a link to more information Key Term Atechnical term related to the topic being described The term may appear in this guide or only on your handheld My Handheld A pointer to a website where you can obtain general information about your handheld and learn the latest tips tricks and more Support A pointer to a website where you can find help if you experience problems with a specific feature or with your handheld xxii CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer In this chapter What s in
280. he Edit Bookmarks List dialog box a Select the Bookmark icon E b Open the menus c Select Edit Bookmarks in the Bookmarks menu Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 408 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Arrange the bookmarks a Use the stylus to drag and drop bookmarks into different slots on the current page to organize them b Move a bookmark to a different page by dragging and dropping it onto the Page icon Page icons represent the ten pages of with ten slots each for bookmarks Select Save 4 Done Edit Bookmark List Title Bookmarks Mapquest vwy 409 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet While you re working with stored information in the web browser such as saved pages stored versions of pages and so forth you can disconnect from the Internet to reduce usage charges You can connect to the Internet again when you need access Disconnecting from the Internet Did You Know Generally if you are 1 using GPRS service you are charged only for the data sent If you are using 2 a GSM service you are charged for the time you are connected Go to Favorites and select Web amp Disconnect from the Internet a Open the menus Tip b Select Disconnect in the Page menu If you are in another application you can tap a v Done URL and a web browser connects to the Internet and displays th
281. he Send menu item in the leftmost menu c Select Bluetooth and then select OK Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK The information is sent to the receiving device 4 Done 439 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Sending a category Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your child s soccer schedule and then send the entire category to your spouse s handheld Tip When you send a category the individual entries within the category contacts memos photos and so on appear as unfiled items on the receiving device Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Select the category you want to send a Open an application b From the list view select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the category you want This takes you to the list view within the selected category Send the category a Open the menus b Select the Send Category menu item in the leftmost menu c Select Bluetooth and then select OK Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK The information is sent to the receiving device 4 Done 440 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Sending an application Ti p Tap the Send From pick 1 a list to send an application ogee application you want from an expansion card O SENE Send From v Device inserted into the nai Memos amp 60K a Go to Applications Note Pad amp 14
282. he Start and End Time boxes and then select the hour the minute and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last auto get mail to take place Select OK Days Select the days you want the schedule to be active You can choose any number of days but you can set up only one schedule for each email account 3 Select OK Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 301 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 amp OPTIONAL Select Get Mail 4 Done Auto get notifications The auto get mail feature provides three types of alerts during and after it gets messages Status messages Depending on the connection type a series of status messages may appear during the auto get connection and mail retrieval process Notifications You can choose to have your handheld alert you with a beep or alert sound or with a blinking light when a new message arrives in your account Reminders screen If auto get discovers and downloads new messages for an email account a notification appears on the Reminders screen telling you the account name and the number of new messages If auto get is scheduled for more than one account a separate notification appears for each account Tungsten T5 Handheld 302 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting notification options You can choose a sound such as a bird a phone or an alarm to let you know when new email arrives Any custom sound you 1 T ification instal
283. he System Sound setting is turned on 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 570 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Did You Know You can install applications and other files to an expansion card during synchronization Tip When the highlight on Applications View is not active you can press and hold the Select button to open the category pick list Tungsten T5 Handheld Opening an application on an expansion card When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot your handheld adds the expansion card to the category list in the upper right corner of Applications View You can easily switch between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card Ry NOTE Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card Try installing these applications on your handheld instead If you still have problems contact the developer 1 2 Insert the expansion card Go to Applications and select the EPA gt BMy cord expansion card from the p z category pick list A A powerOne Solitaire Select an application icon to open that application 4 Done Category pick list 571 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Opening files on an expansion card You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into the expansion slot Tip Use palmOne File 1 Transfer Windows only to install applications and transfer folders and files from your
284. he left side of the input area or the full screen and then write the shortcut letter For example to select Paste from the Edit menu write the Command stroke followed by the letter p You do not have to open a menu to use the command stroke Command ZNJ Options stroke Menu items Ry NOTE When you write the Command stroke the Command toolbar appears See the next section for info on using the Command toolbar Using the Command toolbar The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen For example if you have text selected the icons might be Cut Copy and Paste If no text is selected the icons might be Beam Undo and Delete To use the Command toolbar write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar and then tap an icon to select its command Command A stroke Ee Pa Cut Copy Paste Beam Undo Delete Tungsten T5 Handheld 47 CHAPTER 3 If you select text in an application before you tap Find the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box Open an application before you tap Find to display results from that application at the top of the results list Want to stop searching Select Stop at any time during a search To continue the search select Find More Did You Know If you select a result that is a file located on the internal drive or on an expansion card the Files application opens displaying the selected file Select the file name to ope
285. he magnifying glass A move the cursor which is now a magnifying glass over the page and click repeatedly Click Previous View or Q depending on your version of Reader to return to the original view e Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide If you link to a page in the guide click Previous View or o depending on your version of Reader to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link e When selecting the page s to print be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of your computer screen not the printed page number For example to print the page you are reading right now select page 20 the file page not page xx the printed page XX Tungsten T5 Handheld What s in this guide The info in this guide includes step by step instructions links to cross references and sidebars Step by step instructions Here you ll find how to information Look for these cues in instructions Y Continued 4 Done IMPORTANT amp OPTIONAL N NOTE WINDOWS ONLY MAC ONLY Links Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page Cue that signals the end of the procedure You re done A step that you must follow otherwise you could experience an error or even lose information A step you might find useful Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about a procedure step A procedure or text t
286. he method you use to move info onto your handheld depends on the type of info it is Here are the methods to use with the most common information types Information in Contacts Calendar Tasks Memos Note Pad Windows only Expense VersaMail Use Palm Desktop or Outlook Windows to enter information on your computer Synchronize to transfer the new or updated information on your computer to your handheld Applications PRC or PDB file Use Quick Install from within Palm Desktop Windows or drag the application to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop Mac and then synchronize to install the application to your handheld 77 CHAPTER 5 Tip You can choose to synchronize a Word Excel or PowerPoint file even if you copied it using File Transfer See the Documents To Go application on your computer for information Did You Know When you transfer photos and videos using the desktop Media application the files may be converted for viewing on your handheld File Transfer does not convert files so you may not be able to view the photos or videos on your handheld Did You Know Even though photos and videos transferred using Media are saved in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive updates to these files are included when you synchronize Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Word documents Excel
287. heduled events 141 unscheduled time slots 168 untimed events 120 140 141 145 169 up arrow controls 25 updating information 88 owner information 540 third party applications 8 updating information 79 upgrades 4 7 111 277 uppercase letters 54 55 533 URLs accessing web pages with 398 401 changing 405 407 connecting to Internet from 410 411 e mail and 328 setting auto completion option for 421 specifying Home page 418 tapping from other applications 410 USB connectors 21 USB port 8 USB sync cable 21 84 Use APOP check box 377 Use calling card check box 552 Use proxy server check box 426 Use Secure Connection option 287 290 user profiles 11 16 user specific information 11 User s Guide xx xxi 615 usernames assigning to handhelds 11 dial up accounts and 262 e mail accounts and 277 279 e mail addresses and 551 encrypting 377 650 finding in e mail addresses 284 hard resets and 581 network connections and 270 searching for 126 service profiles and 554 setting 268 synchronizing 281 upgrades and 7 validating 295 Users folder 114 vacations 145 validating usernames and passwords 295 VCF files 107 335 VCS files 107 335 VersaMail application 26 accessing e mail with 278 adding attachments 341 343 addressing e mail 313 backing up mail databases 382 changing default folders 319 changing display options 320 changing e mail accounts 291 368 creating mail folders 324 325 creating personal signatures 316
288. held 211 CHAPTER 10 K If RealPlayer reaches the period of inactivity you set before you exit the application the screen turns off and the music continues playing To set the period of inactivity open the Options menu and select Preferences Select an option from the Auto powersave after pick list and then select OK If you exit RealPlayer it turns off when it reaches the period of inactivity defined in Power Preferences Want to stop playing music when you exit RealPlayer Open the Options menu and select Preferences Uncheck the Enable Background Playback box and then select OK Tungsten T5 Handheld Listening to Music Playing music on your handheld 1 2 y Done On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music D Select a song to play e To play the current song tap Play e To play a different song tap Songs and select a song from the list e To play a song that is not located in the Songs list open the menus select Play Folder and navigate to the song you want RealOne Continuous play Progress indicator Random play Play Pause Volume Stop Previous song Next song RealPlayer continues playing until it reaches the end of your list It stops playing if you tap Stop or turn off your handheld 212 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Managing playlists You can create dozens of playlists with your favorite songs Creating a playlist Tip For t
289. howing masking and hiding private tasks e Assigning tasks to categories e Printing your task list e Selecting how to view tasks e Sorting tasks by due date priority level or categories WINDOWS ONLY To open Tasks on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Tasks on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Tasks on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder and then click To Dos 235 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great VersaMail Sending tasks as attachments to email messages tips software accessories and more visit Sharing e Beaming tasks to other Palm Powered devices www palmOne com mytungstent5 e Sending tasks to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Support e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook If you re having problems with Tasks or with anything Privacy Keeping tasks private by turning on security options else on your handheld go to Categories Organizing tasks by type www palmOne com support tungstent5 Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks Questions Tungsten T5 Handheld 236 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos In this chapter Creating a memo Viewing and editing a memo Moving memos in your memos list
290. ices Allowing your handheld to wake up when it is turned off You can set your handheld to receive information through Bluetooth connections when your handheld is turned off The radio remains on but your device is not discoverable For another Bluetooth device or application to wake up your handheld it must know your device name This limits the connections to devices that are trusted or have connected with you before 1 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth 2 Open the menus Select Options and then select Allow wakeup The selection on the Option menu toggles to Do not allow wakeup This indicates that Allow Wakeup is enabled IMPORTANT Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even when your handheld is turned off Be sure to monitor your battery level 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 274 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus mytungstentd Managing Info Synchronizing your handheld with your desktop PC Contacts Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts Support PP VersaMail Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your handheld s If you re having problems with Bluetooth or with Binetooih tecnnolagy any
291. ick list HotSync Buttons i Customize the HotSync Button on the cradle or optional handheld modem E w HotSync Cradle E w HotSync 524 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Setting the date and time You can set the date time and location for all the applications on your handheld that require this information You can also select the format in which the date time and numbers appear Selecting a location You can set the current date and time based on your location When you travel to a new time zone change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time Your appointments stay at the time you entered them no adjustments for time zones So always enter your schedule based on the time zone you will be in on the day of the event Did You Know The location you select 1 also appears as the primary location in World Clock Open Date amp Time Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Date amp Time Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 525 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Tip You can rename the 2 Select the location Edit Location 6 location to the city where Name field you live Select the Name a Select the Location pick list Name Bonny Doon field and then modify the and select a city in your time location name zone If you found a city in the M This location observes list go to step 3 Daylight Saving Time No nearby city S
292. ick the link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 VersaMail Sending and receiving Office files as attachments to email messages Support If you re having problems with Documents click the Documents To Go icon on your computer and then click Help or go to www dataviz com Tungsten T5 Handheld 177 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Supported file types Viewing photos or videos Organizing photos and videos Personalizing a photo Copying a photo or video Deleting a photo or video Sharing photos and videos Working with palmOne Media on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld A picture may be worth a thousand words but what happens when you have lots of pictures or videos that you are trying to keep organized Or maybe just a few that are so meaningful that you want to have instant access to them at any time Solve both problems with palmOne Media Media features easy viewing and organization of still photos and videos You can keep your favorite photos right on your handheld select photos as the background for your Favorites and Applications views and Agenda View in Calendar even add a photo to a Contacts entry Benefits e Never be far from your favorite people or places e Simplify photo and vi
293. il message select an email address c Select the entry to edit it if necessary For example you might need to add an area code or country code to a phone number 4 Done 134 CHAPTER 6 Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing Your Contacts Working with Contacts on your computer Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Viewing copying and deleting contacts e Editing contact details e Marking contacts private e Showing masking and hiding private contacts Printing contacts Changing between the list contact info and Contact Edit views e Adding notes to a contact Adding a date and time stamp to a contact Organizing contacts into categories e Sharing contacts WINDOWS ONLY To open Contacts on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Contacts on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Contacts on your computer launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder and then click Addresses 135 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great f aa tips software accessories Moving e Opening applications and more visit Around e Using men
294. ilboxes on the server usually have size restrictions itis a good idea to delete messages on the server regularly Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Open the VersaMail Preferences a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences Select preferences Preferences i General Ad d Get Select whether to get Advanced System et v Subjects Only message subjects only or entire W Ask Every Time messages M Confirm Deletions O Delete Msgs on Server Ask Every Time Displays a dialog M Download Attachments box for choosing subjects only or SESS este 7 RIME entire messages each time you retrieve email If it is unchecked messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the Get pick list Confirm Deletions Displays a confirmation dialog before deleting email Delete Msgs on Server f this is checked messages that you delete on your handheld are automatically deleted on the server If it is unchecked you are asked each time you delete messages on your handheld whether you want to also delete them on the server Ny Continued 360 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont d Tungsten T5 Handheld Download Attachments Causes files attached to email to be automatically downloaded to your handheld Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded Receive Format Lets you retrieve messages in HTML or plain te
295. ildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material To most people static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances For example after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet building up electrons on your body you may get a shock the discharge event when you touch a metal doorknob This little shock discharges the built up static electricity 620 Tungsten T5 Handheld ESD susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry so when working with electronic devices take measures to help protect your electronic devices including your palmOne handheld from ESD harm While palmOne has built protections against ESD into its products ESD unfortunately exists and unless neutralized could build up to levels that could harm your equipment Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD Devices that you carry with you such as your handheld build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device Then when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station a discharge event can occur Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another The recommendation from palmOn
296. imes 4 Done The category name and its color coded marker appear on the category list 151 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Assigning a color code to an event Did You Know In Day View and Month 1 View you can set the Display Options to show the category list so that you can view all your 2 events or just the events for a single color code Press Calendar Oss Enter the event you want to color code 3 Select the category marker next to the description and then select a category from the list Aug 31 06 KIBUG0 GEC o Bets i Category 8 0c o Holiday j marker 9 0C o Personal 10 0C o Unfiled 4 Done In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the event is color coded In Week View and Month View the symbol for the event is color coded Tungsten T5 Handheld 152 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Setting an alarm Tip You can customize your alarm settings in the Calendar Preferences dialog box Press Calendar Oss See cy ae 5 2 Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to and then select the event Did You Know description If you set your alarms in World Clock instead of Calendar you have 3 E cies different alarm sound erne alarm Event Details 9 choices Keep in mind Time E a Select Details that since World Clock Date alarme aran tiedtoa b Check the Alarm box Pe specific event you won t ACA TIANE saia Poir Category v Unfiled see an ev
297. in script after it terminates e Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS software such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools Tungsten T5 Handheld 561 CHAPTER 25 Before You Begin You must purchase and install a compatible VPN client onto your handheld You also need the VPN settings from your corporate system administrator Did You Know Once you have installed and set up VPN you can connect or disconnect VPN from within the web browser Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Setting up VPN If you want to use your handheld to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN on your handheld A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company s firewall security layer Without a VPN you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the server You need to set up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations e Your company s wireless local area network LAN is located outside the firewall e Your company s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall for example from a public location or at home Check with your company s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network If you need a VPN you must purchase and install a third party
298. in the 2 Open the Phone Setup dialog palmOne folder located box Phone Setup under the Windows Start Select a phone to connect to Programs menu a Select Setup Devices Manufacturer v Select Key Term b Select Phone Setup Trusted pair Two devices for example c Select Phone Connection fei noe d Set Nox connect to each other because each device can find the same passkey on the other device Once you form a trusted pair with a device you do not need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 258 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices If you receive a message that your phone is not ready to accept a connection check to make sure that your phone is prepared to make a Bluetooth connection See the instructions included with your phone Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Select the phone you want to connect to a Select the Manufacturer and Model pick lists select the correct entries for your phone and then select Next b The Connection Setup screen displays all Bluetooth phones within range If your phone did not show up on the discovery results select Find More to search again If the phone still does not appear on the list go to www palmOne com us support downloads phonelink html to download the driver for your phone and then go to step 4 c Select the phone you want select OK and then select Next again Discovery Results i Sh
299. ing any message that exceeds your maximum message size up to a total size of 2MB b Select Next Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 287 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set outgoing mail options VersaMail Outgoing Mail Options a Select any of the following Your Name for display only Reply To Address if different than current account Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply To Address Enter the email dies that you want recipients to see and reply to on your email messages only if this is different from the email address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look as though the email came from the address you entered BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send to another email address The blind copy email address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate email account enter that email address b Select Next Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 288 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip aaan a i 3 patie ETE ersaMai A A Outgoing Mail Options HSI ST NEAN omgong a Check the Attach Sign
300. ing File Transfer to transfer info to your handheld Using Drive Mode to work with info on another computer Other ways of managing information Removing information Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld You can do a lot with your handheld on its own enter or look up a contact write a memo keep track of your appointments But you can do much more when you share manage and work with information between your handheld and a computer Your handheld includes a large internal flash drive so that you can carry more of your documents folders photos and music with you View create or work on files on your handheld and then copy the updated version back to your computer Or use your handheld at any computer that supports standard USB removable drives to access and work on your files Benefits e Quickly enter and update information on your handheld and your computer e Transfer and work with applications files and folders on your handheld e Increase productivity by having the files you need wherever you go e Protect your information by quickly backing up and saving files and folders to your computer 74 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know The internal drive saves information on your handheld including information in the program memory even if the battery drains completely none of your information is lost Simply recharge to access the information again Tip To view the complete
301. ing an attachment is downloaded to your handheld during synchronization Send email from Outbox Check the box to synchronize messages in your handheld s Outbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization If the box is unchecked your Outbox is not included when you synchronize messages Synchronize incoming email Check the box to synchronize messages in your handheld s Inbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization The box is checked by default if unchecked your Inbox is not included when you synchronize messages Ny Continued 354 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 amp OPTIONAL You can synchronize email folders This means that any changes you make to a folder on your handheld for example creating a new folder or moving messages between folders are automatically updated in the mail client on your computer and vice versa a Click Folder Synchronization Options b Click the name of the folder you want c Click the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name d Click the arrow to open the drop down list and then click Yes e Click OK Folder Synchronization Options B Server Folder Refresh List Synchronize an Click Save ll on the toolbar to save the settings for this account 4 Done 355 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Account infor
302. ing application information Adjusting the screen display Reducing the Auto off setting Keeping your handheld from turning on accidentally Answers to frequently asked questions about setup CHAPTER 2 Basics In this chapter Locating the controls on your handheld Using the status bar Rotating the screen What s on the screen What software is on my handheld What s on the CD Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Whether you re at work at home or on the go you ll quickly understand why handhelds are also called personal digital assistants PDAs Like a good personal assistant your handheld helps you keep track of your schedule your business and personal contacts and your to do list But more than just helping you get organized your handheld helps you stay productive by letting you carry and access important files folders and documents It also helps you stay connected by offering wireless access to email text messages and the web And when you just want to relax and have fun use your handheld to view digital photos and videos listen to music play games and more Benefits e Carry files and folders on an internal flash drive containing 160MB of storage and work with them on the go e Save time and stay organized e Travel light e Keep your information safe e Stay in touch with wireless connectivity CHAPTER 2 Basics Locating the controls on your handh
303. intment is longer or shorter than an hour set the duration b In the Set Time dialog box select End Time If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your PC you can select a time d Select OK zone when creating a new event Also if you ened 4SM EFIS created appointments in Outlook that include more than one person these persons appear when you synchronize with your handheld You can not edit this information on your New Details Go To handheld c Select the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends g Description Start Time Start time End Time No time zone Duration No Time mOvaowavlaWNES Category marker Hour Minute list list 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the appointment Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Tungsten T5 Handheld 139 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event without a start time Keep track of events that take place on a particular date but not at a particular time For example you may want to enter holidays anniversaries and deadlines Did You Know Need to reserve a date before you know the details of the appointment Schedule an event without a start time Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Open Day View Aug 31 06 MME a Press Calendar Oss b Select the Day View icon a Day View icon Go To Select the date of the event a Select Go To b Select the arrows to s
304. intments tasks and notes you can change your synchronization method so that your handheld synchronizes with Outlook instead You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software NOTE Ifyou choose to synchronize with Outlook info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with Outlook You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize with Outlook Other info such as photos and notes is synchronized with Palm Desktop software Insert the CD into your computer 2 Select Change your synchronization method 3 Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use 4 Done CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Using user profiles IMPORTANT Only IT managers may need to use user profiles for their company If you are not an IT manager you can skip this section Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen handhelds that all have a common company phone list a set of memos and several key applications A user profile can be created to install this information before the handhelds are distributed to employees When the employees synchronize for the first time this common information becomes part of their user specific information A user profile enables you to install the same information onto multiple handhelds before each handheld is individualized with a unique username and user specific information A handheld that has a user profile instal
305. ion If there is no up entry pressing Up scrolls left Likewise if there is no left entry pressing Left scrolls up If there is no down entry pressing Down scrolls right If there is no right entry pressing Right scrolls down On some entry screens pressing Left highlights the leftmost button at the bottom of the screen Inserts or removes the selection highlight If a button is highlighted activates the button Moving around dialog boxes Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional information In dialog boxes use the 5 way to select a button or to make a selection from items such as boxes and pick lists 44 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Up Down Highlights the next item in the dialog box Right or Left pick list box button in the corresponding direction Contact Details Show in List Y Work Center e If highlight is on a box Checks or eae Category Y Unfiled unchecks the box Private O Cancel Date O If highlight is on a pick list Opens the pick list When a pick list is open Button with Box highlight Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or next entry Center Selects the highlighted entry If highlight is on a button Activates the button and then closes the dialog box IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an action or delete information
306. ion Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later Connect to Select the type of device you want to connect to PC Modem or Local Area Network Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the device you selected Bluetooth the Bluetooth radio on your handheld Cradle Cable the USB sync cable that came with your handheld Infrared the IR port on your handheld N NOTE The Dialing and Volume settings won t appear unless you select Modem as the Connect to setting Dialing Select whether your modem uses TouchTone or Rotary dialing Volume Select the volume level for your modem s speaker Off Low Medium or High Ny Continued 547 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 3 Enter the details settings Details P Speed v 57 600b a Select Details ne g Flow Ctl Automatic b Select the Speed pick list and Init String select the appropriate speed vn c Select the Flow Ctl pick list and select whether the connection uses flow control Automatic Your handheld determines when to use flow control On Flow control is always on Off Flow control is always off d For amodem connection enter the initialization string e Select OK 4 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 548 CHAPTER 25 Tip If your phone doesn t appear on the list you need to install the phone settings for your phone onto your handheld Tungsten T5 Handh
307. ip Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again like taking out the To selsctintenale suchas trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of 1 Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 every year see Scheduling a repeating task unusual interval 2 Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 225 CHAPTER 11 MELECI A COTE Ey 3 Set the repeat interval a Select the task description and then select Details b Select the Repeat pick list and select how often the task repeats Daily until Every week Every other week Every month or Every year Task Details i Priority Category v Personal Due Date Fri 1 6 06 Alarm N 1e Repeat very week Private O OR Cones Beee N NOTE If you select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date c Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 226 CHAPTER 11 WIETareve lave Me Colt am Ey Scheduling a repeating task unusual interval For tasks that don t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals you can set up your own repeat intervals For example enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is due every 28 days or changing your smoke detector battery every six months 1 Go to Applications and select Ta
308. ipient or create 3 a new record for the Select OK to add the email address to Contacts and then select OK in the recipient confirmation dialog box 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 362 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating and using filters Tip Filters provide efficient ways to manage email retrieval and storage When you select Get Mail or Create a filter for Get amp Send filters determine which email messages are downloaded to your handheld and in example so that which folder the downloaded messages are stored whenever you receive email about sales meetings it goes immediately into a folder IMPORTANT If you create a filter only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded to your handheld You don t see any other messages that have been sent to you even in your Inbox To avoid this you must set up two filters For example suppose you create a filter to have all messages with onlinebroker in the From field moved to your Finance folder You must then you create called Sales create a second filter specifying that all mail NOT containing onlinebroker in the From field Or create a filter so that should be moved to the Inbox or other folder you designate If you don t create this second filter stock quotes sent to you only messages containing onlinebroker in the From field are downloaded to your handheld by your online brokerage service go to a folder you create ca
309. ips on using RealPlayer open the 1 On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music Options menu and select Help 2 Open the Edit Playlist screen a Tap Playlists b Select New Edit Playlist Name New Title No playlists found Choose New to create a playlist Done Remove Add a 3 Enter a name for the playlist Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 213 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music To quickly select all the songs in the list select Select All To quickly deselect all the songs select Select None Jid You Know The Add Songs to Playlist screen displays all songs located in the Music file on your handheld s internal drive Tungsten T5 Handheld 4 Add songs to the playlist a Select Add b Check the box next to the songs you want to include on the playlist c Select Done Put the songs in the order you want to hear them a Select a song you want to move b Tap the up or down arrow to move the song up or down one slot c Repeat this process until the songs are in the right order d Select Done Add Songs to Playlist M Electric Angel Awakening M Electric Angel Falling Angel M Electric Angel Gather The Women O Electric Angel I Believe M Electric Angel Through The Mist Edit Playlist Name Electric Angel Electric Angel Awakening Electric Angel Gather The Women Electric Angel Through The
310. ipt to b Select Details c Select Script Details Log in Script i Connection type PPP Idle timeout 1 Minute Query DNS c4 IP Address M Automatic 3 Select the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list Wait For Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the server before executing the next command Wait For Prompt Detects a challenge response prompt coming from the server and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value You then enter the challenge value into your token card which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your handheld This is a two part command that is separated by a vertical bar on the input line Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 558 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Cont d Send Transmits specific characters to the server that you re connecting to Send CR Transmits a carriage return or line feed LF character to the server Send User ID Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences If you didn t enter a password this command prompts you to enter one The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command Delay Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before going to the next command in the login script Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld This command is used with
311. irm the password and enter a hint a Enter the password again and then select OK b Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it and then select Done 4 Select Done 4 Done Changing a password You can change your password at any time You must enter the current password before you can change it Tip In Palm Desktop 1 f software you can require Open Security EFTE Pa d amry Tor a Go to Applications Password Password box private info to display f ale Open the Tools menu and i Suisee peeks Pan Quick Unlock a select Options and then Auto Lock select Security c Select Security Private Records v Show Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 473 CHAPTER 22 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private 2 Enter your current password Current Password a Select the Password box b Enter the current password and then select OK 3 Change your password New Password i a Select OK Do you want to create a new password now b Enter a new password and then select OK 4 Confirm the password and enter a hint a Enter the password again and then select OK b Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it and then select Done Y Continued 474 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private 5 Select Done 4 Done Deleting a password You can delete your password at any time You must enter the current password before
312. is chapter When you are finished synchronize to transfer the account settings to your handheld Both wireless and synchronize Windows only If you plan both to send and receive email wirelessly and to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer you must set up the account on your handheld and follow the steps for setting synchronization options on your computer If you do not set up the account in both places synchronizing email does not work IMPORTANT If you plan to synchronize your new handheld with an existing username from another handheld you must do so before you enter your email account information in the VersaMail application If you enter the email account information first and then synchronize your handheld to an existing username the email account information you entered is overwritten Tungsten T5 Handheld 281 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting basic account options Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail amp Open the Account Setup screen Account Setup To setup an account tap New a Open the menus or select an account to edit b Select Accounts and then select Account Setup c Select New Y Continued 282 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages I Term Protocol Settings your 3 email provider uses to receive email messages Most providers use the Post Office Protocol POP a few us
313. ith co 315 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching a personal signature You can attach a personal signature with info like your company s address and fax and telephone numbers to the bottom of all messages you send 1 Open the VersaMail Preferences Preferences i G 1 a From the Inbox or on another eneral Advanced System fold th Get w Subjects Only olaer screen open e Ask Every Time menus M Confirm Deletions O Delete Msgs on Server b Select Options and then M Download Attachments select Preferences Receive Format faii 2 Add a signature Signature 3 M Attach Signature a Select Signature SRA b Check the Attach Signature box c Enter your signature information and then select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 316 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Send retry Did You Know If a send attempt fails for any reason after you select Send for example your handheld is out of range or the application cannot connect to the mail server you can choose to have the application move the message to the Outbox and keep trying to send the message every 30 minutes a maximum of three times Send retry doesn t work for VPN or SSL connections or for accounts for which your If you put a message in the Outbox you must select Send to send the message on the first try The ISP requires you to log in VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only af
314. ive copying moving and so on Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer How can I work with information There are two main methods for moving and managing information between your handheld and a computer These methods are discussed in detail in this chapter Synchronization Synchronization updates and backs up information between your handheld s program memory and your computer Information entered in one place is automatically updated in the other and info in your handheld s program memory is backed up on your computer Use Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook to enter information on your computer in applications such as Calendar Contacts Tasks and Memos The info is transferred to the corresponding handheld application when you synchronize Information entered in these applications on the handheld is likewise synchronized with the application in the desktop software On Windows computers Palm Desktop software includes both palmOne Media which you can use to transfer photos and videos to your handheld and palmOne Quick Install which installs applications PRC or PDB for use on your handheld when you synchronize NOTE On Mac computers use the Send To Handheld droplet to transfer photos and videos and install applications on your handheld when you synchronize When you transfer a file to your handheld through synchronization the file such as a video may
315. ize your handheld with your computer in the following ways e Using the USB sync cable attached to your handheld and your computer e Wirelessly using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Using your handheld s infrared IR port e Connecting to your company s network either wirelessly or using a cable Windows only IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize you must use the USB sync cable or your handheld s IR port If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial setup you ve already covered this requirement To synchronize HotSync Manager must be active HotSync Manager was installed when you installed the software installation CD if you didn t install the CD you don t have HotSync Manager on your computer On a Windows computer you know HotSync Manager is active when its icon G appears in the lower right corner of your screen If the icon is not there turn it on by clicking Start and then selecting Programs Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group and select HotSync Manager 83 CHAPTER 5 lip If you need help with synchronizing see can t synchronize my handheld with my computer View the HotSync log to see what applications were successfully synchronized and whether any problems took place during synchronization Go to Applications on your handheld and select HotSync and then select Log or click the HotSync Manager icon on your comput
316. keep all of the songs you copied from a CD together with the same structure you ve created on your computer 78 CHAPTER 5 Tip You can synchronize your handheld with your computer wirelessly using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Did You Know Everybody in your family can synchronize their handheld with the same copy of Palm Desktop software Just make sure that each handheld has its own username Palm Desktop software reads the username and recognizes the handheld during synchronization Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Synchronizing information Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place your handheld or your computer is automatically updated in the other No need to enter information twice IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize the info in your handheld s program memory frequently so that you always have an up to date backup copy of this info on your computer Entering information using desktop software Use Palm Desktop or Outlook to enter information on your computer When you synchronize the information is updated on your handheld If you use the default settings information from all the following applications is transferred each time you synchronize your handheld with your computer amp 2aBaSaG 8h B84 2 Calendar Contacts Documents Expense Media Memos Note Pad Tasks
317. l Waiting can cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected Contact your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or dial in server check the Use calling box to select it Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line IMPORTANT Because MCI works differently enter the MCI calling card number in the Phone field and the phone number in the Use calling card field Select Done 4 Done 552 CHAPTER 25 Tip To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages press Down on the 5 way To see more information open the Options menu and select View Log Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Connecting to your service After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences establishing a connection to your ISP or your company s network dial in server is easy 1 Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Network Make the connection a Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field If not select it b Select Connect End the connection when you ve finished using it a Select Disconnect b Select Done 4 Done 553 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Adding details to a service profile If you re using one of the predefined
318. l from Outbox option 354 Send Password command 559 send retry failures 317 318 Send to Handheld dialog box 97 207 Send To Handheld droplet 29 97 Send To palmOne Quick Install command 95 Send User ID command 559 sending e mail 263 308 311 312 415 multimedia messages 255 text messages 255 387 388 servers 425 service defined 264 Service Connection Progress messages 553 Service pick list 264 551 554 Tungsten T5 Handheld service profiles deleting 556 selecting 553 setting up 550 551 554 service templates 550 services 264 544 558 Set Alarm dialog box 224 249 Set as default check box 91 Set Country dialog box 530 Set Date amp Time button 502 Set Date dialog box 502 528 Set the default connection type option 299 Set Time dialog box 139 503 528 setting alarms 153 224 249 508 setting cache size 423 424 setting up e mail accounts 278 setting up handhelds 1 6 7 17 setting up wireless connections 254 settings See preferences setup 585 Setup Devices option 258 265 267 269 sharing files 255 information 20 119 237 437 448 577 photos 94 200 videos 200 sharing FAQs 610 Short header option 380 Short Message Service SMS 388 short messages 387 ShortCut strokes Graffiti 2 writing backing up 535 changing 537 deleting 537 described 64 65 setting up 535 ShortCut Text line 536 shortcuts xxii 25 47 71 524 ShortCuts Preferences screen 535 537 Show History command 464 Show Multiple Location
319. l on your handheld ta an appears on the Notify a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus Sound pick list b Select Options and then select Notification You can follow these c Check the Notify me of new mail box steps to change the notification sound at any time 2 age iai i Select notification options Notification fi Tin Si he Naiva dnici M Notify me of new mail a Select the Notify Sound pick list z M Notify me of Auto Get You can also adjust the ust the and then select a sound The and Send failures volume of the notification handheld plays a brief Notify Sound None sound demo of the sound b To receive notifications of successful auto get mail and automatic send retries only uncheck the Notify me of Auto Get and Send failures box Leave the box checked if you want to receive notifications of both successful and failed auto get mail and automatic send retries c Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 303 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Viewing and using the Reminders screen The Reminders screen on your handheld shows info about new email messages It also shows alerts from other applications such as Calendar appointments To view the Reminders screen tap the blinking asterisk when it appears in the upper left corner of any screen If you set up a scheduled auto get mail and you receive new email messages they are downloaded into the Inbox If you are working with
320. lbum containing the photo or video you want Tip You can also delete a b Select the photo or video photo or video from the Media Details screen by selecting Delete on that 3 Delete the photo or video screen a Open the menus b Select Delete from the Media menu and then select Delete again 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 199 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Sharing photos and videos oe Did You Know You can easily share photos and videos with family and friends Use your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology to wirelessly send photos and videos to other Bluetooth devices within range You can also easily send photos and videos from the palmOne Media desktop application You can also share photos and videos using any of the following methods Windows only See e Attach a photo or video to an email message Palm Desktop Help for information e Beam a photo or video to other Palm Powered devices Tip e Copy a photo or video from your handheld to your desktop computer or from computer to You can also beam or handheld by synchronizing send an entire album by opening the Album menu N NOTE Sending a large number of photos or videos using Bluetooth technology or beaming and selecting Beam can take a long time Album or Send Album Tungsten T5 Handheld 200 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Working with palmOne Media on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use palmOne Media o
321. lect a category and then Expanse avorites select Done Files 4 Done 496 CHAPTER 23 Tip In Applications view scroll through the categories by pressing Right or Left on the 5 way navigator To view all of the applications on your handheld select the All category Tip Scroll through the categories in Contacts by repeatedly pressing the Contacts button Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 Using Categories to Organize Information Viewing information by category e To view entries by category open an application that contains categories e To view applications by category go to Applications Display the category you want to view Calendar Select Show Category List and then select the category you want to view from the pick list All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list in the upper right corner Tasks All Date KEIO w Personal Pick list Business 1 Quarterly profits 2 Marketing strategy 3 Sales meeting minutes 4 Conference info ee Be Calc Expense 4 Done 497 CHAPTER 23 Using Categories to Organize Information Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus mytungstents Calendar Color
322. lect any other file system type your handheld cannot recognize the information on the internal drive or the card Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 1 Turn on Drive Mode RE Drive Mode is Off a Go to Applications and select Drive Mode allows you to connect Drive Mode g your palmOne device as a USB b Select Turn Drive Mode On Turn Drive Mode On 2 Prepare your handheld and your computer a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of the computer and then insert the other end into your handheld b Connect the AC charger cable to the USB sync cable and then plug it into a power outlet Y Continued 104 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Did You Know You can work with files 3 and folders on y ur Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on a Windows computer or Finder on a Mac computer Look for the icon representing your handheld in the list of handheld in Drive Mode available drives on the computer On a Windows computer an icon appears for in exactly the same way an expansion card also On a Mac computer an expansion card icon appears that you work with any only if a card is inserted in your handheld s expansion slot other file or folder in My Computer Windows Ry NOTE Ona Windows computer if there is no card inserted in your Explorer or Finder handheld s expansion slot and y
323. led can be given to anyone because the handheld is not yet identified by a unique username When the new user synchronizes for the first time he or she gives the handheld a unique username NOTE Handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new ones that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their usernames and information removed by a hard reset Tungsten T5 Handheld 11 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Creating a user profile WINDOWS ONLY Did You Know Save time by importing to 1 quickly add information to a profile Open the New Profile screen a Open Palm Desktop software b From the Tools menu select Users c Click Profiles and then click New Proies Q Select a profile ewp E Enter a new profile name gt Doo o 2 Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK twice Select the profile from the User list and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile 4 Done i User Tech Support profile lice N 2 8 JEdit Users Tungsten T5 Handheld 12 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Open the New Profile screen a Open Palm Desktop software b From the User pop up menu select Edit Users c Click New Profile e008 Users s aj 2 2 AT Kind lal amp Christopher Tracy
324. left of the account you want b Under the account name click Advanced Sync Options c Enter the synchronization options you want Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 352 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Help Joe Sadusky Ba H KIES g VersaMail H Speakeasy Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options Speakeasy Handheld Settings E Work Email VersaMail Attachment Conversion feo Maximum message size KB Specifies the maximum message size to download during a HotSync operation Mail that is larger than this size will be truncated on your Palm handheld fe Days To Synchronize Mail Synchronize mail that has been on the server for the specified number of days or less with your Palm handheld J Synchronize unread mail only Download attachments during HotSync IV Send mail that is in the Outbox on your Palm handheld during the HotSync operation 1 Synchronize all Inbox mail on your Palm handheld with mail in the Inbox of your desktop mail application or mail server Fold sforization Options Business Account Security Settings IT Enable Key Expiration Expire security key every p days a Available Accounts 3 Configured Accounts 1 Active Accounts 0 Maximum message size KB Enter the maximum message size that can be synchronized from your computer to your handheld from 1 to 5000KB 5MB The smaller
325. licating contact information 121 125 duration 139 E e mail See also e mail accounts accessing 255 260 263 278 304 adding addresses to contacts 362 adding attachments to 340 341 adding signatures 289 316 addressing 122 313 314 315 378 536 attaching events to 136 173 attaching memos to 243 449 attaching notes to 253 attaching photos to 202 attaching tasks to 236 automatically checking for 297 automatically emptying trash 378 changing fonts 310 320 changing header information for 380 changing Inbox folders for 319 changing maximum size 298 changing messages 318 composing 308 312 415 connecting to Internet from 410 creating folders for 324 deleting 286 328 329 331 downloading 286 297 298 381 downloading attachments 335 336 339 emptying Trash folder for 331 332 378 filtering 300 363 365 367 forwarding 326 logging in to accounts for 415 manually marking 333 moving messages 322 reading 307 reading files attached to 340 413 receiving 263 297 298 related topics for 386 replying to 327 sending 263 308 311 312 415 setting display options 320 setting maximum size 287 353 setting notification options for 303 317 setting preferences for 360 setting retry intervals for 317 setting up 278 281 285 344 551 specifying default programs for 351 switching to different service for 293 294 synchronizing 344 345 347 349 352 tapping URLs in 328 viewing status of 306 viewing unread messages for 15
326. lick Change corner of your screen select Custom and then Y Continued select one of the Outlook applications from the list Select Change and then select one of the applications from the list Tungsten T5 Handheld 89 CHAPTER 5 Tip You should generally keep the default setting Synchronize the files for all applications Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization HotSync Action for Memos ox a Synchonize the files cmc e Help Q a C Desktop overwrites handheld I Set as default BS C Handheld avermites Desktop ia g C Do nothing Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place your handheld or computer is updated in the other during synchronization Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization If information has been changed on your handheld it will be replaced by the information from your computer and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization If in
327. life of your handheld s battery Benefits of customizing e Access applications quickly e Conserve power e Enjoy your handheld more e Make your screen easy to read 512 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Customizing your Favorites View You can personalize your Favorites View by changing the background image to your favorite photo You can also change the entries to those you use most often Changing the background photo in Favorites View Use your favorite photo as the background in Favorites View 1 Go to Favorites 2 Open the Display Options dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Display Options 3 Select a photo for the background Display Options M Background a Check the Background box b Select the picture box c Select a picture Fade j d Select Done Y Continued 513 CHAPTER 25 Did You Know You can quickly change multiple favorites on a page by selecting Menu on the status bar and then selecting Edit Favorite Pages Select the page you want and then select each favorite you want to change to open the Edit Favorites dialog box Tip You can also tap and hold on the favorite you want to change Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld 4 Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo and select OK 4 Done Changing entries in Favorites Cha
328. lining e Colored words e Bullet lists e Numbered lists e Line breaks For certain types of graphics for example JPEG or GIF files the graphic may be displayed as a URL in the body of the email message In some cases you can select the URL to open the graphic Messages sent as plain text are displayed as plain text only and any text stripped of its HTML formatting is displayed as plain text as well You can set the application to receive all messages as plain text only regardless of the format in which they were sent If you choose this option only the text of any messages sent in HTML format is displayed NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only with all HTML tags stripped even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML Tungsten T5 Handheld 308 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 1 Open VersaMail Preferences a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences 2 Select message format Preferences i l l General Advanced System a Select the Receive Format pick oon Get w Subjects Only list and then select HTML or IM Ask Every Time Plain Text The default is Confirm Deletions HTML O Delete Msgs on Server M Download Attachments b Select OK Receive Format MIUI J Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 309 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Customizing the font of messages you
329. list Enter things you need to do prioritize them set alarms and then monitor your deadlines Capture information such as meeting notes lists of books to read movies to see recipes and anything else you need to write down Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch Preview try and buy software for your handheld Windows only and web access required Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips Learn about your handheld and how to enter information View information about your handheld s internal drive and about an expansion card seated in the expansion card slot Dial phone numbers directly from your handheld Track business or travel expenses and print expense reports after you synchronize your handheld with your computer Synchronize info on your handheld with the info on your computer Customize your handheld s sound levels colors security and more Set the time in your home city and two other locations and set an alarm to wake you up Connect your handheld as a removable USB drive on a Mac computer or when you are at a Windows computer that does not have the Tungsten T5 software installation CD installed Open files stored on your handheld on the computer and move copy and manage files between your handheld and the computer 27 CHAPTER 2 Basics Tip To learn how to install the desktop software from the CD see Step 3 Installing your
330. list of Palm OS applications on your handheld go to Applications and select HotSync Open the Options menu and select Conduit Setup All of the applications listed on the Conduit Setup screen are Palm OS applications located in your handheld s program memory Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Program memory and the internal drive Your handheld contains two types of storage program memory and the internal flash drive Program memory Your handheld includes 55MB of program memory for Palm OS applications such as Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos Information in the program memory is updated during synchronization For example if you enter contact information on your computer you can synchronize to update the info in Contacts on your handheld and any future updates to the info are included in synchronization The info for each Palm OS application for example individual contact entries may be stored in your handheld s program memory or it may be stored on your handheld s internal flash drive You can view and work with this information from within the application itself You cannot however view any info stored in program memory directly using Files or palmOne File Transfer Internal flash drive The 160MB internal drive works similarly to other standard USB removable drives You can store any type of file folder or application on this drive on your ha
331. lled Finance 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Open the Filters dialog box a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Filters c Select New Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 363 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Filters you create on your handheld also apply when you synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Enter the filter information Filter Editor iy a Enter a short description of the lf the v From filter in the Name field Contains onlinebroker b Enter filter criteria Then get mail and move to Finance To pick list Select the message header field with the information an Cancel Delet contained in the edit line To From Subject cc Size For example you might select From to download only messages from a particular sender Contains pick list Select a filter action Contains Starts with Does NOT Contain Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field For example if you want to sort email with the subject Sales enter Sales If you enter more than one criteria separate each with a comma for example Sales New York Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your filtered email to go You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming email Select Edit
332. lly one after another You can easily see a full screen view of a photo or play a video by selecting the photo or video from the Thumbnail or List View You can also rotate the orientation of the photo zoom in to view a magnified portion of a photo and view or edit detailed information about a photo or video Viewing a photo or video in the Thumbnail View 1 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 180 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the location on your handheld or an expansion card of the photo or video you want to view e If the photo or video is in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card select the correct location from the list e If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your handheld s internal drive select Find More and browse to the item Ny Continued 181 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Tip Can t remember what 3 If the Thumbnail View is not displayed select Thumbnails in the lower left album your photo or corner of the screen video is in Select All from the pick list leone Tip Quickly switch between thumbnails of photos on your handheld and photos on an expansion card by selecting the icons in the upper right corner of the screen The icons appear only if there Select a photo or
333. loads into Documents To Go Card If you have an expansion card installed the file downloads onto the card If you don t have an expansion card installed the file is downloaded into the default folder for that file type on the handheld s internal drive If that file type does not have a default folder it downloads into a folder called Blazer Downloads Select Save and then select OK 4 Done 412 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Saving a web page If you want to save a web page such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt indefinitely you can create a saved page The copy is stored on the handheld until you delete it Did You Know Saved pages are listed with the bookmarks in the Bookmark List The saved Go to Favorites and select Web amp pages have an orange corner 2 Go to the web page you want to save Did You Know oe Wen bromsar also 3 Go to the Save Page dialog box functions as a viewer enabling you to quickly view certain files while working in other b Select Page and then select Save Page applications For example if you read an email message that has a 4 file attached in HTML format select the file and the web browser opens so that you can view the file b Select Save Tip Done Saving a web page on your handheld allows you to view a web page without being online a Open the menus Save the web page New Saved Page Bookmark Save this page for offline
334. locked you can now unlock it by using the Quick Unlock combination or by entering your password Tungsten T5 Handheld 482 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting your Quick Unlock combination 1 Open Security Preferences a Go to Applications Password Quick Unlock Fe Quick Unlock box b Select Prefs Pay Auto Lock J c Select Security Private Records Show 2 Open the Quick Unlock dialog box a Select the Quick Unlock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK 3 Delete the Quick Unlock combination New Password i Do you want to create a new password now a Select Unassign b Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 483 CHAPTER 22 Before You Begin To use encryption you must first create a password for your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Encrypting your information You can encrypt selected information whenever your handheld locks This means that your information is scrambled so that it cannot be read When you unlock your handheld and enter your password or Quick Unlock combination the encrypted information is unscrambled The more information you select for encryption the longer your handheld takes to scramble and unscramble the information Also applications that use large files such as palmOne Media take a long time to encrypt In these cases consider the trade
335. lt is 3 seconds Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE e If the photos or videos are in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s Did You Know internal drive or on an expansion card select the correct location from the list In a slide show videos play through in their entirety before the next item appears e If the photos or videos are located elsewhere on your handheld s internal drive select Find More and browse to them Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 186 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos 3 In the Thumbnail or List View select Slide Show Slide Show 4 Press Center or tap a photo or video to stop the slide show and return to the Thumbnail or List View 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 187 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos lip You can also rotate a photo by pressing Down on the 5 way to zoom the photo out and then selecting Rotate at the bottom of the screen Tip If you receive a message that the photo is too large to rotate on your handheld synchronize and then open and rotate the photo in Palm Desktop software Synchronize again to send the rotated photo back to your handheld Windows only Tungsten T5 Handheld Rotating a photo 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the location on your handheld or an expansion card of the photo you want to rotate e If
336. ludes info about the following topics new Word file in Documents on your handheld Edit the text in Documents save it as a e Viewing copying and deleting memos e Editing memo details Microsoft Word file and e Marking memos private then send the file to your computer by e Showing masking and hiding private memos synchronizing so you can view and edit it in Word Printing memos Changing between the list and single memo views Adding a date and time stamp to a memo Organizing memos into categories e Sorting memos e Sharing memos WINDOWS ONLY To open Memos on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Memos on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Memos on your computer launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder and then select Memos Tungsten T5 Handheld 242 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with Memos or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around Entering Information Categories Privacy Sharing VersaMail SMS Common_ Questions e Opening applications e Using menus Adding a phone number or other contac
337. m Desktop software Change or Remove Programs a Click Change or Remove Bb Add or Remove Programs Programs 5i Currently installed programs Sort by Name E Tes 0330934 b Select Palm Desktop software FProgams and then click Remove amp Add New Programs c Click Yes in the Confirm File Ta Deletion box Add Remove Windows Components d Click OK and then click Close 4 Done 115 CHAPTER 5 My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with moving and managing information or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Setting Up Moving Around RealPlayer VersaMail Common Questions Switching between Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook e Opening applications e Using menus e Transferring files from a CD to your handheld or to an expansion card e Listening to audio files on your handheld Synchronizing email messages on your handheld with email messages on your computer Answers to frequently asked questions about moving and managing information between your handheld and your computer 116 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Cont
338. mail client to use for synchronization based on the type of account mail client or Ti P connection you use Use the following criteria to determine which client to select If you select Direct IMAP for Lotus Notes synchronization you must be connected to the Internet during N NOTE The mail client you select in the pick list may not be the one you use on your computer For example depending on your account you might use Microsoft Outlook as the mail client on your computer but need to select Microsoft Exchange or Direct IMAP from the list synchronization Microsoft Exchange account on your handheld with Microsoft Outlook on your computer If you otherwise it will fail If plan only to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer select Microsoft you will not be connected Exchange in the Mail Client pick list Otherwise select Direct IMAP to the Internet during synchronization select If the Mail Profile field displays only one profile do nothing If the field displays a pick list click the POP from the Protocol list and select your Exchange server profile pick list and select Lotus Notes from the Mail Client pick list to synchronize with the local Tap the Mail Password box and enter your Outlook password This might be your Windows login password or a different password Any account other than a Microsoft Exchange account on your handheld with Microsoft Outlook copy of Lotus Notes on or Outlook Express
339. mail messages 308 information specific 529 multimedia file types 179 Formats Preferences screen 529 formatting expansion cards 576 forwarding e mail 326 freehand drawing 196 244 freeing up space 109 113 158 589 frequently asked questions 585 Tungsten T5 Handheld front panel controls 19 frozen screen 579 588 Full header option 380 full screen pen stroke 524 Full screen Writing description 52 status bar button 53 full screen writing 245 532 icon on status bar 22 G Game Sound pick list 539 games 494 539 568 General Packet Radio Service GPRS 261 gestures Graffiti 2 writing 61 Get IP command 559 Get Mail Options dialog box 298 Get unread e mail only option 299 Get unread mail option 286 getting started xx xxi 6 29 Getting Started Guide 29 GIF files 335 414 Go To Date dialog box 138 140 Go to Web Page dialog box 398 Go to Web Page icon 398 going online 255 GPRS data services 258 410 GPRS mobile phones 261 269 544 Graffiti 2 Full screen Writing 52 input areas 51 Graffiti 2 command strokes 47 Graffiti 2 Preferences screen 534 Graffiti 2 writing changing strokes for 537 copying and pasting with 71 creating tasks with 223 deleting information with 72 deleting ShortCuts 537 entering commands with 61 entering information with 51 54 63 entering ShortCut strokes 64 65 535 getting help with 60 guidelines for 55 overview 51 setting alternate stroke shapes for 534 setting preferences for
340. mation screens Two screens in the VersaMail conduit provide summary information on your accounts Account Overview The Account Overview screen indicates whether the account is active whether the account has been synchronized and if so the last synchronization date the mail client for this account and whether the mail client and or the incoming mail server has been changed since the last synchronization To view the Account Overview screen click the selected account name oe sadusty gt Ejes VersaMail A Mail Client Sync Setup Account Overview Speakeasy Advanced Sync Options Handheld Settings Work Email El VersaMail The account is active Yes Attachment Conversion This account has been synchronized Yes This account was last synchronized Wednesday February 04 2004 This account is using the desktop mail client Direct POP connection to server The desktop mail client for this account has changed No since the last HotSync operation The incoming mail server for this account was No changed on the Windows desktop since the last HotSync operation A call Available Accounts 3 Configured Accounts 1 Active Accounts 1 Handheld Settings Overview The Handheld Settings Overview screen lists the server protocol display name email address incoming and outgoing mail server addresses and whether APOP or ESMTP authentication is required Tungsten T5 Handheld 356
341. message included with your reply M Include Original Text O Prefix with gt Select OK Enter a reply Select Send to send the reply now Outbox to send it later or Drafts to work on it later 4 Done 327 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with URLs Did You Know You can tap a URL in a received message to view the web page or file associated with the URL Emiail addresses appear Tapping the URL opens your handheld s web browser to view the page or file in the form username You can also tap an embedded email address to open a new message screen with the address in mailservice com or the To field other three letter extension such as net Depending on whether the received message is displayed in HTML or plain text format URLs and org and so on email addresses appear in slightly different forms as follows HTML URLs and email addresses appear as blue underlined text Plain text Most URLs begin with http or www Simply tap to view these types of URLs To view a page or file associated with a URL that does not begin with http or www select the URL copy it and paste it into the address bar in the web browser Deleting a message You can delete email messages from any folder For example you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder When you delete a message it is placed in the Trash fol
342. mo on 2 Action Items 11 5 2 Action Items 11 5 3 Quote of the Day 3 Quote of the Da your computer click Send 4 Birthday Wish List 5 Edits for Draft 2 C 5 Birthday Wish List ee we m E Eats for Drane 2 application to which you A want to send the memo b Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving c When the line is in the location you want for your memo lift the stylus 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 240 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Deleting a memo Tip Need to retrieve that holiday recipe you stored If you save an archive copy of your deleted memos you can refer to them later by importing them Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Applications and select Memos 6 Open the Delete Memo dialog DENES O box Delete current memo a Locate the memo you want M Save archive copy on PC b Open the menus c Select Delete Memo on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the memo on your computer Select OK 4 Done 241 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Working with Memos on your computer Tip Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your handheld You can copy the text of a Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your memo and paste it into a computer The online Help inc
343. most recently used number 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the most recently used number a Select Dial to display the most recently used number The most recently dialed number is displayed Select Dial b Select Dial again to dial the number 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 431 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Dialing a number from the Call History List Did You Know Dialer keeps a list of 11 of the most recently dialed numbers Did You Know If the number is a speed dial entry the name from the speed dial entry appears in the Call History list Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Dial the number from the list a Select History b Select an entry from the History list Call History 19995555555 1 20 04 5 24 pm Wayne s Pizza 1 20 04 5 23 pm Select entry to enter number on Dialer screen Arthur 1 20 04 5 23 pm Brad 1 20 04 5 22 pm c Select Dial 4 Done 432 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Using speed dial Speed dial allows you to store ten of your most commonly used numbers and to dial one with a Tungsten T5 Handheld single tap Adding a speed dial entry 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Add a speed dial entry a Select Speed b Select an empty speed dial button Cc Speed Dial Select empty speed dial button Edit Entry
344. n PC Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the task on your computer Select OK 4 Done 231 CHAPTER 11 MELECI A COTE Ey Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old tasks for tax purposes If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks you can refer to them later by importing them Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting all your completed tasks 1 2 Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 Open the Purge dialog box Delete all tasks a Open the menus marked completed M Save archive copy on PC b Select Purge on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of your completed tasks on your computer Select OK 4 Done 232 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve CAOT Ey Customizing your Tasks list Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted These settings also affect Did You Know tasks in Calendar s Agenda View You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks Calendar s Agenda View also displays your tasks Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 2 Open the Preferences dialog box Preterencae 7 Sort by Due Date Priority a Open the menus M Show Completed Tasks M Record Completion Date b Select Options and then M Show Due Dates select Preferences W Show Priorities O Show Categories Alarm Sound v Alarm Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 233 CHAPTER 11 WIETar
345. n it Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Finding information You can use Find to locate any word or phrase in any application either as part of a file name or within a file in your handheld s program memory Find also locates words that begin a file name only not within a file on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case sensitive For example searching for plane finds planet but not airplane Searching for bell also finds Bell Tap Find on the status bar 2 Enter the text that you want to find and then select OK Matches for palmOne Memos Download Applications Extend Your Handheld Coverage Contacts Accessories www palmone comM g Technical Su www palmone com M Calendar Tasks Don t forget to register 3 Select the text that you want to review 4 Done 48 CHAPTER 3 My Handheld Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 Support If you re having problems with your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Basics Entering Information Sharing Privac
346. n midnight of the date of the event The Alarm Preset settings appear as defaults for each new event but you can change these settings in the Details dialog box for individual events If you don t want to use alarms for most of your events don t check this box Alarm Sound Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off Remind Me Select how many times the alarm sounds after the first time it goes off Once Twice 3 Times 5 Times and 10 Times Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds Minute 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes 5 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 171 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Working with Calendar on your computer Did You Know Use Calendar on your computer to view and manage your schedule Check out the online Help in Mac Check o t th Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Calendar on your computer The online Help includes Holiday Files folder inthe info about the following topics Palm folder It contains i e Scheduling events various holidays that you can import into e Rescheduling events Palm Desktop software on your computer e Setting alarms e Deleting events e Marking events as private and hiding them e Printing your schedule e Working with Day View Week View Month View and Year View WINDOWS ONLY To open Calendar on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Calendar on the launch bar MAC ON
347. n the display part of the screen turn full screen writing on e Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side strokes for capital letters in the middle and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area e Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode e Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in Punctuation Shift mode Tungsten T5 Handheld 591 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions The info entered does not appear in an application e Check the Categories pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View Select All to display all the records for the application e Did you set private records to be hidden Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records e Open the Options menu and select Preferences Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected don t know how to save the info I entered in an application Each time you complete an entry such as a contact memo or note your handheld automatically saves the information you entered You don t have to do anything special to save your info To protect your info and create a backup of your info synchronize the information in your handheld s program memory with your computer and back up the contents of your handheld s internal drive to your computer often Tungsten T5 Handheld 592 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Synchronizing can t synchronize my handheld with my computer
348. n your computer to view and manage photos and videos Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Media on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the Media window e Using Photo Editor to view crop rotate or enhance a photo e Using Video Editor to create or trim a video clip Editing photo and video details and titles e Adding notes to a photo or video Printing photos Rotating videos larger than 320 pixels wide Switching between the Thumbnail List and Details views Creating slide shows of photos and videos Sorting photos and videos Organizing your photos and videos into albums To open Media on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Media on the launch bar Ry NOTE There is no palmOne Media desktop application on Mac computers Tungsten T5 Handheld 201 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com mytungstents Sharing e Beaming photos and videos to other Palm Powered devices Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus e Sending photos and videos to other Bluetooth wireless devices using the Support Bluetooth technology on your handheld If you re having problems with p
349. nd e Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 249 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Viewing and editing a note Tip Sort the Note Pad list 1 alphabetically by date or manually Open the Options menu select Preferences and then 2 select the Sort by pick list Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Open the note if y t sort manually you a Select Done to display the Note Pad list can rearrange the list by dragging notes to another position in the list 1 Welcome to Note Pad 7 2 2 Groceries 7 5 3 Bob 7 5 4 Flowers 7 5 5 Bank 7 5 b Select the note you want to view or edit 3 Read or edit the note and then select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 250 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Deleting a note Tip You can also delete a note 1 by opening the Record menu and selecting Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Delete Note 2 Open the note Tip Want to get rid of those a Select Done to display the Note Pad list deletion confirmation messages Open the b Select the note you want to delete Options menu select Preferences and then 1 Welcome to Note Pad 7 2 i 2 Groceries 7 5 uncheck the Confirm note a i ar delete box 4 Flowers 7 5 5 Bank 7 5 3 Select Delete and then select OK to confirm deletion 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 251 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Working with Note Pad on your computer U
350. nd Receiving Email Messages Tip Selecting Both and then OK also processes any other pending actions on the server such as deleting messages not yet deleted Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 For IMAP accounts only select one Mark Read of the following Would you like to mark the selected messages To mark the messages as read or redd on both the handheld and server or unread on your handheld only on just the handheld Select Handheld To mark the messages on both your handheld and the server and have the messages marked on the server immediately Select Both and then select OK on the confirmation screen To mark the messages on both the handheld and the server and have the messages marked on the server the next time you synchronize or connect to the server Select Both and then select Cancel on the confirmation screen N NOTE If you set up an IMAP account as synchronize only this screen does not appear 4 Done 334 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with attachments Tip You can easily download view and send attachments with email messages You can also save downloaded files to an Downloading an attachment to your handheld expansion card Email may contain attached files such as Microsoft Word or text files that you want to view or install on your handheld When you receive a message that has an attachment the VersaMail Tip application scans your handheld to see if you
351. ndheld View and access the contents of the internal drive using the Files application on your handheld or view the contents using File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac on your computer You can manage items on the internal drive in various ways copying moving deleting renaming and so on using File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac or Files on your handheld You can also use File Transfer to save the contents of the internal drive to your Windows computer Another method of storage that you may already be familiar with is an expansion card You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your handheld and manage your files on a card using File Transfer or Drive Mode You can also access the files on the internal drive or on an expansion card by opening the corresponding application and browsing to the file 75 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know Keeping files in their native format is useful On your handheld you can work with many of these native files such as Word Excel PowerPoint and JPG files You can also use File Transfer or Drive Mode to carry native files even files that you cannot open on your handheld to work with on a different computer Tip If you have an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion slot you can view and work with files and folders on the card in the File Transfer window in exactly the same way as files on the internal dr
352. ndheld overwrites Macintosh reason for sending GS O Do Nothing updates only one way Default setting Synchronize the files Choose Do Nothing if you CMake Defaut Carce GORD never use an application Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place your handheld or computer is updated in the other during synchronization Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization If information has been changed on your handheld it will be replaced by the information from your computer and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization If information has been changed on your computer it will be replaced by the information from your handheld and you will lose the changes you made on your computer Do Nothing No synchronization occurs so any changes made on either your handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 92 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know Most handheld application files have the extension PRC or PDB Tip Use Quick Install as an alternate method for installing photos and videos to your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 To use the option you select on an ongoing basi
353. ndheld to your computer cceceeesseeeeeeenees 8 Switching to another desktop software application ccccceeesseeeeeeees 10 Using user profila Seorsa enee OE dase 11 Creating a user profile ccc ecceceesceeeessseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeseeesseeeneeess 12 Synchronizing with a user profile ccceeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeees 14 Related TOPICS ss isenana iaa uted i E aa aai ea iE 17 Chapter 2 Basics cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeesaaaaaeeeened 18 Locating the controls on your handheld sssssssssssssssssssssssrsrrirrsrnsressssrsens 19 Front panel ControlScan anaie anaa aai 19 Top and side panel COMtIOIS ws cisciisccocaiyitseccenndacedsngesinsesanaeanceesecencimneey 20 Back panel COmtrolSsssiiin nei aaia Eana aaa 21 Using the status bar edgen iaa a aea a aai aaa esa 22 Rotating the SCr n ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeee ea caaaaaeaaeaeseseeeesneeeenneaae 23 What s on the SCEN wicicictes ccesseeescnebsseds itigaseoes sennbsnens sdeansabessvitnzsuas ivndawsasbes 24 Input AOS cseng aaie vases tieungaaees dees dos feantadcsndsenctnteagioat tas Tae 24 Tungsten T5 Handheld iii AppliGatloniCOMtrOlS sissies ina aa a aadi a 25 What software is on my handheld ccseceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeseeenaas 26 Whats on the CD eneriiieniesseiesnn israr ns En eeN EEEa 28 Related TOPICS rsrsr imino Eoee a i ra aa 31 Chapter 3 Moving Around in Applications
354. ndheld with your computer and more visit Expansion Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed www palmOne com from another handheld mytungstent5 Connecting Setting up a connection with a phone to share information wirelessly Support VersaMail Sending information as an attachment to an email message if yare having problems SMS Sending information as part of a text message with sharing information or with anything else on your Common Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information handheld go to Questions www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 449 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses In this chapter Adding an expense Choosing currency options Deleting expenses Customizing the expense list Working with Expense on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Tired of trying to re create your business trip when you return Expense makes it easy to keep track of what you paid for that dinner in New York with your new sales group You can track costs for meals lodging transportation entertainment and more and save all of the information in one convenient place You can even transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer Benefits of Expense e Monitor your business and personal expenses e Easily retrieve expense information e Create expense reports faster 450 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your
355. nefits of 117 categorizing information in 491 494 creating business cards 124 customizing fields in 123 displaying additional fields for 121 duplicating information 125 importing information for 107 136 marking entries as private 469 opening 26 118 related topics for 136 saving information in 120 127 searching from 126 selecting field types for 122 setting display options for 129 628 transferring information from 68 troubleshooting 136 viewing online help for 135 Contacts icon 26 Contacts list 128 continuous events See repeating events controls activating 533 application 25 33 handheld 19 locating 49 navigator 41 cookies 422 Copy command 71 575 Copy dialog box 575 Copy icon 47 copy protected applications 575 copying applications 95 97 448 575 calculations 464 contacts 119 121 125 information 71 photos 198 200 448 service profiles 551 videos 200 448 copying and pasting 71 corporate e mail accounts 277 279 280 country information 530 CPUs connecting to 8 255 267 copying information to 448 customizing connections for 547 Drive Mode and 103 106 File Transfer and 99 102 managing schedules from 172 Tungsten T5 Handheld overwriting information on 90 92 preinstalled software for 28 removing Palm Desktop software 114 synchronization options for 85 87 synchronizing with 79 83 265 598 troubleshooting File Transfer problems 599 troubleshooting synchronization problems 593 updati
356. new restaurant to your Contacts list you need to get that information into your handheld There are several ways to do this You may find that you prefer one method if you re entering a small amount of information while another works best for large amounts Choose the one that fits your situation Benefits e Quickly enter important information e Choose the method that works best for your situation 50 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld How can enter information on my handheld Graffiti 2 writing e The onscreen keyboard e Phone Lookup e Note Pad e Visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 and click the Accessories link to get an accessory keyboard sold separately The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing and the onscreen keyboard NOTE You can also enter information on your computer and move and manage the information between your handheld and your computer Or you can send and receive information from other devices using beaming or your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing You can enter info directly on your handheld with Graffiti 2 writing Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard Entering these characters on your handheld is very similar to the way you naturally write letters numbers and symbols But instead of using a pen and paper you use the stylus and the input a
357. ng 502 528 monthly events 142 monthly schedules 164 monthly tasks 226 228 More button 339 moving around dialog boxes 44 moving files into internal flash drive 99 106 moving photos 193 moving the slider 25 moving through documentation xx moving through screens 41 moving through web sites 402 405 moving web pages 404 MP3 files 204 207 transferring to handheld 78 MPA files 107 Multi connector 21 multi day events 145 multi line descriptions 138 multimedia applications 494 multimedia file types 179 multimedia files 343 multimedia messages sending 255 MultiMediaCard expansion cards 568 multiple recipients e mail 313 music changing playlists for 216 creating playlists for 213 214 creating song lists for 209 deleting playlists for 218 listening to 20 203 204 568 playing 203 212 215 603 related topics for 221 removing from playlists 217 selecting 212 214 stopping 212 storing 568 viewing details 219 Music application 212 music application 203 music files transferring to handheld 78 N names See usernames contacts naming connections 547 e mail accounts 283 expansion cards 574 handhelds 257 540 mail folders 325 photo albums 192 playlists 213 user profiles 12 13 navigating through documentation xx 640 navigating through web sites 402 405 navigational controls 25 navigator 19 25 41 45 navigator controls 41 negative numbers 463 Network Preferences screen 550 553 554 556 557 network servi
358. ng for e mail 297 checking space on handheld 111 checking the battery 274 587 Choose Date command 223 Choose File dialog box 416 choosing alarm sounds 509 Tungsten T5 Handheld alternate stroke shapes 534 background colors 246 521 clock display options 510 command buttons 25 communications protocol 555 connections 551 currency options 453 454 455 home pages 417 419 information 70 Internet Service Providers ISPs 551 items in lists 25 43 menu commands 45 46 47 music 212 214 options in dialog boxes 44 security levels 468 synchronization settings 83 choosing information 19 city preferences 526 cleaning your handheld 578 clear button Calculator 463 Clear cache on exit option 424 Clear Cache option 424 clear entry button Calculator 463 Clear Note command 245 clearing calculators 463 History lists 416 Note Pad screens 245 clock 153 508 525 527 See also World Clock Color Theme Preferences screen 514 521 color coding 139 149 152 colors applying to annotations 196 applying to e mail 320 applying to events 139 149 152 applying to notes 246 changing screen 521 changing text 168 setting background 246 521 column widths 321 comma delimited files 107 command buttons 25 command equivalents Graffiti 2 61 command letters 47 Command mode 47 command shortcuts 47 command strokes 47 Command toolbar 47 commands 45 46 47 See also menus communication speed 544 545 548 communications protocols 279 369
359. ng information from 90 92 Cradle Cable setting 547 creating appointments 138 bookmarks 405 416 business cards 124 categories 491 company specific information 11 connections 546 547 contacts 68 118 121 126 362 e mail accounts 281 286 344 e mail messages 308 312 415 expense records 451 453 454 filters 363 login scripts 557 memos 237 238 239 MP3 files 208 multi day events 145 new locations 505 notes 245 owner information 540 passwords 268 471 472 477 personal calendars 138 personal signatures 289 316 photo albums 191 playlists 213 214 plug in applications 561 reminders 120 244 repeating events 142 143 repeating tasks 225 227 service profiles 550 551 554 ShortCut strokes 536 song lists 209 To Do lists 222 223 225 trusted pairs 258 271 unscheduled events 141 untimed events 140 145 user profiles 12 CSV files 107 currency 452 453 455 Currency pick list 453 currency symbols 453 454 455 459 current date and time checking 500 entering 64 525 528 Current URL option 418 cursor 66 70 Custom Currencies dialog box 455 customer support xxii 17 177 396 616 customizing backgrounds 168 513 517 calendar 166 167 contact information 123 128 currency symbols 455 data entry 531 expense lists 459 fonts 310 Graffiti 2 writing 534 handheld 27 handhelds 11 17 512 network settings 550 561 629 preset formats 530 synchronization settings 85 93 Tasks list 233 Cut command
360. ng the screen You can switch between landscape and portrait view by tapping Screen rotation EA on the status bar Landscape view is useful for viewing spreadsheets email web pages and photos 10 12 am Wednesday Jun 9 Have mechanic look at Water plants 11 00 Pick up Sten at airport 12 00 Meeting with Eric 6 00 Dinner with Karl Wf No Tasks due ee eee abc Screen rotation 10 13am Wednesday Jun 9 Have mechanic look at Water plants 11 00 Pick up Sten at airport 12 00 Meeting with Eric 6 00 Dinner with Karl Wf No Tasks due alt DOBBS EE BEBE EBEER EL k ABC abc 123 imi BEBDEoE 23 CHAPTER 2 Basics What s on the screen Tip Your handheld includes many features that make it easy to use Among them are the input area You can select an input and the common elements that appear on the screen in each of the applications Once you learn how to use them in one application you can easily use them in all the others area that does not display the application icons Input area Tip By default the input area is displayed To hide the input area tap Input on the status bar To If you use another display the input area if it is hidden tap Input El again Tapping the icons in the input area opens application frequently the following applications customize the input area to display that application s icon Tap Note Pad icon cal
361. nge the entries in Favorites View to include the applications files folders or web links you use most often 1 Go to Favorites 2 Open the Edit Favorites dialog box a Using the 5 way select the favorite you want to change b Select Menu on the status bar c Select Edit Favorites Y Continued 514 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld 3 Change the favorite x Edit Favorite a Select the favorite type from Type v App the Type pick list application Original Media file folder or web link Name Media b Select the application from the Original pick list select to browse to the file or folder or select to enter the web address you want Enter a name for your new favorite and select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 515 CHAPTER 25 Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Customizing the Application View Use your favorite photo as the background in the Application View You can also display your application icons in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without scrolling 1 Go to Applications 2 Open the Display Options dialog Display Options box View By Icon a Open the menus M Remember Last Category M Background b Select Options and then Fade 0 select Display Options 3 Select the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format 4 If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you
362. ngs during the account setup are automatically configured For other ISPs you need the following information e The protocol used for incoming mail such as Post Office Protocol POP or Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP e The name of the incoming mail server Tungsten T5 Handheld 278 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term e The name of the outgoing mail Simple Mail Transfer Protocol or SMTP server Firewall A system setup to protect against unauthorized access into a private network e Your account s security feature if it has one such as Secure Sockets Layer SSL Authenticated Post Office Protocol APOP or Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ESMTP e Your email address and password Go to your email provider s website or contact their customer support to obtain this information Using a corporate email account If you want to access email on your handheld using your corporate email account you create this account on your handheld in exactly the same way as any other account with one exception for a corporate email account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN If your company has a Bluetooth network located behind the corporate firewall or if you are using an 802 11b also called Wi Fi SDIO card go to www palmOne com to check on the availability of these cards in your handheld and your company has an 802 11b network located behind the corporate fire
363. ngsten T5 Handheld 599 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions made updates to a file on my handheld but when I synchronize the changes don t show up in the file on my computer If you use File Transfer to send a file to your handheld any updates you make to the file on your handheld are not included when you synchronize Use File Transfer to copy the updated file back to your computer File transfer is taking place slowly If you are working with large files or using large applications such as games on your handheld file transfer may go more slowly Quit all handheld applications to speed file transfer When I try to delete a file using File Transfer a message appears saying the file is busy If you are working with a file on your handheld for example editing a document or listening to a music file you cannot delete the file using File Transfer Close the file on your handheld and then delete it can t write a memo or enter a contact when my handheld is in Drive Mode When your handheld is in Drive Mode it works just like any external drive such as a CD drive You cannot enter or work with information directly on your handheld while it is in Drive Mode To work with information directly on your handheld turn Drive Mode off When your handheld is in Drive Mode and is connected to a computer you can open files from your handheld s internal drive on the computer using Windows Explorer or My Computer on a Windows compute
364. nloading email messages from your computer to your handheld Support Connecting Setting up a phone connection for sending and receiving email wirelessly If you re having problems Customizing Setting preferences for connecting to a network with the VersaMail application or with anything Common Answers to frequently asked questions about the VersaMail application else on your handheld go to Questions www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 386 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages In this chapter Creating and sending a text message Receiving and viewing a text message Editing a draft text message Setting advanced messaging features Related Topics Tungsten T5 Handheld If you need to get a short message to a friend or coworker fast send a text message from your handheld via your mobile phone GSM phone required sold separately to their mobile phone Messaging is a popular way for people to stay connected using the text messaging features of their mobile phone Benefits e Enjoy quick communication e Use text messaging to chat with friends 387 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Creating and sending a text message Before You Begin IMPORTANT Many SMS service providers charge per text message or part of a text message Before you can send and Each message or part is 160 characters If you create a text message under 161 char
365. nology e Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web e Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly e Connect to other devices such as cameras and other handhelds to share files wirelessly 254 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices What can do with the built in Bluetooth technology Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web Whether you access the Internet or your email account or send text messages once a week or constantly throughout the day wireless connectivity means that you can go online or share files anytime by connecting via your mobile phone or your laptop connected to the Internet Key Term Bluetooth Technology that enables devices such as handhelds mobile phones and computers Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly Imagine your desk and workstation without to connect wirelessly to cable clutter Bluetooth technology on your handheld replaces many of the connecting cables with each other a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing your handheld with your computer Before You Begin Connect to other devices such as cameras and other handhelds to share files wirelessly Any device you connect Wouldn t it be great if you could send files such as photos to another handheld Use the built in to must also be a Bluetooth technology to set up connections to devices within approximately 30 feet
366. nt from the My Library window on the left into the palmOne Handheld window on the right d RealGuide GS Music My Library Burn Transfer T O Search l E ea gt CA Burnftrancfer Home Current Burner Device EJ paimone Handheld iy Y How To W My Library Drag clips From the My Library list below into the device view at the right palmOne Handheld Name gt My Library ve Name Description All Media View all the aud Music View all your M Videos View all your Vig Create your owl autoPlaylists Generate playliq gt Purchased Music view all your pu Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 210 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tip On your handheld tap 5 Songs to view a list of the songs available for you to Transfer the selected songs to your handheld a Be sure your handheld is on and that RealPlayer is open If it is a green play The songs you just Connected light appears in the lower left corner of RealPlayer on your transferred are at the computer bottom of the list b Click Start Transfer When the transfer is complete the tracks you selected should say On Device The files are transferred to the Music folder on your handheld s internal drive IMPORTANT Do not press the HotSync button on your cable RealPlayer is transferring the files so there s no need to do anything 4 Done Tungsten T5 Hand
367. nt schedules for each of your email accounts but you can set up only one schedule for each account For example if you set up a schedule to get mail on weekdays for your Yahoo account you can t set up a separate schedule for weekends for that account and so on The auto get feature may not work with your specific VPN connection It doesn t work for SSL connections nor does it work if your security preferences include encrypting databases on your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 300 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip TAN etoule par orm 2 1 Select Auto Get Mail for a given manual get mail after account Auto Get Mail setting up a scheduled M Get mail automatically auto get Then only new a From the Inbox or on another Every 1 Hour messages are retrieved folder screen open the F during auto get menus Or if you have configured b Select Options and then an email account to select Auto Get Mail Cancel synchronize messages on your handheld with c Check the Get mail messages on your automatically box computer you can synchronize after setting up a scheduled auto get 2 to make sure that only new messages will be retrieved Set schedule options Interval Select the Every pick list and select the time interval from 15 minutes to 12 hours Note that if you set a more frequent interval you may need to recharge your handheld s battery more often Start End Time Tap t
368. nually turn HotSync Manager on each time you want the Palm Desktop your computer to respond to a synchronization request software program group and select HotSync Manager kui 3 Click OK Note that if you turn HotSync Manager on it 4 Done stays on until you turn off your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 86 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Setting synchronization options MAC ONLY 1 Open the synchronization options screen a Double click the HotSync Manager icon 4 in the Palm folder b Click the HotSync Controls tab 2 Select the synchronization options you want e000 HotSync Software Setup f HotSync Controls Connection Settings HotSync Enabled O Disabled Status HotSync software is enabled To disable the HotSync software click the Disabled radio button above Listening on USB and PaimConnect A HotSync Options ync Op M Enable HotSync software at system startup C Show more detail in HotSync Log Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 87 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d HotSync Enabled Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization requests from your handheld Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your computer If this option is not selected you must
369. o IMPORTANT Do not press the HotSync button on your cable RealPlayer is your handheld for transferring the files so there s no need to do anything example to keep all the songs from the same CD in 4 Done one folder Tungsten T5 Handheld 206 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music x Tip MAC ONLY You can also transfer MP3 files on a Mac computer using Drive Mode 1 Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet a Drag and drop the file s or folder onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder b In the Send To Handheld dialog box select your username and click OK 2 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 207 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Transferring music from a CD to your handheld If your songs are ona CD and you want to listen to them on your handheld use RealPlayer on your computer to convert and transfer the files Ry NOTE Mac users can use iTunes included with Mac OS X to transfer music from a CD to their computer Then use Drive Mode to transfer the files to your handheld Music files should be imported in MP3 format WINDOWS ONLY 1 Access the music CD from RealPlayer on your computer a Double click the RealPlayer icon Q on your computer desktop b Insert the CD into your computer s CD drive c If the track listing does not appear click Music amp My Library and then click CD DVD in the View menu JJ Music Store
370. o gives a lower playback quality Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality but remember that this increases file size Tungsten T5 Handheld 603 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions My music file stutters during playback WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using File Transfer and you are listening to music files on your handheld the music playback may stutter Wait until the file transfer is finished to listen to the music file When I save songs from a CD do not see the song title or artist name When capturing songs from a CD you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title and artist information This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web Tasks The info entered does not appear in an application e Open the Options menu and select Preferences If Show Completed Tasks is selected deselect it to display the missing tasks e If you marked the task as private check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records Connecting wirelessly My passkey is rejected when attempt to form a trusted pair with my mobile phone Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific time frame Make sure you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted Tungsten T5 Handheld 604 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions If your passkey is rejected your phone may have a preassigned passkey see the
371. o improve the speed ease of use and security of your browsing experience Changing how images are downloaded Images in web pages can be very large You can set an option to make web pages download faster by removing images altogether 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the General Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select General Check or uncheck the Disable Images box to disable or enable images Select OK 4 Done 420 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields Your handheld can store information such as web addresses and form fields If autofill is enabled when you enter the first few letters of a URL you ve entered before in the URL Entry field your handheld completes the URL for you Also when you are filling out forms and applications your handheld can complete the information for you Tip Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of information your name address phone number 1 and so on When you enable autofill your Go to Favorites and select Web amp handheld stores the 2 i Open the General Preferences information you entered dialog box Preferences ii in these fields The next f Page Generall advanced time you use that order a Open the menus O Disable Auto Complete form and type th
372. ock you must first create a password for your handheld Tip You can change a Quick Unlock combination at any time Follow the same steps you used to create the combination Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Using Quick Unlock You can unlock your handheld by creating a special combination sequence with the 5 way navigator similar to the combination you use to open a padlock Use this sequence in place of your password to quickly unlock your handheld Quick Unlock works only with your first three attempts to unlock your handheld After three attempts you must use your password to unlock your handheld Creating a Quick Unlock combination 1 Open Security Preferences a Go to Applications Quick Unlock box b Select Prefs Peay c Select Security Private Records v Show Open the Quick Unlock dialog box a Select the Quick Unlock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK Y Continued 481 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Create a Quick Unlock combination sequence a Use the 5 way or tap the onscreen navigator to create a combination For example you might choose Left Right Left as a combination b Select OK 4 Select Done Create Quick Unlock i Use navigator or tap screen to create a combination v Quick Unlock is optional and works only on the first three entry attempts 4 Done When your handheld is
373. oe Say File Help esans z ell ty VersaMail Speakeasy Mail Client Sync Setup Speakeasy Advanced Sync Options Handheld Settings Work Email YersaMail Attachment Conversion Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you perform a HotSync operation Mail Client Microsoft Outlook Express hd Mail Profile Mail Password Setup Notes In order to synchronize with Outlook Express you must first properly set up MAPI in Outlook Al Express The MAPI setting can be found under Options in the Outlook Express Tools menu m Outlook Express version 4 or earlier Check the box Make Outlook Express my default e mail program and then check the box Make Outlook Express my default Simple MAPI client Desktop Default Mail Client E ps4 Outlook Express BII available Accounts 3 Configured Accounts 1 l ctive Accounts 1 Y Continued 347 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select synchronization options a Check the box to include this account when you synchronize IMPORTANT You must check this box otherwise the account cannot be synchronized b Select your mail client synchronization options 3 Click Save l on the toolbar to save the settings for this account 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 348 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting mail client synchronization options Select the
374. oes not recognize time zones Did You Know Selecting a time zone when creating a new event allows you to travel and have your events You can also set a automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location When you schedule an event set the preference to time zone and time the event occurs in the location of the event The event automatically adjusts on your schedule based on the primary location you have set on your handheld automatically include a time zone whenever you create a new event Open the Options menu and select Preferences Select When you travel you can change the primary location on your handheld and the event automatically adjusts on your schedule to the correct time according to the time zone of the new primary location New events use time N NOTE Only events that have a time zone setting adjust when you change the primary time zones Only new events zone on your handheld Events that do not have a time zone setting remain at their set time created after the preference is set are affected 1 Press Calendar Oss Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 148 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Set the time and the time zone Start Time a Enter the event Ew End Time b Set the time for the event as it is scheduled at the location where Time zone v San Francisco it occurs pick list c Select the time zone pick list and select a city within the time zone that the event is located
375. off altogether with the Silent profile 1 Open Sounds amp Alerts Prelerende Sounds amp Alerts Preferences Profile boxes a Go to Applications System Sound v Medium G S d v High b Select Prefs 6 A Alarm Sound Medium Al LED v O c Select Sounds amp Alerts iiis 2 Select Custom Silent or All Off If you selected Silent or All Off in step 2 select Done If you selected Custom in step 2 select the System Sound Game Sound Alarm Sound and Alarm LED pick lists and select the volume level for each sound then select Done 4 Done 539 CHAPTER 25 Tip In addition to entering owner information you can assign a name to your handheld for Bluetooth communication Did You Know If you use Security Preferences to turn off and lock your handheld with a password your owner info appears when you select the Owner button the next time you turn on your handheld Tip If you assigned a password in Security Preferences you must select Unlock and enter your password to change your owner info Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Entering your owner information It s a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your handheld if there s enough battery power to turn it on By default the Owner Preferences screen contains the information you entered when you installed the CD and set up your handheld but you can
376. om the CD Your handheld comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use The CD that came with your handheld includes lots of other applications to make your handheld even more useful and more fun You can install these applications at any time WINDOWS ONLY 1 Insert the CD into your computer 2 On the Discover Your Handheld screen click Add software to your handheld 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want to install 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 110 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Insert the CD into your computer Double click the Essential Software folder Install the applications you want to install A W N Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Checking space and version numbers Before you install a file or an application it s important to make sure you have enough space for it You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your handheld or expansion card in case you re interested in upgrading them Tungsten T5 Handheld 111 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 1 Open the Info dialog box a Go to Applications and select HotSync 8 b Open the menus c Select Info on the App menu 2 View space info and version numbers Pick list Device Handheld Free Sp
377. omputer Insert the software installation CD and follow the onscreen 1 instructions for installing extra software WINDOWS ONLY Connect your handheld to your computer using the USB sync cable You must install this 2 Prepare RealPlayer on your computer software even if you already have a version of a Open the RealPlayer application RealPlayer installed on your computer The version on the CD Select D Real Guide T music my Library T sunjreanster TQ search om contains all of the palmOne qe Jie iee J paimOne Handheld k 23 How To b Select palmOne Handheld from the Current Burner Device drop down list components needed to Handheld palmone Handheld transfer music files to A bolle dean oe your handheld my Library x2 Name Description All Media View all the aud View all your Mi Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 204 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music For tips on using Prepare your handheld RealPlayer on your 3 ee eee computer go to the Help a Go to Favorites and then select Music D menu in RealPlayer or visit www real com b Connect your handheld to your computer using the USB sync cable IMPORTANT Do not press the HotSync button on your cable 4 Select the songs you want to transfer a In RealPlayer on your computer click Burn Transfer b If necessary select palmOne Handheld from the Current Burn Transfer Device
378. omputer just reinstall Palm Desktop software When I synchronize receive the 8009 error message An application has failed to respond to a HotSync notification WINDOWS ONLY The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt You need to rebuild the HotSync Manager registry entries For information on rebuilding the registry entries go to www palmOne com intl support and search the palmOne Knowledge Library for error 8009 My files didn t install during synchronization e If files do not install after you synchronize the file type was not recognized On your handheld open the application associated with those files Then synchronize again If the files remain in the palmOne Quick Install list on your computer Windows only they are not associated with an application on your handheld and cannot be installed by synchronizing You can install the files using File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac e If you are trying to install files to an expansion card make sure that a card is inserted into your handheld s expansion slot before you synchronize I can t add more files to the palmOne Quick Install list Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed You cannot add more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open Tungsten T5 Handheld 597 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions When add a zipped file ZIP to Quick Install some of the files don t
379. on to 107 109 installing 3 7 28 opening applications in 80 82 requiring password entry for 473 restoring archived items to 109 synchronizing with 10 594 Tungsten T5 Handheld system requirements for 2 transferring info to handheld 77 troubleshooting 585 uninstalling 114 upgrading handhelds and 7 Palm Dialer software See Dialer application Palm OS applications 33 Palm OS handhelds adding user information to multiple 11 beaming to 173 577 exchanging memos with 243 exchanging messages with 396 exchanging photos and videos with 202 sharing information with 31 sharing notes with 253 sharing tasks with 236 upgrading from 4 palmOne Quick Install icon 95 palmOne Quick Install software 93 597 palmOne Quick Install window 96 palmOne technical support 17 paper clip icon 336 337 339 parts handheld 2 passkeys 260 268 270 272 604 Password check box 284 passwords changing 369 473 creating 472 477 deleting 476 e mail accounts and 279 encrypting 377 entering 262 284 551 554 forgetting 476 locking handhelds with 477 540 losing 477 network connections and 270 omitting 551 opening web pages and 400 overview 471 passkeys and 260 requiring 473 security options for 468 setting 268 troubleshooting 609 validating 295 Paste command 71 Paste icon 47 pasting information 71 464 patches 113 PC Setup dialog box 265 267 269 PC Setup option 267 PCs See personal computers PDAs 18 PDF files 30 pen 246 Pen
380. on your computer If you plan only to synchronize email on your handheld your computer with email on your computer select Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Outlook Express in the Mail Client pick list depending on your mail client Tip If you are synchronizing If you plan both to synchronize email and to send and receive email wirelessly from your with an account with handheld select Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Outlook Express if your email account uses the Microsoft Outlook on POP protocol If your email account uses the IMAP protocol select Direct IMAP your computer you must also set Outlook as your default email program Any account with Lotus Notes If your account uses the POP protocol select Lotus Notes in the Mail Client pick list If your account uses the IMAP protocol select Direct IMAP In the next two fields enter your Lotus Notes ID and password Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID Tungsten T5 Handheld 349 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you want to synchronize to a local mail file instead of a server mail file check the Synchronize to i The conduit does not local replicated mail file box You must do all of the following to synchronize to a local mail file support SSL for accounts set up as Direct POP or Direct IMAP e Replicate the server mail file to the desktop e Make sure the replicated mail file is in the Notes data directory e If you have performed
381. onfirmation messages 251 connections 544 546 contacts 127 desktop software 7 e mail 286 328 329 331 e mail accounts 292 e mail filters 367 events 156 158 expansion cards 569 expense records 457 458 Tungsten T5 Handheld files from handheld 109 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 537 information 72 109 477 576 589 locations 507 mail folders 325 memos 241 notes 251 Palm Desktop software 114 passwords 476 photos 192 199 playlists 218 private entries 476 repeating tasks 231 selection highlight 43 service profiles 556 songs 217 tasks 231 232 Rename Card dialog box 574 Rename Custom Fields dialog box 123 renaming categories 492 expansion cards 574 mail folders 325 preset connections 544 web pages 413 Repeat icon 161 repeat intervals calendar 142 145 tasks 226 228 repeating events changing 155 deleting 156 157 displaying 169 scheduling 142 143 repeating tasks 225 227 230 231 Reply Options dialog box 327 Reply To Address option 288 374 replying to e mail 327 required steps xxi rescheduling events 154 155 163 resending messages 311 reserving dates 140 reset button 21 579 581 resetting application buttons 523 clock 502 527 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 537 handheld 477 579 588 local preferences 525 527 passwords 473 preset connections 544 preset formats 529 screen fonts 519 server profiles 551 resetting handheld 21 resizing text 239 restarting handheld See resets restoring archived item
382. onnection Setup screen 259 connection types 255 278 connections See also connecting adding login scripts for 557 adding trusted 268 270 authentication servers and 561 automatically stopping remote 379 closing Internet 410 closing network 553 creating 546 547 deleting 546 dropping 555 losing 588 omitting passkeys for 258 pairing with network services 293 precautions for 579 621 preset setting for 544 549 restricting 256 retrying Internet 411 selecting 551 setting flow control for 548 setting timeout intervals for 378 setting up mobile 258 262 setting up network 261 269 553 setting up secure 359 375 385 setting up wireless 254 265 synchronizing from 83 conserving power 5 257 541 587 Contact Details dialog box 128 Contact Edit screen 121 123 contacting ISP providers 262 contacts See also Contacts application adding 68 118 121 126 362 archiving 127 categorizing 128 136 491 494 copying information for 119 121 125 customizing details for 128 deleting 127 displaying information for 123 128 duplicating information for 121 125 entering from Outlook 10 594 entering in memos 238 entering notes for 121 keeping private 128 136 469 locating 126 managing 117 saving 120 127 selecting 43 transferring from other applications 136 Contacts application adding contact information 118 120 addressing e mail from 314 archiving information in 127 231 beaming from 444 be
383. ons for 170 incorrect 589 resetting 154 525 527 scheduling periods of 139 setting current 528 setting for alarms 153 225 249 508 setting location specific 27 502 525 unscheduled events and 141 time bars 168 time formats 529 530 time zones 504 506 525 526 timed events 169 timeout intervals 378 Timeout option 378 tips xxii 17 25 Tips icon 25 To Do lists 222 225 See also tasks toolbars 47 top arrow controls 25 top panel controls 20 touch screen See screen Touchscreen Preferences screen 538 TouchTone dialing 547 tracking expenses 27 450 transfer options 583 transferring Tungsten T5 Handheld applications 28 29 96 files 29 107 276 412 from outside sources 17 information 20 68 79 107 wirelessly 255 Trash folder 331 332 378 travel expenses 459 travel guides 568 troubleshooting 8 84 538 585 trusted connections 268 270 Trusted Devices option 271 trusted pair defined 258 trusted pairs 255 256 258 271 TSV files 107 turning handheld on and off 541 543 turning off alarms 509 turning off HotSync Manager 86 turning sounds off 539 Tutorial 30 tutorial 7 TXT files 107 U underlined links 402 underlined words in documentation xxi Undo icon 47 Unfiled category 492 unfreezing handheld 579 581 uniform resource locators See URLs uninstalling applications 589 Palm Desktop software 114 unread e mail messages 159 168 333 Unread pick list 320 unrecognized devices 256 unsc
384. ons menu 2 and select Preferences Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page you want to i rit e gt Egoa E pera N Address field http www yahoo com ress bar Dox a Enter the address of the web YAHOO page in the address field ly My Yahoo b Select Go a Finance 4 Done Travel aes Tungsten T5 Handheld 399 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Using a password to access a web page Tip Some websites require you to use a password to gain access to information Some websites allow you to check a box to have your sign in name 1 automatically entered each time you visit a particular web page 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page where you must enter the password 3 Enter your password to access the web page a Enter your sign in name in the appropriate field b Tap in the password box enter your password and then select OK c Select the button that lets you view the page Sign In Enter Go and so on Password Enter your ID and password Yahoo ID f AN l l gt Password G Unassigned ml Remember my ID on this computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 400 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Finding information on a web page Did You Know Find locates any text whether it is letters or numbers Find is not case sensitive Tip Because of the limited space on the handheld screen sometimes the
385. op software your desktop computer must meet these requirements WINDOWS ONLY e A PC with a Pentium II processor or later and one of the following operating systems e Windows 2000 requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software e Windows XP requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software e Internet Explorer 5 0 or later e 32 megabyte MB available RAM 64MB recommended Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer e 170MB available hard disk space e One available USB port e USB sync cable included with your handheld e CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your handheld or you can download Palm Desktop software by visiting our website at www palmOne com intl support Ry NOTE Palm Desktop software that is downloaded from the palmOne website does not include additional software available on the CD MAC ONLY e Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor e Mac OS X version 10 2 or 10 3 requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software e 128MB total RAM e 190MB available hard disk space Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better One available USB port e USB sync cable included with your handheld e CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your handheld or you can download Palm Desktop software by visiting our website at w
386. open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before you can synchronize Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you synchronize 3 Close the HotSync Software Setup window 4 Done Choosing whether application information is updated Key Term By default when information in each application is updated in one place your handheld or your Conduit The computer itis updated in the other However for an application included during synchronization synchronization software you can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other thattransfers information during the next synchronization between an application on your computer and the same application on your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 88 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer WINDOWS ONLY Tip Windows For information on choosing 1 Select the application you want to customize whether application information is updated if you are synchronizing a Click the HotSync Manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen your handheld with b Select Custom Outlook see the online Outlook synchronization c Select the appropriate username from the drop down list at the top of the Help Click the HotSync screen Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower right d Select the application you want and then c
387. opriate Cookies 0B Clear Cookies i a settings 7 4 M Use Proxy Cache 1K Clear Cache Proxy Server O Clear cache on exit d Select OK Select OK 4 Done 426 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Setting whether to accept JavaScript You can choose to bypass JavaScript elements on the web pages you view JavaScript is often used on web pages for interactive content 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the General Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select General 3 Check or uncheck the Disable JavaScript box to enable or disable JavaScript 4 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 427 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus mytungstent5 Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Connecting Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on Support your handheld If you re having problems with the web browser or with anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 VersaMail Sending email messages using a link from a web page Tungsten T5 Handheld 428 CHAPTER 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your H
388. ord to remove the password and delete all private records 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer again forgot the password and my handheld is locked First use the password hint to try to remember the password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you must perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld Performing a hard reset deletes all of the information on your handheld To protect your info and create a backup of your info synchronize the information in your handheld s program memory with your computer and back up the contents of your handheld s internal drive to your computer often Tungsten T5 Handheld 609 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Sharing I can t beam information to another handheld or other device NOTE Depending on the receiving handheld model not all information may be sent correctly e If you are beaming to another Palm Powered device confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are 4 to 39 inches approximately ten centimeters to one meter apart and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different e Move your handheld closer to the receiving device e Make sure the receiving device has beam receive enabled e Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the receiving device e Avoid beaming in bright sunlight or fluorescent light These produce infrared
389. ort tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 584 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Tungsten T5 Handheld Although we can t anticipate all the questions you might have this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions Setup Nothing happens when insert the CD WINDOWS ONLY 1 Click Start on your computer and then select Run 2 Click Browse and navigate to your CD ROM drive 3 Select Autorun click Open and then click OK I cannot install Palm Desktop software WINDOWS ONLY e Disable any virus scanning software on your computer e Close any open applications e Make sure your computer has at least 170MB of disk space available e Delete all temporary files 585 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions e Run ScanDisk or another disk verification tool on your computer e Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer e If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered device remove any previous version s of Palm Desktop software by clicking Start navigating to Settings and clicking Control Panel Click Add or Remove Programs e Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software MAC ONLY e Disable any virus scanning software on your computer e Quit any open applications e Make sure your computer has at least 190MB of disk space available e Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer e If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powe
390. orwarding correctly WINDOWS ONLY Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer For these features to work correctly the email client software must be properly set up Follow these steps to check the settings 1 Click Start on your computer and then select Settings 2 Select Control Panel 3 Select Internet Options and then click the Programs tab 4 Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software Tungsten T5 Handheld 608 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions 5 Click OK 6 Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information Privacy I ve made records private but can t remember my password to display them First use the password hint to try to remember the password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you can use Security Preferences to delete the password but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private However if you synchronize before you delete the password the synchronization process backs up all entries whether or not they are marked private Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entries 1 In Security Preferences tap in the password box and enter a guess at the password 2 In the dialog box that appears select Lost Password 3 Select Delete Passw
391. ost often are easy to find If you know what you re looking for in a long pick Adding new locations list use Graffiti 2 writing to find it faster Enter the first letter of the word andthanlonat 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O your item 2 Open the Edit List dialog box a Select a Location pick list b Select Edit List 3 Add the new location n Locations Select the closest location in a Select Add the desired time zone USA Central Dallas i b Scroll through the list to TEA oa me select a location that is in the USA Central Houston i USA Central Managua same time zone as the city USA Central Minneapolis you want to add USA Central New Orleans USA Central Wichita c Select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 505 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings 4 Tungsten T5 Handheld amp OPTIONAL Select each setting you want to change Name Enter the name of the location Time Zone Select the time zone for the location Daylight Saving Time box Check for your handheld to automatically adjust the date and time for Daylight Saving Time in this location Start and End dates Select the boxes to change the start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time if necessary Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Edit Location fi Time Zone Location M This location observes Day CORD Caneed 506 CHAPTER 24 Managing Clock Settings Del
392. other folder screen select the folder pick list in the upper right corner and menu and then select select the folder containing the Move To Then select the message s you want to move folder you want on the destination list Tip To select a group of adjacent messages drag Y Continued the stylus to the left of the message icons Tip You can also open the Message menu and select Move To Tungsten T5 Handheld 322 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Move a single message a Tap the envelope icon to the left of the message you want to move and then select Move To from the list Speakeas Speakeas o B revised instruc Les Ne o BS these are funny Travis o M review comme i oe o M review comme Angela M cool site i ed x cool site Travi X ALC Account Fo monica 3 gt monica b On the folders list select the destination folder you want 3 Move multiple messages a Tap to the left of the icon for each message you want to move A checkmark appears next to each selected message b Tap a message icon next to a selected message and then select Move To on the list c On the folders list select the destination folder you want Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 323 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 Select OK 4 Done Creating and editing mail folders The VersaMail application has certain preset folders such
393. ou calculate formulas in a number of different areas 1 Go to Applications and select Calculator 8B 2 Access the advanced mode calculators a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Advanced Mode You can now use the scientific calculator c If you want to use other calculators such as finance logic statistics or area open the menus select Options and then select a mode from the list 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 465 CHAPTER 21 Performing Calculations Related topics My Handheld Click the links below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus mytungstents Entering Entering numbers with Graffiti 2 characters Information Support If you re having problems with Calculator or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 466 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private In this chapter Choosing a security level Marking information as private Setting the level of privacy Using a password Locking your handheld Using Quick Unlock Encrypting your information Limiting the number of password attempts Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld You probably wouldn t leave your door unlocked at night so why should it
394. ou can open the attachment if not you can t view the attachment Tungsten T5 Handheld 335 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages PRC PRC This is a Palm OS application that you can install and run on your handheld PDB PDB This is a file that works with specific Palm OS applications ZIP ZIP These are compressed files that contain other types of files for example text files or Word documents You can download and uncompress unzip a Zip file and then view the contents on your handheld Working with a downloaded attachment In the message list a paper clip on a message s envelope icon indicates that the message has an attachment that has been downloaded You can view edit or install an attached file depending on the file type Tip Because downloading 1 large messages can In the Inbox select the message consume handheld with the attachment a resources the VersaMail revised instructions for creatin Paper clip application displays the size and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size up to a total size of 5MB Tungsten T5 Handheld Travis Washington 5 30a these are funny M Angela Yee 5 28a review comments M Travis Washington 5 24a cool site M monica_lewis 3 33a ALC Account Form Reminder amp OPTIONAL If you choose to get messages by subject only select More for each downloaded message to view the bo
395. ou do not see the application or file in the folder go to the folder that contains the application you want to install Tungsten T5 Handheld MAC ONLY 1 2 Copy or download the application you want to install onto your computer Select the files to install on your handheld a In the Palm folder double click the HotSync Manager b Select the HotSync menu and then select Install Handheld files c Inthe User pop up menu select the name that corresponds to your handheld d Click Add to List e Select the file s you want to install Ny Continued 099 Install Handheld Files User dkajiyama ia Giraffe pre HARDBALL PRC MINEHUNT PRC PUZZLE PRC Tips __ Destination Handheld Handheld Handheld Handheld you perform a HotSync operation The fiks h this list willbe installed on To add files to this list either drag To fnd other third party applications your handheld device the next time and drop them onto th window or and files for yourhandheld device click the Add button check out our web site at http www painOne com 98 CHAPTER 5 Tip If you have an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion slot you can view and work with files and folders on the card in the File Transfer window in exactly the same way as files on the internal drive copying moving and so on You can also copy and move files bet
396. ou must manually send a message in this state by selecting Get amp Send Tungsten T5 Handheld 318 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email folders By default the VersaMail application displays the messages in a given account s Inbox folder You can easily view the messages in a different folder You can also customize the appearance of the message list in your email folders move messages between folders and create and edit folders Viewing another folder 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen select the folders pick list in the upper right corner of the screen 2 Select the folder you want to view 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 319 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Customizing the appearance of the message list You can change display options on the message list as well as the size of columns in the list Tip The customization options you choose apply to all email folders not just the one you are in Tungsten T5 Handheld Ry NOTE Changing column size is available for one line message view only 1 2 In the Inbox or on another folder screen select Display Options Customize any of the following Display Options i Sortby Date v Descend Sort by Select the Sort by pick list Show v 2line view and then select the column name Default is Date Sort order Select Descend or Ascend Default is Descend Unread Black Read Black
397. ou try to work with the expansion card icon in Unlike in File Transfer My Computer or Windows Explorer an error message appears you can double click a file from the computer s y Comp window to open it from File Edit bd Favorites Tools Help your handheld in Drive O O 8 Amame M od e b System Tasks x e Local Disk C e Local Disk D Memory Stick E View system information Add 5 ares cone Q DYD CD RW Drive F Joe Sadusky s Documents lt gt INTERNAL a I aiidheldap pe aloes removable drive Other Places amp lt P gt Brother MFC 6800 ISB Es Shared Documents er oy CARDI H My Network Places Expansion card My Documents appears as Shared Documents B Control Panel removable drive Details amp My Computer System Folder 4 Work with the files on your handheld as you would on any other external removable drive Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 105 CHAPTER 5 Tip If you are working with an expansion card you must eject the card from the computer using the Eject command in Windows or dragging the card to the Eject icon on the Dock for Mac before removing the card in order to avoid losing info on the card Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 5 When you have finished working with Drive Mode do the following IMPORTANT To avoid losing any information that was transferred be sure to follow thes
398. ount only For example the default service you have selected for your handheld may be called Bluetooth and may use your handheld s built in Bluetooth functionality to make a connection to your corporate mail server However for your Earthlink account you may want to switch to the service called IR which uses your handheld s IR port to make a connection to your email service provider through your mobile phone When you exit the VersaMail application the service disconnects unless you are using the default service for your handheld When you reopen the application the email account you selected Earthlink in this example continues to connect using the new connection IR in this example until you either select a new service or uncheck the Always connect using box If you uncheck the Always connect using box the email account Earthlink connects using the default handheld service Bluetooth in this example The Always connect using box changes the connection service for the selected email account only You must follow the procedure for each email account whose connection you want to switch from the default connection on your handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 293 If there is an existing service connection it is disconnected and the new connection is initiated The VersaMail application sends and checks for any new email using the new connection Tungsten T5 Handheld Open the Account Details dialog box a From th
399. our formats 529 530 5 way navigator 19 25 41 45 scrolling application categories 35 A abbreviations 535 536 AC charger 21 accelerating scrolling 43 accented characters 60 Accept cookies check box 422 accessing additional software 17 30 applications 590 corporate networks 280 e mail 278 304 e mail accounts 255 260 263 email accounts 26 features 46 files 75 425 hidden or masked entries 471 home page 402 information 41 468 internal flash drive 75 network accounts 260 program memory 75 web sites 255 263 397 Tungsten T5 Handheld accessories 17 21 177 396 568 579 Account Details dialog box 294 Account Overview screen 356 Account Setup screen 282 291 292 344 accounts e mail accessing from Internet 415 changing 291 295 368 connection types and 278 creating 286 344 defining as synchronize only 291 deleting 292 displaying summary information for 356 excluding from synchronization 358 managing 291 scheduling auto get for 300 305 selecting 293 297 setting up secure connections for 359 synchronizing multiple 358 synchronizing with client 349 351 testing 290 upgrading 277 Accounts command 291 292 298 action bar Web Pro 398 402 actions pen stroke 524 activating buttons and controls 533 Add Contact dialog box 362 add on applications 113 611 adding additional software 110 568 applications 1 561 577 appointments 138 bookmarks 405 416 categories 491 company specific information 11
400. our handheld to any cable or accessory Handheld don ts e Do not drop bang or otherwise cause a strong impact to your handheld e Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket you might sit on it by mistake e Do not let your handheld get wet don t even leave it in a damp location e Do not expose your handheld to very hot or cold temperatures including placing it near a heater leaving it in a car or setting it by a window in direct sunlight Resetting your handheld On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen In this case you need to reset your handheld Doing a soft reset A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it s doing and start over again None of your information will be lost After a soft reset a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time if needed To do a soft reset unscrew the top of the stylus to access the reset tool or find a similar object without a sharp tip and gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld 579 CHAPTER 27 Maintaining Your Handheld Reset button If your handheld does not respond after a soft reset you need to do a hard reset Tungsten T5 Handheld 580 CHAPTER 27 Tungsten T5 Handheld Maintaining Your Handheld Doing a hard reset Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesn t solve your problem or if you want to clear all of your information from your han
401. our phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process e Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected The VersaMail application am having problems accessing my account Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account verify that the account complies with your email provider s requirements by following these steps e Verify both your password and your username for your email account e If you are connecting using a mobile phone through the built in Bluetooth technology on your handheld a cable or the IR port on your handheld verify that you have either a data enabled GSM or a high speed GPRS account with your wireless service provider e Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account If this is the case be sure to use your provider s network as the connection type for the account e Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service For example Yahoo requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email messages from your Yahoo account to your handheld Check with your service provider to see if any provider specific requirements exist Tungsten T5 Handheld 606 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions e Service provider settings frequently change
402. ow Nearby devices Select a phone PalmNokia3600 Select phone Select if your phone does not appear Y Continued 259 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Key Term Passkey Like a password the passkey is 4 entera passkay a security measure Your a Enter a passkey number This BluetoothSecurity i handheld can only can be any number you Enter passkey for connect with a device that choose it does not for has the same passkey example have to bea For example to connect password you use to access a OK Cancel to your mobile phone network or an email account Gs D you need to enter the same passkey on your IMPORTANT You must enter handheld and on your the same passkey on your phone handheld and your mobile phone in order to connect to your phone b Select OK 5 Select Done to finish phone connection setup Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 260 GPRS Acronym for General Packet Radio Service a method of sending information wirelessly at high speeds Select Yes in step 7 only if you have a GPRS account for your mobile phone Tungsten T5 Handheld 6 Determine if you want to be set up with a network a Select Yes to begin network setup Go to step 7 b Select No if you want to use your phone connection only to dial phone numbers from your handheld or_send text messages You have finished setup Begin network setup a If you select Yes go to step 8 b If
403. ows only _ Benefits e Access email on the go e Send and receive photos sound files Word and Excel files and more e Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time 276 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Upgrading an existing email account Before You Begin If you have already used the VersaMail application on a different handheld and have kept your old Before you can set up an username you can upgrade your existing email account for use on your new handheld email account on your handheld you must do eee 1 Synchronize your new handheld e If you don t already with your computer Select the c have one establish an username associated with your account wiht al internet old handheld this contains your K Ramos service provider Such as existing account information aee Earthlink or a wireless carrier such as Cingular You can also use a corporate email account e For wireless accounts only Have active service with a wireless carrier 2 and a mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology You must also set up a phone connection on your 4 Done handheld Not required if you want to access email over your company s Bluetooth network On your handheld go to Favorites and select VersaMail amp Select Yes to accept the upgrade Tungsten T5 Handheld 277 CHAPTER 15 Sending and
404. personal information If your handheld is lost or stolen this information will be safe Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Cont d Contacts S ERA Security Cho Mike 650 555 6322 W Masked entry Cruz Maria 415 555 8983 W D Am Lou 415 555 5236 W Hall Simon 202 555 3990 W Hamon Nikk 530 555 7650 H Keaton Lisa 203 555 6192 W Viewing an entry that is masked To open a masked entry select the entry If you have a password enter it in the Show Private Records dialog box and then select OK When you close a masked entry it remains masked Using a password Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password which is needed to display the contents of hidden masked entries 471 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Creating a password Tip The best passwords 1 consist of a mix of letters characters and numbers Longer passwords are better than short ones b Select Prefs 6 Any password you create Auto Lock is case sensitive Open Security Password box a Go to Applications c Select Security Private Records v Show 2 Create a password Create Password Enter letters or numbers a Select the Password box b Enter a password with Graffiti 2 writing the numeric keypad or the onscreen keyboard c Select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 472 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Conf
405. plications to 448 575 deleting information on 576 displaying information about 27 573 dummy card 569 formatting 576 getting applications on 112 inserting 20 570 limitations 573 moving applications to 96 opening applications on 571 opening files on 572 overview 567 preventing damage to 569 related topics for 577 removing 569 removing applications on 113 renaming 574 saving multimedia files on 179 transferring audio files to 204 206 208 211 types of 568 viewing information on 414 Expense application 27 archiving information in 457 benefits of 450 categorizing information in 491 categorizing with Calculator 491 changing information 451 choosing currency options 453 deleting categories 493 Tungsten T5 Handheld deleting information in 457 458 entering expenses in 451 452 getting help with 460 opening 451 460 related topics for 461 saving information in 452 transferring information to 68 troubleshooting 461 Expense icon 27 Expense Preferences dialog box 451 454 expense records See also Expense application categorizing 452 458 459 deleting 457 458 entering information in 451 454 organizing related expenses in 453 viewing information in 459 expense reports 27 453 458 459 Expense type pick list 451 extending battery 512 587 external data sources 17 external devices 20 255 544 external speaker 539 F fade setting 168 514 517 FAQs 585 Favorites View changing entries 514 defined 26 icon on status
406. pply the changes to to select the event s you want to the C rrent record apply the changes to this amp all Future records All occurrences Current Apply your changes to only the selected instance of the repeating event Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event 4 Done 155 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Deleting events If an appointment is cancelled you can delete it from your schedule When deleting a repeating event you can indicate you want to delete just the selected event or to include other instances of the event You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected time frame Tip You can also delete a specific event by selecting the event selecting Details and then selecting Delete Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old events for tax purposes If you save an archive copy of your deleted events you can refer to them later by importing them Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting a specific event 1 2 Press Calendar Oss Go to the event you want to delete a From Day View select Go To b Select the year month and date of the event c Select the event description Open the Delete Event dialog Delete Event ti box Delete selected event a Open the menus M
407. profiles from scratch or by duplicating an includes high speed data existing profile and editing the information services or that supports dial up connections additional fees may 1 apply e An ISP account or a corporate remote access Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications account additional fees b Select Prefs amp may apply e Connection Preferences G Salaet Netware i i settings for your mobile Connect _ sedan i with IR or Continued Bluetooth wireless technology Tungsten T5 Handheld 550 CHAPTER 25 Tip Instead of creating a new profile you can copy an existing profile and change the settings Select the profile you want to copy and then open the Service menu and select Duplicate Did You Know Most dial in servers do not accept spaces in the username Tip If you re concerned about security don t enter a password Just leave the word Prompt in the Password box and your handheld will ask you to enter a password each time you log in Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Enter the basic settings Service Select the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial in server type from the list If your ISP or server type isn t on the list select New and enter a name for the service profile User Name Enter your username This is the part of your email address that s before the sign and it s the name that you use when you log in to yo
408. r or Finder on a Mac computer and work with them there Your handheld still displays alerts such as for appointments or new email messages when in Drive Mode Tungsten T5 Handheld 600 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions My handheld and or the expansion card is not showing up as a drive in Windows Explorer or My Computer when I have the handheld in Drive Mode WINDOWS ONLY When you turn on Drive Mode connect your handheld to your computer and then open My Computer or Windows Explorer the window you open shows two new drives These drives are assigned the next available drive letters for example E F and so on If no letters are available because you have multiple external devices connected to your computer such as a card reader or a camera or because you are using mapped network drives the window does not display your handheld or the expansion card as a drive To display them remove some of the external devices connected to your computer or remove some of the mapped network drives Calendar selected the Today button but it does not show the correct date Make sure the Set Date box on the Date amp Time Preferences screen displays the current date created an event but it doesn t appear in Week View e f scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen scroll down to see if the event appears farther down the screen e If you have two or more events with the same start time the events appear as multiple ba
409. r your computer from the icon on the task bar in the lower right corner of your computer screen list Select the HotSync icon to begin b Select Launch HotSync in step 4 synchronization c Select HotSync to synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Now you can easily synchronize with your computer wirelessly Tungsten T5 Handheld 266 Once you have set up your PC as a trusted device you can set up your handheld and desktop computer to synchronize wirelessly g To access the Internet through the desktop computer s network connection you must allow Internet Sharing on your computer For more information see the documentation that came with the computer or the operating system computer 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Open the PC Setup dialog box a Select Setup Devices b Select PC Setup c Select PC Connection d Select Next Select a PC and select OK The Discovery icon 3 PC Setup To set up a connection or wireless HotSync tap below A Set up a wireless conneciton and data service for your PC Bluetooth HotSync Set up your PC for Bluetooth HotSync Discovery Results i Show Nearby devices Select aPC CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Setting up a connection to your Windows desktop appears to indicate that the discovery process is active If your PC did not show up on the discovery results select Find Mo
410. r handheld still does not respond after a reset check your third party applications for incompatible applications don t see anything on my handheld s screen e Press an application button to ensure that your handheld is turned on e If your handheld was exposed to cold make sure it is at room temperature e Charge your handheld e Perform a soft reset If your handheld still doesn t turn on perform a hard reset Tungsten T5 Handheld 588 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions get a warning message telling me my handheld memory is full Tip The storage volume refers to your handheld s program memory If you get a message that your When you purge or delete program memory is full try the following items you are given the option to save an archive copy on your computer the next time you synchronize e If you have installed additional applications on your handheld remove them to recover memory e Purge items from Calendar and Tasks This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from the memory of your handheld e Delete unused memos photos and other items or save them to an expansion card e Move infrequently used applications to the Applications folder on the internal drive Note that some applications must be installed in program memory in order to run correctly My handheld keeps turning itself off Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity This period can be
411. re to search again Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 267 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Tip To access the Internet 4 Choose to add the PC as a trusted device or not through the desktop computer s network Yes Goto step 5 connection you must allow Internet Sharing on No Go to step 6 your computer For more information see the 5 documentation that came amp OPTIONAL Create a BluetoothSecurity with the computer or the trusted connection operating system Enter passkey for a Select Next b Enter the passkey number for your PC and select OK 6 amp OPTIONAL Setup your PC PC Set username and password SEL Enter the username and password for your PC a Enter the username and password for your PC and Username select Next Password 3 Service Name b If you don t want to use a BRAD username and password leave the fields blank and select Next 7 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 268 Before You Begin You must get the passkey username and password for the LAN from the system administrator LAN Acronym for local area network LAN refers to a local network that connects computers located in your home or business Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Setting up a connection to a network 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Open the PC Setup dialog box a Select Set
412. rea on your handheld With only a few minutes of practice you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing Writing in the Graffiti 2 input area You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area or you can turn on full screen writing and write anywhere on the screen Tungsten T5 Handheld 51 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip Your handheld has two different input area displays that you can use to enter Graffiti 2 characters To open them tap and hold Input on the status bar and then select the icon of the input area you want Select the top icon to open the onscreen keyboard Numerals Select Uppercase letters middle icon Lowercase letters Select Uppercase letters bottom icon straddling line Lowercase letters In either layout of the input area write lowercase letters uppercase letters and numbers in the sections shown If you write characters in the wrong area they are not recognized correctly and an incorrect character is written Using full screen writing When full screen writing is turned on you can write anywhere on the screen When full screen writing is turned off you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your handheld to recognize them Tungsten T5 Handheld 52 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip You can write letters or characters in the following areas You can choose whether the Graffiti 2 strokes you enter appear as white
413. rectly on your handheld You can also view carry and manage PowerPoint files on your handheld You can keep updated copies of the files on both your handheld and your computer to work on them in the most convenient location any time Benefits e Manage Word Excel and PowerPoint files on your handheld e Improve productivity by taking important docs spreadsheets and presentations with you on the go 174 CHAPTER 8 Tip The Documents application has a companion application on your computer called Documents To Go Use Documents To Go to move or copy files to the Documents folder on your handheld s internal drive when you synchronize For complete information on this application click the Documents To Go icon on your computer and then click Help or go to www dataviz com Tungsten T5 Handheld Managing Your Office Files How can create and manage Office files The Documents application provides powerful editing and file management features for Office files on your handheld What s more Documents makes it easy for you to share files between your computer and your handheld using either File Transfer or synchronization Here are some of the capabilities of Documents e View Word Excel and PowerPoint files in their native format DOC XLS or PPT no conversion needed e Create or edit a Word document or Excel spreadsheet on your handheld and save it in native format Create or edit a Po
414. red device remove any previous version s of Palm Desktop software e Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software Tungsten T5 Handheld 586 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Handheld IMPORTANT Do not open your handheld there are no serviceable parts inside Opening your handheld voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances want to see how much battery life have left A battery icon Gaal appears at the top of Favorites and Applications views Check the icon periodically to see if your handheld needs to be recharged If the battery becomes low a message appears on the screen prompting you to recharge the battery l m not sure when I need to recharge my handheld We recommend that you recharge your handheld for at least half an hour every day Ideally connect your handheld to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep My battery is drained The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained completely When you recharge your handheld all of your existing information both in program memory and on the internal drive should appear My battery drains too quickly You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following e Reduce the brightness of the display e Reduce the Auto off after interval e Use Keylock Preferences to prevent your handheld from being turned on accidentally e Minimize
415. remove an attachment from an email message select the attached file in the Attachments box and then select Delete Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 Attach the file a Select the Type pick list and then select the file type The VersaMail application displays all file types on your handheld that you can attach to an email message Or select to browse files on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card Attachments Attachments a Address vCard Application prc Appointment vCal Database pdb Documents Attachments ocalbusiness projects xls 24KB Memo Text Attach Ms Excel Photo Video Browse Files b Select the file that you want to attach and then select Add or Attach The selected file appears in the Attachments box Ay NOTE For some file types for example addresses or memos the files to attach appear in the box at the top of the Attachments screen For others for example Excel or Word files a new screen appears from which you can select the file to attach c Repeat steps a and b for each attachment you want to add and then select Done 4 Done 342 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching photos and videos Tip To attach a photo or video 1 from an expansion card select the card name from Open the Attachments screen the Album pick list a On the message screen open the menus Tip b Select Options and then select Attachment To select adja
416. requisites xxii 643 preset connections 544 546 preset delays 479 preset formats 529 previous arrow icon 25 Previous View icon Adobe Reader xx Previously Viewed pick list 418 primary location 501 502 507 510 printing expense reports 27 online documentation xx prioritizing tasks 223 234 privacy FAGs 609 privacy levels 470 privacy settings applications 49 calendar 154 173 contacts 136 information 468 memos 243 notes 253 tasks 236 voice memos 396 web pages 422 Private check box 469 profiles 11 16 program memory 75 synchronization and 76 viewing contents 599 programs See software applications Prompt command 559 prompts 558 protecting handheld 256 578 protecting information 467 469 477 protocol defined 283 Protocol pick list 283 Tungsten T5 Handheld proxy servers 425 426 punctuation marks 55 58 Punctuation Shift indicator 62 Punctuation Shift stroke 62 533 Purge Categories dialog box 458 Purge command 158 232 458 Purge dialog box 158 232 purging items 589 Q quarterly tasks 227 Query DNS check box 555 questions and answers 585 quick buttons location of 19 opening applications from 26 Quick Install icon 95 Quick Install software 28 93 597 Quick Install window 96 Quick Look Up icon 126 Quick Look Up line 126 Quick Tour 6 27 R radio 21 29 range peripheral connections 256 Read pick list 320 reading e mail 307 text messages 391 393 Real Music Store 209 RealOne Mobile Player a
417. rewall security layer Without a VPN you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the mail server You need to set up a VPN to access corporate email in either of the following situations e Your company s wireless local area network LAN is located outside the firewall e Your company s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall for example from a public location or at home Check with your company s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network The auto get mail with notification feature in the VersaMail application may not work with a VPN connection Also you cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use a VPN connection Tungsten T5 Handheld 280 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating an account The steps for creating an account are different depending on how you plan to send and receive email Wireless only If you plan only to send and receive email wirelessly from your handheld set up the account on your handheld by following the procedures below Synchronize only Windows only If you plan only to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer and never to send and receive email wirelessly from your handheld do not set up the account on your handheld Instead follow the steps for setting synchronization options on your computer later in th
418. rites and select VersaMail to return to the Inbox of the account you were in 4 Done Downloading large attachments Downloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your maximum message size or a message with multiple attachments whose total size exceeds your maximum message size requires some extra steps 1 To download a single attachment Get Message that exceeds the maximum The reiaalninamessoge message size and or attachment is 32K Do you want to continue to download a On the message screen select it Mere Yes b Select Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment c When downloading is complete the red paper clip icon appears and More is no longer displayed Save view or install the attachment Y Continued 339 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you open a message from the Drafts folder you must first select Edit before you can add an attachment Tungsten T5 Handheld 2 To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size a On the message screen tap the red paper clip icon b Select one of the following To view any downloaded attachments without downloading additional attachments Select No Save view or install the downloaded attachments To continue downloading all attachments Select Yes When downloading is complete the Attachments dialog box appears showing all downloaded attachmen
419. rives folders in Windows Explorer For example a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of the computer click a plus sign to the left and then insert the other end into your handheld of a folder name to view 7 the contents of a folder b Double click the File Transfer icon Re on the computer desktop to open the select multiple items File Transfer window The File Transfer window opens to display the using the Control or Shift contents of the internal drive on your handheld buttons on your c Access move or copy files from the File Transfer window to the computer keyboard or click the py p desktop Refresh button to view updated contemnis of the IMPORTANT Unlike Windows Explorer you cannot double click a file in File handheld s internal drive Transfer to open it If you double click a file you are prompted to save it to your or expansion card computer and then to open and work with the file on your computer After working on the file you can copy it or move it back to your handheld with File You can also manage files Transfer or folders by right clicking a file or folder name to open a menu 4 Done that lets you rename move copy delete and perform other tasks on the file or folder Tungsten T5 Handheld 102 CHAPTER 5 Tip When you use File Transfer or Drive Mode remember to bring your USB sync cable and AC charger with you so you can connect to other computers Tun
420. rkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Advarsel Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverand ren Varoitus Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner Waarschuwing Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd Wanneer deze leeg zijn moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA Uwaga Nie kroi lub przekluwa baterii ani nie wrzuca ich do ognia Mog si rozerwa lub wybuchn wydzielaj c truj ce rodki chemiczne Zu ytych baterii nale y pozbywa sie w spos b opisany przez producenta i zgodnie z miejscowymi przepisami MNN AND2 XP AMANDA NX Y9 NN OX MSLSIYNN NID W 7 NLN DXN ANT IW ANT NIDA nD NX Yonns w NSA mann OxXNnA MyMwn MIND Pown wr Static Electricity ESD and your palmOne handheld Electrostatic discharge ESD can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the bu
421. rn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus mytungstent5 Calendar Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours Customizing Changing the volume of other system sounds Support If you re having problems with World Clock or anything else on your handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 511 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld In this chapte ter Customizing your Favorites View Customizing the Application View Making the screen easier to read Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Setting the date and time Customizing the way you enter information Selecting sound settings Entering your owner information Conserving battery power Connecting your handheld to other devices Customizing network settings Setting up VPN Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Although customizing your handheld is optional it s like changing the preset radio stations in your car Since you re probably not driving around with the dealer s preset radio stations why not personalize your handheld too You can easily customize the sound levels fonts and screen colors on your handheld by using preferences and menus And preference settings can help extend the
422. rom e mail 328 loading last viewed 419 moving 404 moving through 402 opening 416 420 removing from History list 416 renaming saved 413 returning to recently visited 402 saving 413 423 setting autofill option for 421 setting display options for 403 specifying as Home 417 storing 423 viewing off line 412 413 viewing recently visited 416 viewing URLs for 401 Web Pro application accessing web pages 398 399 action bar icons for 402 as viewer 413 displaying bookmarked pages 406 407 displaying saved pages 414 opening 410 setting browser options 420 421 422 423 425 427 setting storage preferences 423 425 setting up proxy servers 426 troubleshooting 428 web services 544 web sites accessing 255 263 397 as additional resources xxii 17 browsing 263 398 416 navigating 402 405 palmOne technical support 17 related topics for 428 saving personal information for 422 setting browsing options for 420 421 422 427 websites browsing 26 week days 530 Week View 163 166 170 Week View icon 163 weekly events 142 weekly schedules 163 166 weekly tasks 226 228 Windows applications 80 Windows information accessing e mail 278 creating contacts 135 creating login scripts 557 creating notes 252 creating user profiles 12 described xxi displaying photos 201 displaying tasks 235 displaying videos 179 201 entering expense reports 460 handheld system requirements 2 importing 107 652 installing
423. rrency Pick list ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeese 453 Presetting the currency symbol 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeeceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 454 Creating a Currency SYMBOL sesini aonda aaa 455 Deleting EXPENSES ievssiadicecivensccncessanteiness aaadcune tees i ara EOE 457 Deleting an individual expense ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenneaaes 457 xiv Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting an entire category Of EXPENSES eeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeess 458 Customizing the expense liSt cccccceeceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeens 459 Working with Expense on your COMPUTEL eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeees 460 Related topissa Gudtonds Sades sedvducuatauabances A a 461 Chapter 21 Performing Calculations cseeee 462 Calculator DUttON iissa a a aaae Earias 463 VIEWING r cent calculations jsccssscsceascascned cccassacnagcdestecdeegeasstanciessscekecetatinets 464 Accessing different calculators ccccccccseseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessennaeeeeesnaaes 465 Related LODICS sssini p ea ea E E 466 Chapter 22 Keeping Your Information Private 467 Choosing a security level sinirika aina 468 Marking information as private ccccccccsssseeeessenseeesesenaeeesesenaneeesseenaes 469 Setting the level of privacy c cccccceccceceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeesesseeeeeesesseeeeeessseeeeeess 470 Hiding or masking private entries ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
424. rs starting at the same time in Week View To see the overlapping events select the individual bars or select Day View For more information see Finding events that overlap e If you marked the event as private check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records Tungsten T5 Handheld 601 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions Time zones don t appear on my Palm Desktop software Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones Only Outlook recognizes times zones set the global time zone preference but only some of my events are responding to my time zone change Only new events created after the preference is set are affected The events you created earlier without time zones do not have the time zone set You can_edit the earlier events to include a time zone created my event with a time zone but only that event is responding to my time zone change When you create an event with a time zone setting only that event is affected To have all events automatically include a time zone setting set the New events include time zones preference Memos l m having problems listing memos the way want to see them If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen open the Options menu and select Preferences Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize the memos on your
425. rtain fields by default You can customize the Contact Edit screen to display additional fields Gig Additional fields appear in a contact only if you enter info into them If you leave a field blank it does not appear the next 1 Press Contacts AE time you open the Contact Edit screen Also additional fields apply 2 only to the current contact you can duplicate contact Display additional contact fields a Select the contact you want and then select Edit information if you need to apply the same fields to multiple contacts Contact Edit Unfiled First name Lee b Select the plus button on the lower right corner of the Contact Edit screen easy Untied First name Lae ee A EEEE Company Exam A Each field type can be displayed a certain number of times up to a preset maximum Once you reach this maximum the field type no longer __ Custom 8 appears on the pop up Select here Details Custom 9 list For example you can Note icon display up to seven Phone Email fields c Select the field you want displayed from the list The field appears in a preset location on the Contact Edit screen Select the Note icon next v Done to the plus button to adda note to the contact Tungsten T5 Handheld 121 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting contact field types You can select the types of phone numbers work home mobile pager and so on as well as specify the instant
426. s click Make Default If you do not select this box the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize Thereafter information is updated according to the default setting Synchronize the files 4 Click OK and then close the Conduit Settings window 4 Done Installing applications to your handheld Use Quick Install Windows or the Send To Handheld droplet to install applications on your handheld when you synchronize The applications are stored in program memory and are optimized for use on the handheld Installing applications from a Windows computer If you installed Palm Desktop software you automatically have palmOne Quick Install on your Windows computer This tool makes it easy to install applications and files when you synchronize You can install applications by using Quick Install from within Palm Desktop software by dragging and dropping onto the palmOne Quick Install icon or by using the commands in the palmOne Quick Install window 93 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Using Quick Install from within Palm Desktop software WINDOWS ONLY Tip A confirmation dialog 1 boxshowswhetherithe Open Palm Desktop software items will be copied to your handheld or to an expansion card You can 2 Copy the application choose which handheld al will receive the items by a Click the Quick Install icon in the launch bar at the a selecting the username in lef
427. s 109 defaults 523 information 476 478 582 restricting handheld connections 256 restrictions 579 587 retrying auto get mail setting 305 e mail delivery 317 Internet connections 411 right arrow controls 25 645 rotary dialing 547 rotating the screen 23 icon on status bar 22 running out of memory 113 running out of space 568 S Save Page dialog box 413 saving appointments 139 battery power 541 contacts 120 127 files 412 information 41 109 592 memos 238 241 notes 245 photos 179 synchronization settings 93 tasks 223 231 232 web cookies 422 web pages 413 423 scheduled sending retry e mail 280 schedules 137 159 168 525 See also appointments calendar scheduling appointments 138 139 auto get mail 300 301 305 backup and synchronization 8 79 events 138 140 145 170 reminders 120 138 repeating tasks 225 227 untimed events 141 scheduling conflicts 137 Tungsten T5 Handheld screen adding photos as backgrounds 168 513 517 adjusting brightness 518 587 aligning 538 blank 588 caring for 578 caution for 20 changing colors of 521 changing fonts for 518 519 clearing 245 frozen 579 588 landscape and portrait views 23 maintaining 578 moving through 19 41 navigational controls for 25 not responding 541 579 588 overview 24 scrolling through 25 tapping elements on 24 533 538 578 viewing information on 19 writing area on 56 60 screen rotation 23 icon on status bar 22 scripts 561
428. s in 25 43 loading user profiles 15 16 Local Area Networks See networks locating contacts 126 controls 49 files 96 information 48 overlapping events 166 Location field 146 Location pick list 505 526 location settings World Clock 501 504 506 location specific preferences 525 530 locations deleting 507 Lock Handheld dialog box 478 lock icons 446 575 lock options 479 locking handheld buttons 541 handhelds 477 480 540 log files 84 logging in to e mail accounts 280 415 logging in to network servers 557 Login Script dialog box 557 558 login scripts 557 560 638 Look Up line Contacts 126 Lookup screen 314 losing handheld 540 information xxi 45 passwords 476 477 Lotus Notes 345 349 low batteries 5 587 lowercase letters 55 533 M Mac information creating contacts 135 creating notes 252 creating user profiles 13 described xxi displaying tasks 235 displaying videos 179 entering information 82 handheld system requirements 3 installing handheld software 7 97 99 111 mobile connections 259 opening calendars 172 synchronizing handheld 87 91 synchronizing with user profiles 16 transferring MP3 files to handheld 207 troubleshooting problems 586 writing memos 242 Mac OS X systems 97 magnifying glass Adobe Reader xx Mail Client pick list 350 mail databases 381 mail folders 322 324 355 mail servers 280 284 Tungsten T5 Handheld Mail Servers command 295 368 Mail Servers screen 296 369 370
429. s in Note Pad when full screen writing is on 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Create a note Category box Tip a Use the stylus to write your Time srik Select the pen selector to note directly on the handheld change the pen width or screen Scroll bar to select the eraser To clear the screen completely select the note anywhere but the title open the Edit menu and select Clear Note b Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title using Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard Eraser Pen selector Did You Know 3 amp OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by selecting the Category box Prevent others from in the upper right corner and then selecting a category viewing your notes by marking them as private 4 Select Done 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the note Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Tungsten T5 Handheld 245 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Choosing the pen and paper background colors 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad L 2 Open the Select Colors dialog box a Select Done to display the Note Pad list b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Preferences d Select Color Select Colors Note Pad Preferences Sort by v Manual Alarm Sound Alarm M Confirm note delete Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 246 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in
430. s setting 510 Show Private Records dialog box 471 Show videos in Slide Show option 186 side panel controls 20 sidebars documentation xxii signatures 289 316 Silent profile 539 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol See SMTP servers sketching 244 Slide Show Delay pick list 186 slide shows 180 186 193 slider 25 small fonts 519 520 small icons 516 Smart Addressing feature 315 378 SMS application additional information for 396 benefits of 387 installing 27 opening 388 sending text messages 388 SMS messages 388 SMS messaging 27 SMTP servers 284 295 Snooze setting 509 soft resets 579 588 software See also specific application accessing additional 17 30 647 adding additional 110 568 included on handheld 26 installing 7 28 110 third party applications and 8 Solitaire 30 Song Details dialog box 220 song lists 209 211 deleting 218 editing 216 naming 213 removing items on 217 reordering music on 217 selecting items 212 215 troubleshooting 604 songs 203 568 See also music Sort by date option 195 Sort by name option 195 Sort by option 320 Sort by pick list 250 Sort by type option 195 Sort manually option 195 Sort order option 320 sorting contacts 136 expenses 459 memos 243 notes 250 photos 195 videos 195 sound files See also audio files music files sounds See also music voice memos changing alarm 248 Tungsten T5 Handheld setting alarm 153 171 234 509 setting preferences for 539 Sounds amp Alerts
431. s sisicscssscsicsocstecesivesssesnducce ionidan ie 435 Related TOP CSisivss cscinsinaucvesissacieteitsadeeasdseceneanandeactedasananeesssseaeeunehte sacateanssacd 436 Chapter 19 Sharing Information cette 437 Using the Send command sssccecesssteeeeceenneeeeeeeennaeeesseenaeeeessenateessennaes 438 Sending information from within an application using BIUStOOth technology cassis sadcdes cdbes hens cand denne andada aiias aaia aiaia 438 Sending A CALCGOLY sesssivsissceccsssssceccvecssecedieeescediavsssendvedsssendieedsseenes 440 Sending AN APPLICATION eeeeeceseeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeessenaneeeeeenaaes 441 Using the Send command with the VersaMail application 442 Using the Send command with SMS ecccceesseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeees 442 Beaming erecode n aa syancuauehieceduncenteeeastuusaedes 443 Beaming information from within an application ssssssssssesseeessse 443 Beaming a categOry sriid eean a aa AAN EENE 445 Beaming an applicationi essssisecicesstccacgucss chan o uaia aaa ai aa 446 Other ways of sharing information ssssssssssssssssssessssssssinsrnnesrnsssrnssnnnssennns 448 Related topi S sstn ga as aiaa Eaa aE EOE 449 Chapter 20 Managing Your Expenses ceeeeeeee 450 Adding AN EXPENSE 1 ccccccccccccesecesesenseeessesssseeeececececeececeueeeesaesesesuuaaaaaananeaes 451 CHOOSING CUTFENCY OPLIONS ssizsissicnccnesssaadnacesscctacetesatensndessansdancssientdentensesay 453 Customizing the cu
432. s that you want recipients to see and reply to on your email messages only if it is different from the email address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look as if the email came from the address you entered BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send to another email address The blind copy email address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your desktop email account enter that email address d Select OK Ny Continued 374 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you need to enter new 7 y meer Manage advanced outgoing mail server SMTP settings authentication information enter your a On the Mail Servers screen select Details username tap the Password box enter a b Select the Options pick list and then select Advanced Outgoing password and then 3 s Mail S i select OK Check with on Server Mail Servers Ci Options Address Servers Options w Advanced Outgoing your email SEIVICE Port Number Incoming Mail Port Number provider for O Use Secu Penne eee N O Use Secure Connection SSL authentication username M My serve neler f N M My server requires and password authentication E
433. sage or email message b Select the task you want to perform on the file or folder and follow any onscreen instructions 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 39 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Sorting Files You can sort your files and folders by icon name date or size 1 2 Tungsten T5 Handheld Open Files Select your sort options Sort display Select the column you want to sort by From the left side of the screen the columns are icon name and size date Sort in ascending or descending order Select the column you want to sort by to switch between ascending and descending sort order Switch between sorting by date or by size Tap and hold the rightmost column until the heading you want appears 4 Done Sort by name me oE sor oy mm 2 ea P date or size JI Far30 mp3 472K JI Move20 mp3 394K SI SportsTimeTonight2 316K 40 CHAPTER 3 Did You Know If you use a command to open a file from within an application only files that can be opened by that application are displayed For example in RealPlayer only music files such as MP3 or RMJ files are displayed Tip You must use the stylus to tap icons in the input area or on the status bar Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Opening files and folders from within an application In certain applications for example Documents palmOne Media and RealPlayer from palmOne you can open a
434. sages downloaded to your handheld over a network connection Synchronize Applies a filter to Filters Synchronize fa Sue O Sales M 7 Seminar Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the receiver address contains seminar messages downloaded to your handheld when you synchronize b Check or uncheck the filter boxes to select the filters you do and don t want to use for subsequent email transactions c Select OK 4 Done 366 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Editing or deleting a filter Edit a filter to change 1 either its name or any of its criteria Select the folder to edit or delete a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Filters c Select the name of the filter 2 Do one of the following Edit Revise your entry in the Name field your selections in the pick lists and or the text in the edit line Select OK Delete Select Delete select Yes to confirm the deletion and then select OK 3 Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 367 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail You can configure advanced mail settings such as server information incoming and outgoing mail Tungsten T5 Handheld server options and more for each email account 1 Select the account whose settings you want to manage a In the
435. screen select the word To b On the Recipient List screen select Lookup address 2 Enter the address Address Lookup Joanna Kwan ikwan jkwan net a On the Address Lookup Tsai Lee tsailee example com screen select the address you want and then select Add b Select Lookup and repeat step a for each address you want to add 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 314 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Smart Addressing Smart Addressing completes a recognized email address Smart Addressing automatically fills in fields when the recipient s name and email address are in your Contacts list Tip Smart Addressing is turned on by default To turn off Smart Addressing open the Options menu select Preferences and then check the Advanced tab Deselect the Enable Smart Addressing box Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 On the New Message screen tap in the To field Start entering the person s name such as Joe Smith Once the name is recognized from your Contacts list the name and email address are automatically completed on the recipient list For example if you have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in Contacts and no other names starting with J once you type Joe the entry Joe Smith is completed with the correct email address Select the name when it appears 4 Done New Message Joanna Kwan lt jkwan jkwan net gt Joe Sadusky lt joe jmswordsm
436. scroll bar 25 scrolling 42 45 accelerating 43 from screen to screen 25 list screens 43 menus 45 record screens 44 to dates 138 SD memory cards 568 SDIO accessories 568 SDIO cards 279 568 searching for information 48 126 searching web pages 401 secondary locations 504 507 510 secure connections 287 290 359 375 385 Secure Digital input output SDIO 568 Secure Socket Layer 287 290 359 385 security 551 security levels 468 security options 468 applications 49 calendar 173 contacts 136 handheld 260 memos 243 notes 253 tasks 236 voice memos 396 Security Preferences dialog box changing passwords 473 creating passwords 472 locking handhelds 540 masking private entries 470 Select a Color Theme dialog box 514 521 522 531 Select button navigator 43 45 Select Colors dialog box 246 Select Font dialog box 310 320 519 Select Media screen 343 Select User dialog box 8 83 selecting alarm sounds 509 alternate stroke shapes 534 background colors 246 521 clock display options 510 646 command buttons 25 communications protocol 555 connections 551 currency options 453 454 455 home pages 417 419 information 70 Internet Service Providers ISPs 551 items in lists 25 43 menu commands 45 46 47 music 212 214 options in dialog boxes 44 security levels 468 synchronization settings 83 selecting information 19 selection highlight 42 43 self help resources 615 Send command 559 Send CR command 559 Send e mai
437. se Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window e Viewing copying and deleting notes e Editing note details and titles e Setting an alarm for a note e Marking notes private e Showing masking and hiding private notes Printing notes Changing between the List and note Preview views e Sorting notes e Sharing notes WINDOWS ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Note Pad on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer double click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder Tungsten T5 Handheld 252 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus mytungstents Sharing e Beaming notes to other Palm Powered devices e Sending notes to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless Support technology on your handheld If you re having problems with Note Pad or with VersaMail Sending notes as attachments to email messages anything else
438. select a photo attachment on the list the Viewer pick list appears containing the names of the photo viewing applications Select the pick list and then select the application you want to use to view the photo attachment If there is only one viewer registered for the attachment file type the viewer is shown without a list Palm OS application or database file PRC or PDB Select the name of the attachment you want and then select Install The file is installed automatically Compressed Zip file Select the name of the attachment you want and then select Unzip The file uncompresses and the files it contains are listed Select the name of the file you want to view or install and then select View or Install Attachments uoted txtquoted txt 655B Album db 308 B friends jpg 45 KB Viewer v Memos Viewer pick list Type Text Button displays View Install or Unzip depending on the attachment file type Y Continued 338 Tip When you see both a red paper clip icon and the More button in the Message screen that means that some attachments to this message were downloaded but others remain to be downloaded Tungsten T5 Handheld 5 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages When you finish with the attachment do one of the following Done button appears on screen Select Done This returns you to the Attachments dialog box where you can select another attachment No Done button appears Go to Favo
439. selector 245 pen widths 245 percentage button Calculator 463 performance 578 period character 532 peripheral devices See external devices personal computers connecting to 8 255 267 copying information to 448 customizing connections for 547 managing schedules from 172 overwriting information on 90 92 preinstalled software for 28 removing Palm Desktop software 114 setting usernames and passwords 268 642 synchronization options for 85 87 synchronizing with 79 83 265 598 troubleshooting File Transfer 599 troubleshooting synchronization problems 593 updating information from 90 92 personal digital assistants PDAs 18 personal information 422 471 personalizing contact information 123 personalizing handheld 1 17 See also customizing phone connections 258 262 phone drivers 544 Phone Link Updater application 258 Phone Lookup 68 126 phone numbers adding speed dial entries for 433 entering 430 432 434 554 getting from contacts 68 122 126 organizing emergency 491 redialing 431 sharing 20 temporary storage for 244 phone settings 551 Phone Setup dialog box 258 Phone Setup option 258 phones 272 544 547 See also conference calls mobile phones photo albums arranging photos in 193 195 creating 191 moving photos to other 194 removing photos 199 scrolling through 190 Tungsten T5 Handheld selecting 192 Photo Details screen 190 photos adding notes to 190 adding to albums 192 adding to contac
440. set at 30 seconds or at one two or three minutes Check the Auto off after setting on the Power Preferences screen My handheld is not making any sounds Check the System Alarm and Game Sound settings The current date and time are incorrect The current date and time are tied to the Location setting If you change the date and time without changing the Location setting the current date and time may appear incorrect Tungsten T5 Handheld 589 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions My application is responding slowly WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using File Transfer and you are working with a large application on your handheld such as a game the application may perform slowly Wait until the file transfer is finished to use the application Moving around can t find the icon want in Applications View Select the category pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select All You may need to scroll down a bit but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your handheld The application you want may be installed on your handheld s internal drive To view these applications select the category pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select Internal Drive Some of the applications that come with your handheld are not preinstalled You need to install these extra applications from the CD If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion
441. sharing 236 viewing due dates for 234 viewing overdue 234 Tasks application adding tasks 223 225 227 additional information for 236 categorizing information in 491 getting help with 235 importing information for 107 marking completed tasks 230 opening 27 223 overview 222 saving information for 232 saving information in 223 securing contents 236 setting display options for 229 setting preferences for 233 234 transferring information to 68 troubleshooting 236 604 Tasks icon 27 Tasks list 159 229 231 233 TDA files 107 technical assistance xxii 17 177 396 616 Technical Support office 616 technical terms xxii telephone numbers See phone numbers testing e mail accounts 290 text adjusting fade setting for 514 517 changing color of 168 521 changing screen fonts for 518 copying and pasting 71 entering 51 66 entering abbreviations for 535 536 formatting e mail 308 resizing 239 searching for 48 selecting 48 70 viewing against photos 168 text files 107 335 text messages managing 27 opening 391 sending 255 387 388 viewing 391 392 393 395 third party applications 8 588 611 612 thousands separator 530 Thumbnail icon 182 Thumbnail view Media 180 182 thumbnails photos 168 513 517 TIF files 335 TIFF files 179 649 time blocking out periods of 142 145 changing 502 checking 500 displaying current 504 displaying free 168 displaying specific periods of 168 entering current 64 entering display opti
442. sks 6 2 Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date 3 Open the Change Repeat dialog box a Select Details b Select the Repeat pick list and select Other Change Repeat i Task Details il None Day Week MRI Priority Fixed Schedule Category v Personal Every 4 Month s Due Date None N Endon w NoEnd Date Alarm Dai il Repeat by Repeat Every other week Private Every month The 6th of every 4th month Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 227 CHAPTER 11 MELECI A COTE Ey Tip To schedule an annual task such as decorating for a holiday on the first Sunday of a particular month select Month as b the repeat unit enter 12 on the Every line and then select Day as the Repeat By setting 4 f Set the repeat interval Select Day Week Month or Year as the repeat unit Select Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current task or select After Completed to base the due date on the date you complete this task With this option if you complete this task early or late the due date for the next task adjusts accordingly Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats Select the End on pick list and select an end date if needed If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a select the day of the week the task repeats If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Month in step a select Day to select the
443. spreadsheets PowerPoint presentations Method 1 Use the Documents To Go application on your computer Synchronize to install the files to the Documents folder on your handheld s internal drive Method 2 Use File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac to copy an entire folder structure of files to your handheld s internal drive This allows you to keep all of your project folders together with the same structure you ve created on your computer Photos and videos Method 1 Use the desktop Media application from within Palm Desktop Windows or drag the files to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop Mac Synchronize to install the files to the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive Method 2 Use File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac to copy an entire folder structure of photos and videos to your handheld s internal drive This allows you to keep all of your photos and videos together with the same structure you ve created on your computer Music MP3 files Method 1 Use the RealPlayer desktop application Windows to transfer the files to the Music folder on your handheld s internal drive or drag the file to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop Mac and then synchronize to install the files to your handheld Method 2 Use File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac to copy an entire folder structure of music files to your handheld s internal drive This allows you to
444. sssssssisssessseserrnnnnnnnsnnenernennnnnnn 494 Placing an application into a category s ssssssssssssssssssrrrrnrnsrssssesrens 496 Viewing information by category ccccecccceceeeseseeseeeeseeeeeeeessseeeeeessennaes 497 Related topi Sissin naaa iaia s acdy 498 Chapter 24 Managing Clock Settings eeee 499 Checking the current date and time cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeese 500 Setting the primary location 0 ccceccecceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeaeeens 501 Setting the date and time for the primary location cccceeee 502 Choosing secondary locations for other time ZONES ccceeeeeereeeeees 504 Modifying the locations liste scccccidsscccceasssecceadesseccedsssseenceedvesenceeeesenne 505 Adding NEW IOCALIONS sssciessenszsiesesdetttncsteinaietandtendienstenedaneesveetinevesetees 505 Deleting lOCATIOMN siirsin dinni aiad 507 Setting the alarm ClOCK ccccccccssseeceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseceeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseeeaeeess 508 Responding to the alarm Clo K yiiissiiccssecits cccessnndectedeasecasavecedecuapeevzese 509 Changing the clock display ssiccssssisscinsxcantuines tus tacetesetgadebe seeds dancaktendaieearnia 510 Related TOD CSissecacsecesshesvesnsd aaa naa aaraa adaa aA 511 Chapter 25 Customizing Your Handheld 00 512 Customizing your Favorites View csssccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeneaeeaeaeeeeeeeeeess 513 Changing the background photo in
445. st Home G 35 alle af CHAPTER 3 Tip You can also open Files by selecting Files in Applications View Tip If you have an expansion card sold separately inserted in your handheld s expansion slot select the card icon in Files to view the contents of the card Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Using Files The Files application enables you to easily open view and move among the files and folders on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion slot To open Files press the Files button on the front of your handheld Files Card icon Fey a internal Drive J S ra EEE Applications Documents Music Photos amp Videos 36 CHAPTER 3 Did You Know If you select a file from within Files it automatically opens in the correct application on your handheld If there is no application for that file a beep alert sounds Tip Tap and hold the stylus ona file or folder to open a menu of actions you can do with that item copy delete and so on Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Navigate within Files by doing any of the following Folder up Folder pick list ZA Music fi Z E Top level folder amp Files Internal Drive 2 W Es i O Internal Drive Applications Documents Select folder fi Music
446. stalled on your handheld or have upgraded from an earlier model of a Palm Powered device perform the following procedure to remove all third party applications from your handheld Once you have removed all of the third party applications you can install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem The following procedures erase all information from your handheld Before removing the applications synchronize the information in your handheld s program memory with your computer and back up the contents of your handheld s internal drive to your computer 1 On a Windows computer open the palmOne folder on your computer and then open the user folder for your handheld User folder names are often abbreviated as last name first initial On a Mac computer locate the folder Home Documents Palm Users lt handheld name gt Backups Tungsten T5 Handheld 612 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions 2 Select and drag the Backup folder to the desktop Make sure you see the Backup folder on the desktop 3 On a Windows computer close the palmOne folder 4 Perform a hard reset Synchronize your handheld with your computer to restore info to your handheld s program memory and use File Transfer Windows or Drive Mode Mac to restore info to your handheld s internal drive 5 Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations 6 Do one of the following e If your handheld still has problems r
447. t area Mark Stroke Mark Stroke Period Ampersand A Comma 3 Carriage return Apostrophe At Space Pan Quotation mark T Question mark 6 Tab e2 Exclamation 17 point e2 Tungsten T5 Handheld 58 Mark Period Comma Tilde Dash Plus Asterisk Tungsten T5 Handheld Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Stroke Mark Backslash _ Slash N Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Equal sign 2 Stroke m CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld 59 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 accented characters For accented characters write the letter on the left side of the input area and then write the accent on the right side of the input area ale x Tip Get help writing any of the Graffiti 2 characters in most applications Open Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area the Edit mien aid select Accent Stroke Accent Stroke Graffiti 2 Help Acute Dieresis ee a a Grave Circumflex A Tilde Ring N l C Tungsten T5 Handheld 60 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 gestures Write gestures on LEFT side or across the middle of input area Gesture Stroke Gesture Stroke Cut g Paste g Copy zl Undo e gt Tungsten T5 Handheld 61 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters
448. t body text of the message is downloaded up to the maximum message size you select and download new email i 3 messages Switching among email accounts To view the email in an account you must switch to that account and then get the email 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail M4 2 Select the account for which you want to get email a In your Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Accounts and then select the name of the account you want 3 Select the folders pick list and then select Inbox if the Inbox is not displayed 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 297 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Getting email messages If you have set up the 1 account to synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer only you must 2 Choose whether to get message subjects only or full messages synchronize your handheld with your a Open the menus computer to download messages to your b Select Accounts and then select the account you want handheld Go to Favorites and select VersaMail amp c Select Get Mail or Get amp Send VersaMail 070 You can deactivate the Get Mail Options dialog box by using VersaMail Get Mail Options fi Preferences i Subjects Only d If you select Messages the first 5KB of each d New Get Mail Display message is downloaded You can change the maximum size for d In the Get Mail Options dialo
449. t does 1 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EB not work when All is selected from the pick list 2 Sort photos and videos iak lict i Sort by Dat a Select the pick list in the upper SO EENE right corner and select the Sort by Size album containing the photos Sort manually H Beam Album and or videos you want to sort SPS oe Copy Album to Card b Open the menus 8 2 Manage Albums c Select Album and then select one of the following Sort by Date Lists photos and videos from earliest to most recent date Select Sort by Date again to list items from most recent to earliest date Sort by Name Lists photos and videos by name in ascending A Z order Select Sort by Name again to list items by name in descending Z A order Sort by Size Lists photos and videos from smallest to largest file size Select Select Sort by Size again to list items from largest to smallest file size Sort manually Lets you tap a photo or video and drag the stylus to where you want the item to appear A dotted black line indicates the position of the item 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 195 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Personalizing a photo Did You Know Use the drawing tool to add a personal touch to a photo Create multicolored art Select a color and draw on a photo and then 1 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos ES select a different color and draw some more Each drawing keeps its
450. t information to a memo using Phone Lookup Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Keeping memos private by turning on security options e Beaming memos to other Palm Powered devices e Sending memos to other Bluetooth devices using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Sending memos as attachments to email messages Sending memos as part of a text message Answers to frequently asked questions about Memos 243 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad In this chapter Creating a note Viewing and editing a note Deleting a note Working with Note Pad on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Need to jot down a phone number or a reminder to yourself Avoid fumbling for scraps of paper and write important reminders in Note Pad You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil Note Pad gives you a place to draw freehand and take notes in your personal handwriting which is even faster and more flexible than creating a memo on your handheld Benefits of Note Pad e No learning curve e Capture information in the moment e A picture is worth a thousand words e See reminders when you set alarms 244 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Creating a note Before You Begin Make sure full screen 1 writing is turned off You cannot create or edit note
451. t just places the value in memory Clear the last number you entered m Tip Open the Options menu and select Advanced Mode to display a scientific calculator Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over D E BEHE Enter a number and then select this button to change it to a percentage a Enter a number and then select this button to calculate the square root of the number lt Enter a number and then select this button to make it negative 5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 463 CHAPTER 21 Performing Calculations Viewing recent calculations Did You Know View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly Viewing recent calculations is helpful when double checking 1 the math in your checkbook register Go to Applications and select Calculator Did You Know 2 Open the History dialog box History Calculator History also has these functions a Open the menus Clear Select to clear the b Select Edit and then select calculator s history Show History 7 Copy Select to copy the c Select OK history of calculations Then paste them into Y Done another application by opening the Edit menu and selecting Paste in the other application Tungsten T5 Handheld 464 CHAPTER 21 Performing Calculations Accessing different calculators Do you need a scientific or financial calculator Your calculator has a variety of modes that can help y
452. t of the window the User drop down box in the upper right corner b Drag and drop the application onto the Quick Install window Did You Know A mn sania iisi c When the confirmation dialog box appears confirm ou can move multiple your username the application name and the applications into the destination and then click OK Quick Install window to have them ready for installation the next time 3 you synchronize Synchronize to install the file to your handheld 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 94 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Tip You can also install files on your handheld by right clicking them on your computer Select Send To palmOne Quick Install and the files are placed on your handheld the next time you synchronize Tip If there are still files in the list after you synchronize they were not installed Open the application associated with this file and then synchronize again Tungsten T5 Handheld Using the palmOne Quick Install icon WINDOWS ONLY 1 2 Copy or download the application s or file s you want to install onto your computer Drag and drop the files onto the Quick Install icon a From My Computer or Windows Explorer select the file s or folder that you want to install b Drag and drop the file s or folder onto the Quick Install icon on the desktop c Select your username and click OK Synchronize
453. t on the 5 way or select the Quick Connect icon G at the top of the screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box Quick Connect iy Lee Tsai Mobile 555 2349191 SSMS 555 2349191 amp 4J Email tsailee example com obile 555 234 9191 mail tsailee example com c Select the type of connection you want For example select a phone number to dial the number on your mobile phone or select an email address to open the email application to a new message containing that address in the To field 4 Done 131 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Customizing Quick Connect settings You can specify which application opens when you choose a Contacts record field and whether to add a prefix to each phone number Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Customize Quick Connect settings Select the contact you want Press Right on the 5 way or Press Contacts faz Settings O Number Prefix Dial Phone Dialer v Messages select the Quick Connect icon 7 Vers Mail Gp at the top of the screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box v None Available v None Available z None Available Select Settings and enter the settings you want Number prefix Check the box and enter a prefix to add a prefix to all dialed phone numbers N NOTE A prefix is not added to any number that begins with a character All other fields Select each pick list and select the application you want
454. t the up or down arrow to move the song up or down one slot 4 Select Done and then select Done two more times 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 217 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Deleting a playlist 1 On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music D 2 Open the playlist you want to delete a Tap Playlists b Select the playlist you want to delete Electric Angel Ambient Classic Rock Electric Angel Jazz Electric Angel Awakening Electric Angel Falling Angel Electric Angel Gather The Women Electric Angel Through The Mist 3 Delete the list a Select Delete List b Select Yes in the confirmation dialog box c Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 218 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tungsten T5 Handheld Viewing song info You can view details for the song that is currently playing 1 2 On your handheld go to Favorites and then select Music D Select a song to play and view To play and view the current song tap Play To play and view a different song tap Songs and select a song from the list To play and view a song that is not located in the Songs list open the menus select Play Folder and navigate to the song you want Ny Continued RealOne Information icon 219 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Did You Know You can also view song details by opening the Music menu and selecting Song Details Tungsten
455. tallation process Install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows computer to the internal flash drive on your handheld or to an expansion card This application installs automatically during the initial CD installation process Keep the Getting Started Guide with you and view it on your handheld You can also install this file on your handheld to carry it with you on the go it installs to the Palm Desktop Help automatically during the initial CD installation process Listen to newspapers books public radio language instruction and more Windows only download requires Internet connection additional fees may apply Companion desktop software Windows only for the RealPlayer application on your handheld Lets you convert CDs into MP3 files that you can listen to on your handheld Both Mac and Windows users can use RealPlayer on the handheld Work with the palmOne Media desktop application Direct X is required for Media to prepare videos for playback on your handheld Windows Media Player is required for Media to play videos that have been prepared for playback on your handheld If you do not have Windows Media Player or Direct X on your computer use the link to download these applications Windows only download requires Internet connection additional fees may apply 29 CHAPTER 2 Basics QuickTime Java Technologies link tt Handmark Solitaire Adobe Reader for Palm OS eRe
456. ter the first send attempt fails Keep in to the mail server before mind the following regarding automatic send retry sending mail It also doesn t work if you have e Automatic send retry occurs only if you select Send to send the message manually It doesn t configured the security work if you select Get amp Send preferences on your handheld to encrypt e To select automatic send retry select Yes in the dialog box notifying you that manual send has databases on the failed nae e If automatic send retry succeeds the message is moved to the Sent folder Tip PEN e f automatic send retry fails after the third try you have to send the message manually Select the notification to view a detailed error message Viewing the Send retry notifications error message deletes the If automatic send retry fails after the third try a notification appears on the Reminders screen notification from the Send retry notification features include the following Reminders screen e A broken envelope icon EJ shows that automatic send retry has failed A separate notification appears for each email account e You can choose to disable notifications for send retry failures e The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an email account no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account Tungsten T5 Handheld 317 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Modifying messages in
457. tering Information on Your Handheld Deleting information Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command Tip Delete information with 1 Graffiti 2 writing Select the information and then draw a line from right to left in the input area 2 Select the information you want to delete Delete the information a Open the menus b Select Edit and then select Cut 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 72 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Related topics My Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics Make your handheld uniquely yours For great tips software accessories and more visit www palmOne com Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus mytungstents Sharing Beaming or sending information to another Palm Powered device Customizing e Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters Support If you re having problems e Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts entering information or with Bn Common Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information anything else on your Questions handheld go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 Tungsten T5 Handheld 73 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer In this cha Program memory and the internal drive How can work with information When would I use each method Synchronizing information Us
458. th View 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 165 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Finding events that overlap When an event starts before a previous event finishes the events overlap You can spot events that overlap in Week View and in Day View ORAA 4s Mi w s q4 Week 19 gt F S 800 eSwim g00 9 10 11 12 13 Tf 10 00 i i Overlapping events 12 00 2 00 4 00 CO 6 00 Customizing your calendar Control the appearance of your Calendar screens Select display options for the Agenda View Day View and Month View The options you select for each view apply only to that view You can also choose alarm and start and end time settings Tungsten T5 Handheld 166 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Customizing display options for your calendar 1 2 Tungsten T5 Handheld Press Calendar Oss Open the Display Options dialog Diepiny Opcane O box Default View Agenda a Open the menus Ee Day Month M Show Due Tasks M Show Messages M Background i b Select Options and then select Display Options Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar Y Continued 167 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip If the text is difficult to see 4 against your new background select a different Color Theme to Set any of the following Agenda View display options Show Due Tasks Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are ov
459. the box System requirements Step 1 Charging your handheld Step 2 Turning on your handheld for the first time Step 3 Installing your software Step 4 Connecting your handheld to your computer Switching to another desktop software application Using user profiles Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Congratulations on the purchase of your new palmOne Tungsten T5 handheld You re about to discover so many things about your handheld that will help you better manage your life and have fun too As you become more familiar with your handheld you ll probably personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours While you re likely to get years of enjoyment from your handheld it takes only four easy steps to get up and running Benefits e Start using your handheld right away e Establish a link between your handheld and your computer e Set up your handheld for optimal use CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer What s in the box Key Term USB sync cable Palm Desktop software E The software that lets you enter update review and synchronize information on your computer Flip cover AC charger Tungsten T5 handheld by Software installation CD palmOne System requirements The installation CD contains Palm Desktop software and other applications you need to set up and use your handheld To use Palm Deskt
460. the desktop software you want to use Tungsten T5 Handheld 594 CHAPTER 28 Common Questions I can t synchronize my handheld with Microsoft Outlook WINDOWS ONLY NOTE If you choose to synchronize your handheld with Outlook information from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with Outlook Other information such as photos videos voice memos and notes is synchronized with Palm Desktop software e Click the HotSync Manager icon 6 and select Custom Check the following e Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop down list e Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files If not select each application click Change and then choose Synchronize the files e Make sure that the correct application name is selected For example the older version of Calendar was called Date Book If you have upgraded from an older handheld make sure that Calendar is set to Synchronize the files and Date Book is set to Do Nothing e If you synchronize your handheld with more than one computer click Settings and select Enable synchronization to multiple PCs for each application you want to synchronize This helps avoid duplicating the same information on a single computer Ry NOTE Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize Otherwise it applies during the next synchronization only e Be sure that the application you want is installed Reinstall
461. the handheld screen gives you access to valuable tools and is accessible in all views 2 B 7 27 memory for example a kay name or a phone number Menu X System info Did You Know The S info i Svi S SYSTENRINIO on Bluetooth controls shows the current time on Full screen writing the status bar Screen rotation Input Home Find Menu System info Alert Bluetooth controls Full screen writing Screen rotation Input Tungsten T5 Handheld Select once to open Favorites twice to open Applications Select to open the Find dialog box Select to open the menu for the current screen Select to open the system information dialog box The dialog box shows the date and time available memory and battery level and allows you to adjust system sounds and screen brightness Select to display the Reminders screen Select to display the Bluetooth dialog box where Bluetooth functionality can be turned on and off and you can connect to another Bluetooth device Select to turn full screen writing on and off Select to switch between landscape and portrait view Select to switch between showing and hiding the input area Select and hold to display the input area selection menu 22 CHAPTER 2 Basics Did You Know You can customize which way the screen rotates in landscape mode by choosing right or left handed rotation Tungsten T5 Handheld Rotati
462. the maximum size the faster the synchronization but any messages over that size are cut On the other hand choosing a larger size means that more messages can be completely synchronized without being cut but synchronization takes longer Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 353 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages f L pem Did You Know You can synchronize your Outbox Sent Trash and any other folders you create Tungsten T5 Handheld Cont d Days To Synchronize Mail Set how many days worth of email should be synchronized Select 0 to synchronize all email in the Inbox during the next synchronization Select another number if you want to synchronize email for today and some days before today For example if you enter 2 email is synchronized for today and yesterday if you enter 3 email is synchronized for today yesterday and the day before and so on If you select 0 you may get very long synchronization times If you select a low number such as 1 or 2 not all of your messages may be synchronized The default is 7 days Synchronize unread mail only Select whether to synchronize all email between your computer and your handheld or unread email only By default the box is unchecked meaning that all email is synchronized Download attachments Select whether to download attachments during synchronization By default the box is checked if you uncheck it only the body text of any message contain
463. the photo is in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card select the correct location from the list e If the photo is located elsewhere on your handheld s internal drive select Find More and browse to the item Rotate the photo Rotate Picture a Select the photo you want in sil aad the Thumbnail or List View b Open the menus c Select Rotate Picture from the Media menu d Select the rotation you want Y Continued 188 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos 4 Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail or List View 4 Done Viewing and editing photo or video details Tip You can also view details 1 for an entire album including last date changed number of items in the album and 2 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EE Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the location on your size by opening the handheld or an expansion card of the photo or video you want to view Album menu and selecting Album Details e f the photo or video is in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card select the correct location from the list e If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your handheld s internal drive select Find More and browse to the item 3 Select the photo or video whose details you want to view Ny Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 189 CHAP
464. thing else on your SMS Sending and receiving text messages wirelessly using your handheld s handheld go to Bluetooth technology www palmOne com support tungstent5 Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Bluetooth wireless Questions technology Tungsten T5 Handheld 275 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages In this chapter Upgrading an existing email account About email accounts Creating an account Managing email accounts Getting and reading email Sending an email message Working with email folders Working with email messages Working with attachments Synchronizing email on your handheld with email on your computer Advanced VersaMail application features Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld If you already know how efficient email is for staying in touch with personal and business contacts the VersaMail application brings you a new level of convenience email on the go If you are a new email user you will enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends family and colleagues anywhere you can make an Internet connection You can attach files such as photos to email messages as well as Microsoft Word Excel or PowerPoint files or receive any of these file types as attachments to view and edit at your convenience You can also synchronize email messages on your handheld with email on your computer Wind
465. ting Memos Tip The Memos list shows the first line of each memo so make sure that first line is something you will recognize Did You Know You can connect your handheld to a portable keyboard and type your memos on the go without carrying around a heavy laptop You can purchase a variety of portable keyboards Visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 and click the Accessories link Tip You can change the size of the text in Memos to enhance readability Tungsten T5 Handheld Viewing and editing a memo 1 2 Go to Applications and select Memos 6 View or edit the memo a In the Memos list select the memo you want SETIA 2of6 gt Unfiled 1 Power Tips 3 Quote of the Day 4 Birthday Wish List 5 Edits for Draft 2 6 Hot New Restaurants b Read or edit the memo and then select Done 4 Done 239 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Moving memos in your memos list Did You Know You can move memos up or down in your memos list For example you might want to keep all If you use Palm Desktop memos on a certain topic grouped together software for synchronizing you can send a memo to your 1 computer by synchronizing and then open the memo on your computer in an 2 application such as Go to Applications and select Memos 6 Move a memo Microsoft Word for a Locate the memo you want ara a formatting and so on 1 Power Tips 1 Power Tips Right click the me
466. tion 383 Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or Off nessssssssessees 384 Synchronizing handheld mail server IMAP folders from the Options MON sirtarin aenn denien aa Eai OaE 384 Working with root fOIGErSiis ccccisssssccceriascceeeiavanccseensanscseeninancstanerens 385 Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL sssssessssrsssrrssrrssrrrrrrrrren 385 Related tOpiCSisss cadcccssscciceesdssaganadhds e A EENE 386 Chapter 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 387 Creating and sending a text message ss sssssssssssssssssesssresrrrnnnnnnnnneernennt 388 Receiving and viewing a text message s ssssssssssssssreserrsnnsnesnesrennennnnnnn 391 Editing a draft text MOSSAGC gt sissi rera iganna iad aaora 393 Setting advanced messaging features ccseeeeeceeseeneeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeess 394 Related WOPIGS iniii a E E taancaetipaenveteesas 396 Chapter 17 Browsing the Web ssssssssssessssssssensnrrnnsnnnnnne 397 ACCESSING WED Page rsisi aeaa aaa ad 398 Accessing a web page using the action bar ssssssssssssissssssssesereseens 398 Accessing a web page using the address field ccccsseeeeeeeseees 399 Tungsten T5 Handheld xii Using a password to access a WED page ese cetcsscceceeeeteteeeeeetaaeeeeees 400 Finding information ON a WED page csscccccesssteeeeesenteeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 401 Quickly JUMPING tO a PAGE sisiesccciiseassccccesssceesectesceedesedeseenveesnsnesveeeasseens 402 Following a MAK zca a
467. tion you enter in one place your handheld or computer is automatically updated in the other IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize the info in your handheld s program memory at least once a day so that you always have an up to date backup copy of this info on your computer 1 Connect your handheld to your computer a Plug the USB sync cable into a USB port on the back of your computer b Plug the cable into your handheld N Continued CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Press the power button to turn on your handheld Continue with the onscreen instructions Synchronize your handheld with your computer by pressing the HotSync button on the USB sync cable 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 9 CHAPTER 1 Before You Begin You must have completed CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop software as your desktop application for synchronization in order to switch to Outlook Note that you can choose Outlook as your synchronization software for Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos during CD installation Tungsten T5 Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Switching to another desktop software application WINDOWS ONLY During CD installation you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your handheld You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts appo
468. tions c cceeeeeenees 352 Account information SCIONS ccccccceesseeeeeeenteeeessenaneeeesseaeeeeesenas 356 VersaMail conduit SHOMCUTS oiiro naiak 357 xi Excluding one or more accounts during synchronization 358 Synchronizing AN ACCOUNT esada aaa aaia 358 Synchronizing Multiple ACCOUNTS cccceeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeenes 358 Using SSL with the CONUICt sesiiresisseiceersissiseseriereststerronsicserrisricsserinnei 359 Advanced VersaMail application features ccccceceeessceeeeeseneeeeeeseeaaes 359 Setting preferences for getting sending and deleting email 360 Adding or updating a contact directly from a message s s 362 Creating and using FiItCrS ce ceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeesseneaeeesseeenas 363 Turning filters ON and OFF ssscicsooeascessiassse cedvdassacccocnassaxariveasacceewenss acess 365 Editing or deleting a filter cccecceeeeecsseeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeneess 367 Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail nsss 368 Adding APOP to an account ccstccceeessseeeeeeseneeeeseeenaeeeeseeeaaeeessennaes 377 Setting advanced account preferences ccccceceeesseeeeseseneeeeeeeaaes 378 Changing email header Cetalls cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeees 380 Backing Up mail database sssrinin 381 Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly ccscceseseeeeeeenees 383 Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchroniza
469. tions menu and selecting Add Signature Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Enter the recipient s address using one of the following methods Select To Select the recipient s name on the Mobile Number Lookup list and then select Add Enter directly Enter the recipient s mobile phone number on the To line In the area below the To line enter the text of your message Number tcharacters New Message SORT Length 20 amp OPTIONAL You can store your message in your Draft category and work on it later a Open the menus b Select Draft on the Message menu Y Continued 389 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 6 Send your message Select Send Sends the current message now Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 390 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Receiving and viewing a text message Tip If you want to check your messages but you don t want to send the messages stored in your Outbox open the 2 Select Send amp Check Messages menu and select Check Go to Applications and select SMS D Tip 3 Select the message to open and read it You can also send all the messages in your Outbox FYE unread gt inbox by opening the Messages 336558986 Let s meetat From 336558986 3336558986 ihave some ide Date
470. tions you need N NOTE An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category Placing an entry into a category 1 Open an application that contains a category option In Calendar go to Day View 2 Open an entry In Note Pad only skip to step 5 4 Open the Details dialog box Contacts Select Edit and then select Details All other applications Select Details Y Continued 494 CHAPTER 23 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip to pee AN ANNY mto 5 Place the entry into a category different category simply select a different Category a Select a category from the Category pick list from the Category pick a Contact ZA Unfilled Contact Edit Personal Category list i First name Lee Picture 2 Show in List Y Work w Home Catagory Personal i q aisya Unfiled Cancel Edit Categories b If necessary select OK c If necessary select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 495 CHAPTER 23 Using Categories to Organize Information Placing an application into a category Tungsten T5 Handheld 1 2 Go to Applications Open the Category dialog box a Open the menus b Select Category in the App menu Place the application into a category Category Quick Tour Main Calc Main a Select the pick list next to the f Calendar v Main application you want to place Card Info i Contacts into a category Dialek Drive Mode b Se
471. to browse the web page Press Left or Right to jump to previous or next link When a link is highlighted press Select to go to the link Press Up and Down to scroll through the web page Tungsten T5 Handheld CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web Changing how you view a page You can change how you view web pages by selecting different display views and dragging the screen to view different parts 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page you want to search Select the Display View icon in the action bar Display View icon gt REB OOH Blazer Q gt BeA E Fhttp www yahoo com 7 http www yaho Optimized Jo Ee iar y w Select from one of the following views Optimized Displays a modified version of the web page so that it is optimized for handheld viewing Wide Page Displays the web page as it would appear in a desktop computer web browser Ny Continued 403 CHAPTER 17 Browsing the Web 5 amp OPTIONAL If the web page is larger than your screen you can tap and drag the stylus to move the web page in any direction to view different parts of the web page To activate the Tap and Drag scrolling you must set the Tap and Drag setting in the General Preferences tab under the Options menu This feature is disabled when you turn on Writing Area Preferences and use the full screen for Graffiti 2 writing 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 404
472. to send and receive email messages or to When you enter a URL in browse the web Web Pro or select Get and Send in the VersaMail application a connection automatically initiates with the last used service Tungsten T5 Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Tungsten T5 Handheld Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Setting up a connection for wireless synchronization 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth Open the PC Setup dialog box a Select Setup Devices b Select PC Setup c Select Bluetooth HotSync d Select Next Select a computer and select Next The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active If your computer did not show up on the discovery results select Find More to search again Ny Continued PC Setup To set up a connection or wireless HotSync tap below A Set up a wireless conneciton and data service for your PC Bluetooth HotSync Set up your PC for Bluetooth HotSync Discovery Results i Show v Nearby devices Select a PC S BRAD 265 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Tip To synchronize with your 4 computer go to HotSync Manager and select the pick list below the Set up a connection for wireless synchronization a Follow the onscreen instructions for steps 1 3 selecting Next after each step HotSync icon to select To launch HotSync Manager on your computer click the HotSync Manage
473. ts Save view or install the downloaded attachments 4 Done Attaching files You can attach files on your handheld in program memory or on the internal drive to email messages you send For example you can attach photos or videos Word Excel and PowerPoint files and entries from Contacts Calendar Memos and Tasks You can also attach files from an expansion card inserted in your handheld s expansion slot The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments The maximum number of attachments for any email message is ten regardless of the attachments total size You can attach a file to forwarded messages and replies as well as messages you create 340 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages NOTE The procedure for attaching photos and videos is slightly different from the procedure for attaching other types of files Did You Know You can attach any file 1 type from your handheld s internal drive or an expansion card Open the Attachments screen a On the message screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Attachment Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 341 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you select Files on Card the VersaMail application displays all file types on the card You can select a particular file type or select All Files to view all files on the card Tin To
474. ts 119 adjusting fade setting for 514 517 attaching to e mail 343 copying 198 200 448 deleting 192 199 e mailing 202 finding 182 moving 193 previewing 180 saving 179 selecting 43 selecting as backgrounds 168 513 517 setting slide show delay option 186 sharing 94 200 sorting 195 storing 568 transferring to handheld 78 viewing 568 viewing details of 189 190 Photos application See Media application Photos icon 603 pick lists 25 Picture box 119 PIM applications transferring info to handheld 77 plain text messages 308 309 328 playing back video clips 182 playing music 203 204 212 215 603 playlists 209 211 deleting songs on 217 editing 216 naming 213 removing 218 reordering music on 217 See also music selecting music from 212 215 troubleshooting 604 plug in applications 561 POP protocol 283 POP servers 279 284 286 333 345 Port Number option 287 290 portable keyboards 239 portrait view 23 ports 20 Post Office Protocol POP 283 See also POP servers power adapter 578 588 power button 20 power consumption options 542 power preferences 541 543 Power Preferences screen 542 power saving settings 542 543 PowerPoint files creating and viewing 175 transferring to handheld 78 PRC applications 561 precautions 579 587 621 predefined service profiles 554 preferences 177 396 512 566 See also customizing Preferences command 170 Preferences screen 27 Prefs icon 27 preinstalled applications 26 113 pre
475. ttings a On the Mail Servers screen select Details b Select the Options pick list and then select Address Servers Mail Servers Mail Servers Options PESEE Options w Address Servers Incoming Mail Email Addr Outgoing Mail Email Address jsuser yahoi Advanced Incoming Advanced Outgoing Incoming Marserver c Do any of the following Email address Enter the email address of the account you are accessing such as examplename yahoo com Incoming mail server Enter the name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com Outgoing mail server Enter the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com d Select OK Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 370 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Jid You Know The POP protocol does 4 not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP Manage incoming mail server settings a On the Mail Servers screen select Details email account the b Select the Options pick list and then select Incoming Mail VersaMail application i downloads all messages ManServers Mail Servers from the server Options v Options v Incoming Mail regardless of whether Ner ereo aa acdan eaa m ONLY yoa Nave FOSG THANT M Leave jal imad outgoing E b M Leave ai on copier example on your desktop or on the web and regardless of whether this box is checked c Do any of the following Get unrea
476. u are unable to send information to another device try moving closer to the receiving device Tungsten T5 Handheld Using the Send command You can send information from within an application such as a photo or video a contact or an appointment to other Palm OS handheld users You can also send a category of information or even an entire application You can use the Send command in many applications to send information wirelessly using one of the following methods e Using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e As an attachment to an e mail message e As part of a text message Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth technology You can use your handheld s built in Bluetooth technology to send information directly to another device that includes Bluetooth technology You must be within range of the receiving device to send information using Bluetooth technology The maximum range is approximately 25 30 feet 8 10 meters however the shorter the range the more quickly and accurately you can send information 438 CHAPTER 19 Sharing Information Did You Know In most applications the leftmost menu is named Record Tungsten T5 Handheld Select the information you want to send a Open an application b Select the entry you want Select a sending method Scad Wah Bluetooth a Open the menus Messages VersaMail b Select t
477. ucseeareeets 417 CHANGING VOU startpage ics sesseeeusaddecevseceshensxsandvaats shan Sanden ses thavbanctaay 419 Setting advanced browser Options cccccccsssseeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeens 420 Changing how images are downloaded ce eeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeees 420 Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and Tonma Nelda cercen rr reerar rr 421 Allowing websites to remember personal information 0 422 Setting preferences for storing WED pages scsecesseeeeseeenteteeeeeenees 423 Setting preferences for USING a proxy Server seecceeeeeseenteeeeeeeeaaes 425 Setting whether to accept JavaScript ccccceeeeeseeeseeeseesneeeeeseenaes 427 R lated TOPICS sirini rana edadea oaea KEren 428 Tungsten T5 Handheld xiii Tungsten T5 Handheld Chapter 18 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeaaeesnenees 429 Dialing a NUMBER ssrin nnno aaia AE aaar Naai 430 Entering GWU MID SM sssaaa a adedana a reacts 430 Redialing the most recently used number nssssssssssssssrsrrrsrsssssrsrsnnns 431 Dialing a number from the Call History List sesser 432 USING speeddial sasiscccisscensscecnccsisatceecsddecdaesnta tessa tai oa arean 433 Adding a speed dial entry csssiicsccssascacess sastsazconsacceccecasstnnencevsectasenaseaans 433 Dialing a number using speed dial sssssssssssssssssssssssrnsnnnnnesssssrreens 434 Editing a speed dial GAtry ss
478. umentation included with your Bluetooth device for information In either case you must use the same passkey on both the device and your handheld Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair See the documentation included with your phone for information Trusted Devices i Bluetooth Security Enter passkey for d Select Done 4 Done 272 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Setting advanced Bluetooth features These advanced settings are used in special circumstances Storing recently found device names Tip When you enable or disable the device name cache you control whether or not your handheld retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place By default the device name cache is enabled which means the names of devices that are found are stored in cache The next time the device is discovered the name appears very quickly If the remote device name has changed disabling and then enabling the device name cache forces your handheld to retrieve the new device name 1 Go to Favorites and select Bluetooth 2 Open the menus 3 Select Options and then select Disable device name cache The selection on the Option menu toggles to Enable device name cache This indicates that the cache is disabled 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 273 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Dev
479. up Devices b Select LAN Setup c Select Next Select a LAN and select OK The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active If the LAN did not show up on the discovery results select Find More to search again Y Continued Setup Devices i Phone Setup Messaging Dial from Contacts Internet connectivity a Browse the Web Check Email HotSync wirelessly b LAN Setup Browse the Web check Email Discovery Results i Show v Nearby devices Select a LAN a Palm a BlueGate AP B T616 Da a Unnamed Network Access Point OEP ico a Pico2 S BRAD a Pico 3 269 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices 4 Create a trusted connection BluetoothSecurity a Select Yes to add the LAN asa Enter passkey for trusted device b Select Next c Enter the passkey number for the LAN and select OK 5 Enter the username and EANGET password for the LAN and select aaa Next Enter the username and ext password for your LAN Username Password Service Name 6 Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 270 CHAPTER 14 Connecting Wirelessly to Other Devices Creating trusted pairs Did You Kn When yo w After you have set up your phone and computer as trusted devices you may want to set up other ur ha n ha and trusted devices such as a friend s handheld When your device recognizes a trusted device your Bluetooth ar
480. up info e Add more games and other software e Add accessories e Store carry and exchange info 567 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld What type of expansion cards can I use Key Term Your handheld is compatible with SDIO SD and MultiMediaCard expansion cards SDIO SDIO An acronym for expansion cards let you add accessories to your handheld SD and MultiMediaCard expansion Secure Digital input cards let you store information and applications output Tip How can expansion cards help me Looking for a handy way to carry your expansion cards You can purchase a variety of carrying Listen to music Store and share songs using expansion cards Transfer songs between your expansion card and the Music folder on your internal drive Use the included RealPlayer software to listen to music on your handheld cases Visit View and store more photos If your digital camera sold separately uses compatible expansion www palmOne com cards you can quickly view your photos by simply inserting the card into the expansion slot on mytungstent5 and click your handheld Using palmOne Media with your expansion cards gives you more options to the Accessories link store and share your photos And if your camera doesn t use compatible expansion cards don t worry you can still view your photos Add games and other software Purchase popular games dictionaries travel guides and more To check out the variety of expansion cards a
481. ur ISP or your dial in server This field can contain multiple lines of text but only two lines appear onscreen Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial in server and then select OK The word Assigned appears in this box and you don t need to enter a password when you log in Connection Select the Connection pick list and select the method you want to use to connect to your ISP or to a dial in server See Connecting your handheld to other devices for info on creating and configuring connection settings If you re using a phone or modem Phone Setup connection enter the phone settings a Select the Phone box Y Continued 551 CHAPTER 25 Customizing Your Handheld Tip It s a good idea to add at Cont d least three commas before your calling card number to allow for the cue delay Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds Tungsten T5 Handheld b Enter any of the following settings and then select OK Phone Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial in server Dial prefix Check the Dial prefix box and then enter the number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line For example many offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting check the Disable call waiting box and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting Cal
482. us www palmOne com g mytungstents e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Categories Organizing contacts by type and sorting them Support If you re having problems Entering Transferring contact information from other applications such as databases with Contacts or with Information spreadsheets and other organizer software anything else on your i F F Privacy Keeping contacts private by turning on security options handheld go to a 7 q LEE www palmOne com Sharing Sending contacts to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless support tungstent5 technology on your handheld VersaMail Sending contacts as attachments to email messages SMS Sending contacts as part of a text message Tungsten T5 Handheld 136 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar In this chapter Scheduling events Color coding your schedule Setting an alarm Rescheduling an event Deleting events Checking your schedule Customizing your calendar Working with Calendar on your computer Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Staying on top of your schedule is an important part of being productive both at work and at home Calendar can help you remember appointments and spot schedule conflicts You can view your calendar by day week or month or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks with your appointments Benefits of Calendar e Track current future and past
483. user ae amp mbronte user Cmmi Cox 2 Create the profile a Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK b Close the Users window Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 13 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Select the profile from the User pop up menu and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile Set the profile s conduit settings a From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings b Select the conduit settings for the profile 4 Done Synchronizing with a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 1 Tungsten T5 Handheld Begin synchronization a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into the Multi connector on your handheld b Press the HotSync button on the USB sync cable Y Continued CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Transfer the profile information w Installing a profile will overwrite all data currently a Click Profiles on the handheld Are you sure you want to do this b Select the profile you want to a lk load on the handheld and w click OK c Click Yes 4 Done The next time you synchronize that handheld Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld Tungsten T5 Handheld 15 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Begin synchronization a Connect the USB sync cable to the U
484. uttons Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your handheld and the HotSync button For example if you use Memos often you can assign Memos to a button so that you don t have to scroll through Applications View whenever you want to use that application 1 Open Buttons Preferences Preferences Select an application to a Goto Applications customize each button Favorites b Select Prefs 6 E 7 Contacts Pick list c Select Buttons 2 Select the pick list next to the button you want to reassign and select the application that you want to assign to that button NV Continued 523 CHAPTER 25 Full screen penstroke A stroke that is drawn from the bottom of the input area to the top of the screen You can use this stroke as a quick way to do a selected task such as opening the Graffiti 2 help screen Tungsten T5 Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Assign the full screen pen stroke a Select More b Select the pick list and select the action you want to assign to the full screen pen stroke c Select OK Assign the HotSync button a Select HotSync b Select the pick list and select the application you want to assign to the button c Select OK Select Done 4 Done Select a feature you can access by dragging your stylus from the graffiti 2 writing area to the top of the screen A T Graffiti 2 Help 2 P
485. vailable for your handheld visit www palmOne com mytungstent5 and click the Accessories link Add accessories Attach SDIO accessories such as a presentation module to your handheld Store all your info Never worry about running out of space on your handheld Purchase as many expansion cards as you need to store your music photos videos and other information Expansion cards come in a variety of capacities and they re very small easy to store and affordably priced Tungsten T5 Handheld 568 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Removing an expansion card N NOTE Your handheld comes with a dummy card inserted into the expansion card slot You must remove this card before you can put a real card into the slot Tip To prevent damaging the 1 card and the info on it always wait for your handheld to finish writing to the expansion card before you remove the card from the slot Push lightly against the card with your thumb until you hear the confirmation tone 2 Slide the card out of the expansion slot 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 569 CHAPTER 26 Expanding Your Handheld Inserting an expansion card 1 Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the front of the handheld 2 Push the card in with your thumb until you feel the card click in place and hear the confirmation tone N NOTE No confirmation tone Check the Sounds amp Alerts Preferences to make sure t
486. ve information from an intruder who uses an automated means to try every possible combination until the password is found Use intrusion protection if you keep highly confidential information on your handheld information if intrusion protection is triggered IMPORTANT If you limit the number of password attempts be sure to use Keylock to prevent i DIO YOU Anew accidental password attempts while your handheld is in a purse or pocket Incorrect Quick Unlock attempts are not included in the intrusion protection counter Tungsten T5 Handheld 486 CHAPTER 22 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private 1 Open Security a Go to Applications b Select Prefs Peay c Select Security 2 Set the number of password attempts a Select Options b If necessary enter your password and then select OK c Select the Intrusion Protection box d Enter the number of password attempts that are allowed before selected information on your handheld is deleted Y Continued Preferences Private Records v Show Security Options i O Encrypt data when locked Encryption type v RC4 Intrusion Protection Intrusion Protection box 487 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Tip The number of password attempts must be between 5 and 99 Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 Select the information that is deleted after the set number of failed attempts a
487. ven if you identify one associated with an application that is causing a problem on your handheld since that application may use other PRC files Tungsten T5 Handheld 614 Getting Help This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up customize and use your handheld However you may occasionally run into an issue that is not addressed in this guide Here are some resources to help you if that happens Self help resources If you run into a problem with your handheld be sure to check these resources first e Answers to common questions about your handheld and its features e The Palm Desktop online Help e The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User s Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD e The palmOne Knowledge Library accessible at www palmOne com support tungstent5 e The most recent palmOne Tungsten T5 handheld HelpNotes on your regional website Tungsten T5 Handheld 615 CHAPTER 29 Getting Help Technical support If after reviewing the self help resources you cannot solve your problem go to www palmOne com support tungstent5 or send an email to your regional Technical Support office Before requesting technical support please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem When you do contact Technical Support please provide the following information e The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using e The actual
488. venues run east west Learning to move around your handheld is similar Most Palm OS applications use the same set of application controls So once you learn how to use these standard controls you ll be driving all over town and you won t even need a map Benefits e Find and open applications quickly e Access extra features with menus e Move around applications with one hand using the 5 way navigator e Locate information in any application with the Find feature 33 CHAPTER 3 Press Home once to open Favorites press Home twice to open Applications Switch between Favorites and Applications by pressing Home Did You Know You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Favorites or Applications View lip Customize Favorites to display folders for example a project folder that you access often Select the folder to view its contents Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Opening applications You can open applications from Favorites View or Applications View or by using the Files application Ry NOTE Some applications are listed differently in Favorites and Applications View For example the Photos amp Videos entry in Favorites opens the Media application which is listed as Media in Applications View The application icons are similar in both Favorites and Applications Using Favorites Favorites View contains up to 32 items and can include applications sp
489. video to view Thumbnails is an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot 4 To see a full screen view of a photo or to play a video select the photo or video from the thumbnails A video automatically starts playing when you select it Y Continued Tungsten T5 Handheld 182 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Did You Know When a photo is zoomed 5 For photos press Up or Down on out the size of the photo the 5 way to zoom in or out If appears above the Rotate you zoom out icons appear for and Send icons You can rotating or sending the photo also select Done in the zoomed out view to return to the Thumbnail or List View 6 Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the Thumbnail View screen 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 183 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Photos and Videos Viewing a photo or video in the List View 1 Go to Favorites and select Photos amp Videos EB 2 Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the location on your handheld or an expansion card of the photo or video you want to view e If the photo or video is in the Photos amp Videos folder on your handheld s internal drive or on an expansion card select the correct location from the list e f the photo or video is located elsewhere on your handheld s internal drive select Find More and browse to the item 3 If the List View is not displayed icons select List in the lower l
490. vsdapasessbenaserrancaaaniasess 307 Selecting whether to receive messages as HTML or plain text 308 Customizing the font of messages you are reading csceeeeeeneees 310 Sending an email MESSAGE ccesseeeeceesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeess 311 Entering an address directly in the To field ccccscsesseeeessesereeeees 313 Tungsten T5 Handheld x Tungsten T5 Handheld Entering an address using Contacts ecceeeceeeeeneee eee eeteeeeteeeeeeaeee 314 Entering an address using Smart Addressing sseseceeeeeeseeteeeeees 315 Attaching a personal signature e sesceenceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaeeeeaeeees 316 SOMG MOU y a E A E dxakedanud doakedddaedands teed densities 317 SENG retry NOLHICAT ONS cissisissiscceveesiieccvetsccscetessenccenisdeecevdssseaceatess vers 317 Modifying messages in the OUtDOX cccceeeesseeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 318 Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications cccccseesesseeeeeeeenes 318 Working with email fOlders cccccccseeeeeessesceeeeceeeeeeeesseeaaeeeesenaaeeeseeenaes 319 Viewing another folder cccccccsssseeeceecsneeeeseeeneeeeeseenaeeeessenaaeeessennaes 319 Customizing the appearance of the message list s ccccceeeeeees 320 Moving messages between folders cssccccccsssseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenieeeeeeees 322 Creating and editing mail folders ccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneneeeesennaes 324 Working with email M SSAGE
491. wall you may not need to set up a VPN to access your corporate email account See the following section for details Before you set up a corporate email account check with your company s system administrator to get the following information Username and password This might be your Windows username and password your Lotus Notes ID username and password or something else The VersaMail application provides strong 128 bit AES encryption for your password Protocol Many corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail In rare cases your company server may use the POP protocol Ry NOTE Some corporate mail servers do not use either protocol If so you cannot send and receive email wirelessly from your handheld You can synchronize email on your handheld with email in Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes on your computer Tungsten T5 Handheld 279 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Incoming and outgoing mail server settings Check with your company s system administrator to obtain these settings With a corporate email account you may be able to access the following types of mail servers among others e Microsoft Exchange e IBM Lotus Domino e Sun iPlanet VPNs If you want to access email on your handheld using your corporate email account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN on your handheld A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the company s fi
492. week within the month such as the 4th Thursday or select Date to select the same date within the month such as the 15th Select OK 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 228 CHAPTER 11 as 2 Did You Kno Overdue tasks have an exclamation point next to the due date Your Task Preferences settings control which tasks appear in the Tasks list such as completed or due tasks To change these settings open the Options menu and select Preferences Tip Create a new category for tasks by selecting Edit Categories in the Category pick list Tungsten T5 Handheld WIEVareve CAOT Ey Organizing your tasks Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do while at other times you want to see only certain types of tasks 1 Go to Applications and select Tasks 6 2 In the Tasks list select one of these options All Displays all your tasks Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame Select the pick list in the upper right corner of the screen to select Due Today Last 7 Days Next 7 Days or Past Due Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category Select the pick list in the upper right corner to select a different category I MEt coo EAA al GES LEA All Date RE Business 117 7 D 2 Distribute LESTA E Personal 11 10 O 1 Update pro Next 7 Days 3 Up 11 14 Past Due 1 mit monthl Edit Categories 11 14 11 26 11 27 229 CHAPTER 11 WIEVareve C
493. ween the internal drive and the card Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Install the files on your handheld a Click Add File b Close the Install Handheld Files window c Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Using File Transfer to transfer info to your handheld Ry NOTE Ona Mac computer use Drive Mode to move files to your handheld s internal drive WINDOWS ONLY On a Windows computer File Transfer provides a live window onto your handheld s large internal drive Use File Transfer to copy move and manage files and folders on your handheld File Transfer copies and moves items instantly you do not need to synchronize With File Transfer you can also work on your handheld even while transferring files Using File Transfer quickly move and carry large amounts of your important Office files photos music videos and other files or folders on your handheld Access and edit this information on your handheld or using Drive Mode from another computer computer must support standard USB removable drives File Transfer installs automatically when you install Palm Desktop software IMPORTANT Applications files and folders moved to your handheld s internal drive with File Transfer are not automatically backed up during synchronization Use File Transfer to copy or move the updated files and folders to your computer or to back up the contents
494. werPoint presentation that is automatically converted for optimal viewing on your handheld e Open Office files received as attachments to incoming email messages and attach files to outgoing messages e View files such as spreadsheets in landscape mode to see more information across the screen 175 CHAPTER 8 Managing Your Office Files Opening files from within Documents In the Documents application you can view and open any Word Excel or PowerPoint file on your handheld Tip When you are working on a file save it to a specific location on your handheld s internal drive by opening the menus 2 Go to Favorites and select Documents amp OPTIONAL If the file you Documents To Go siibicly SAVAT ee eae QName Tsze 6 Pea ame ize the File menu and then browse for the file Travel info 35K navigating to the location Boers Pay he e GolT an 1 where you want to save a Open the menus and then Getting Started Ti 74K the file select File Tip b Select Search For Files You can choose to synchronize a Word Show All Formats Excel or PowerPoint file from within the Documents application even if you copied it using File Transfer See 3 the Documents To Go application on your 4 Done computer for information Select the file you want from the list Tungsten T5 Handheld 176 CHAPTER 8 Managing Your Office Files Related Topics My Handheld Cl
495. when you initiate synchronization on your handheld HotSync Manager must be running You can choose whether HotSync Manager always runs automatically or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync Manager 1 Open the synchronization options screen a Click the HotSync Manager icon amp in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen b Select Setup Y Continued 85 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Tip Use the default setting 2 or io ge j P Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your Always available if you re f A handheld not sure which option you want up General Local Modem Network Tip r HotSync Manager If you select Manual you amen staite tn Sei a must tu rn off HotSync C Available only when the Palm Desktop is running Manager which is always gach sian ebiaiiiaibesaioal on by default Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower Lx cea vv He right corner of your screen and then click Exit To start HotSync Manager when you want to synchronize click Start and then select Always available HotSync Manager runs automatically every time you initiate synchronization on your handheld Available only when the Palm Desktop software is running You must open Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync Manager to run Programs Navigate to Manual You must ma
496. ww palmOne com intl support Ry NOTE Palm Desktop software that is downloaded from the palmOne website does not include additional software available on the CD Tungsten T5 Handheld 3 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Step 1 Charging your handheld Before You Begin If you re upgrading from 1 another Palm Powered device synchronize your Connect your handheld a Plug the USB sync cable into old handheld with your your handheld and into a USB old desktop software port on the back of your computer Tip After the initial charge b Plug the AC charger into the charge your handheld at Multi connector on the sync least half an hour every cable and into an outlet day 2 Charge your handheld for three hours Be sure your handheld is fully charged before going on to Step 2 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 4 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer What you should know about your handheld s battery While your handheld is charging take a minute to learn about the battery e If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low recharge your handheld Also recharge your handheld if it doesn t turn on when you press the power button N NOTE The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your handheld When you recharge your handheld
497. xt format If you choose HTML any messages sent to you in HTML format are displayed with basic HTML formatting intact Other messages are displayed as plain text If you choose Plain Text all messages are displayed as plain text regardless of the format in which they were sent Default setting is HTML Signature Enables you to attach a default signature to all your outgoing messages 4 Done 361 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Adding or updating a contact directly from a message You can add an email address in Contacts directly from the body of a received email message Tip You can also update an 1 existing Contacts record with a new email address or create a second Contacts record for a name that has an existing record The procedure is the same as for adding a new Contacts record If you select Add to 2 Contacts from the body of an email message anda record already exists for the recipient name you are prompted to either update the email address Open the Add Contact dialog box a Open the message you want b On the message screen open the menus c Select Options and then select Add to Contacts amp OPTIONAL If a Display Name exists for this Contacts record the dialog box displays the name in the Last name and First name fields If the Last name and First name fields are blank enter the first and last name associated with the From email address for the rec
498. xt or previous application category Center Inserts the selection highlight When the selection highlight is present Up Down Right or Left Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direction Drive Mode Expense Favorites Center Opens the selected item Tungsten T5 Handheld 42 CHAPTER 3 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Moving around list screens In list screens use the 5 way to select and move between entries such as notes memos contacts or photos Up or Down Center Scrolls an entire screen of entries as long as there s nothing highlighted Hold down to accelerate the scrolling Inserts the selection highlight When the selection highlight is present Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or next entry Center Displays the selected entry Left Removes the selection highlight Contacts amp gt jtm jtm com 302 555 9512M Maroni Anthony 415 555 7775 W Nguyen Mai 555 3434W Nosuch Don donn example com Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234 H Speier Lane 831 555 7534M Taylor David 650 555 9278 W Technical Support Venkat Raja raja anyisp com 555 2367 W 43 CHAPTER 3 Tungsten T5 Handheld Moving Around in Applications Moving around entry screens In entry screens use the 5 way to scroll within the current entry or between entries Up Down Right or Left Center Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direct
499. y 1 Open the Empty Trash dialog box a Open the menus b Select Empty Trash from the Message menu N NOTE If Auto Empty Mail from Trash is selected in VersaMail Preferences a message asks if you want to delete the trash amp OPTIONAL Select Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether the messages are set to be deleted on the server Select one of the following options for emptying the trash To delete messages from your handheld as well as from the server Select Both Select Yes if you want to update the server now To delete the message from only your handheld now Select Handheld 4 Done 331 CHAPTER 15 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting the trash to be emptied automatically Did You Know By default Auto Empty 1 Mail from Trash is selected and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Week Open the VersaMail Preferences a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences 2 Select the settings for automatically Preferences ay emptying the trash General Advanced System M Enable Smart Addressing a Select the Advanced tab M Auto Empty Mail from Trash v Older Than 1 Week me Timeout b Check the Auto Empty box if it is O Auto Disconnect not selected O Disconnect on Exit Modem Wait 0 c Select the pick list and then select one of the following e Email messages are automatically emptied from the trash immediately when they are
500. y Categories Managing Info Customizing Maintaining Common Questions Locating the controls on your handheld Discovering the built in software on your handheld and the additional software on the CD e Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts Entering contact information in other applications Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered devices Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Keeping information private by turning on security options Creating categories and organizing your applications and information e Adding and deleting applications on your handheld e Viewing application information e Using a photo as the Home screen background e Displaying Applications View in list format Caring for your handheld Answers to frequently asked questions about using your handheld and its applications 49 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld In this chapter How can enter information on my handheld Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing Entering information with the onscreen keyboard Entering info from Contacts into another application Editing information Related topics Tungsten T5 Handheld Whether you re scheduling a meeting with your daughter s teacher or adding a
501. y handheld ccccccecsseeeessenteeeeseeenes 51 Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing cccsceceeesteeeeeeenteeeeeeeeenaes 51 Writing in the Graffiti 2 input area oo eee cece eesteeeeceeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenes 51 Using full screen WYiting ccccccccssssseeeeeseneeeeeeeeeceeeeeseneeeesseneeeeeeseaea 52 Writing Graffiti 2 characters ccciissccccessassecccesasssccceeassesieveasarsceenaaseccees 54 Graffiti 2 alDNADCt ee eeeececeeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseeeeeeeess 56 Graffiti 2 MUMBGMS sigeedssecdescins veiianeesvedianees SEERNE NEE CATERER ES 57 Tungsten T5 Handheld iv Graffit 2 Gestures is ivceseccccsccasscvcgienssvecsannesencdasennsindvanebesucdunsasd saddens aaetis 61 Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters 6006 62 Graffiti 2 symbols and special Characters sccccesssseeeeeeeeseneeeeeees 63 Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts cciciccisccncesocsdeccssseadscecav aas concesavadcneeedanasies 64 Graffiti 2 SHOMCUtS sisi sccccsetescsceesesscencsnensssvegnendeyasdeevens sundeneassseneriaeseacees 65 Entering information with the onscreen keyboard c sscccseesteeeeeeeenaes 66 Entering info from Contacts into another application cccsscceeeeeenes 68 Editing informati n siisteccadssaccceeedsaasdeecessnedecessdandeceisdaans ccecavsaadiecestaadeedeeeaane des 70 Selecting InfOrMatiO Nes cccisesscsceicsscscccenssscescvessseedvedsssecccewesssenccee
502. yisp com Sala can easily scroll to the contact a The Phone Lookup Y Look Up mard v you want feature lets you add contact information directly into certain other 3 applications on your handheld For example you can add a name and 4 Done phone number to a memo or task Select the contact to open it Tungsten T5 Handheld 126 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You never know when you re going to need to look up an old business associate If you save an archive copy of your deleted contacts you can refer to them later by importing them Tungsten T5 Handheld Deleting a contact 1 2 Press Contacts a Open the Delete Contact dialog Delete Cota O box Delete selected Contact a Locate the contact you want M Save archive copy on PC b Open the menus c Select Delete Contact on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the contact on your computer Select OK 4 Done 127 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Customizing the Contacts list By default the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact if no work phone number is entered another entry is displayed You can customize a contact s settings to display different information on the Contacts list You can also customize the appearance of the list Did You Know If you select Work Home Fax Other Main Pager or Mobile from the pick list the first
503. you can delete it 1 Enter your password Current Password Enter current password a Select the Password box b Enter the current password and then select OK 2 Delete your password New Password a Select Unassign Do you want to create a new password now b Select Done 4 Done Tungsten T5 Handheld 475 CHAPTER 22 Tungsten T5 Handheld Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a forgotten password If you forget your password your handheld displays the password hint if you entered one to help you remember the password If you still can t remember the password you can delete it from your handheld Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your handheld before and after this procedure so you can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password 1 Open Security a Go to Applications b Select Prefs Pay c Select Security 2 Open the Incorrect Password dialog box a Select the Password box b Tap any number on the keypad and then select OK Y Continued Preferences Password Password box Quick Unlock Auto Lock Private Records v Show Current Password Enter current password 476 CHAPTER 22 Keeping Your Information Private Before You Begin To use the locking feature you must first create a password for your handheld Tip To start your
504. you no longer have to use the punctuation shift stroke for common punctuation like periods commas or Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your handheld Tip immediately recognizes them Your handheld has tables displaying all of the Graffiti 2 characters short cuts and commands Customize your handheld so you can display these characters by drawing a line from the bottom of the screen to the top Tungsten T5 Handheld 55 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 alphabet Tip You can select alternate Write lowercase letters on LEFT side ways to write some and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area Graffiti 2 characters Choose the method that s most natural for you Tip A A B B C 6 D D Customize your handheld so that you can use the entire screen to enter E a F Graffiti 2 characters not just the input area Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke H lt ck oiz na A E N lt DD Z NE lt E gt z s o O A O ce FOECEXEG gt aa lt EC E OER FD Tungsten T5 Handheld 56 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 numbers Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area Wiis 9 Geer Muah State 0 1 2 2 3 4 Ly 5 N ag gung Tungsten T5 Handheld 57 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 punctuation marks Write these marks on LEFT side of inpu
505. you paid for the expense After you synchronize yonin send sear Currency Select the currency used to pay the expense You can preset this F symbol expense information to a spreadsheet on your Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense For computer example a business lunch might be at Rosie s Cafe in San Francisco Attendees Enter the people associated with the expense c Select OK 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the expense Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Tungsten T5 Handheld 452 CHAPTER 20 Managing Your Expenses Choosing currency options Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list You can choose what currencies appear in the pick list and what symbol automatically appears in new expenses and you can even create your own currency symbol Customizing the currency pick list Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list Tip If you travel a lot update 1 the currency pick list so that you can quickly get to the symbols you need 2 Go to Applications and select Expense amp Open the Receipt Details dialog box Did Yo Use separate categories a Select an expense item for related expenses For example create a London category for a trip to London After you file your expense report for 3 Knows b Select Details Select the currency symbol s the
506. your handheld with your computer 4 Done 95 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Using the palmOne Quick Install window WINDOWS ONLY Tip Use the Add Folder 1 command to copy all the files in a folder on your computer but not the folder itself to your 2 handheld Each file is copied to a default Copy or download the file s you want to install onto your computer Double click the Quick Install icon on the desktop location on your 3 handheld based on the Sele eee Sa isdi dopdowa iist file t nd may b e lect d may be a In the User drop down list L T elk has select the name for your ee eee handheld Use Fil i an ile eae R handheld Ee sane Vics Wad Doe Transfer to copy an entire SMM sists saute folder and all of its b Click Add puzzles doc 1860KB Microsoft Word Doc contents to a location you cal m gt specify on your handheld c Select the file s you want to Drcroonion cant 520 ue tt ome opt i Name Size Type install EN 440 0ma 9 03MB Windows Media Aud Ppa 02 Are You That S 4 08MB Windows Media Aud Tip EE Tan ea To move applications d Click Open E there are way too 30 38KB JPEG Image between your handheld and the expansion card drag the files up or down Tip 4 r Synchronize your handheld with your computer If you don t see the
507. zaace sscesdetackseexensesyasszanceth atoseenaseeeas 557 Adding plug in applications oo ccccccceceeeeeeceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceneaeees 561 Seting UP VPN assscececasssstesuansdetes savezyaces mati date deans igtevt cas dvcustaaaddfecstuans doustt need 562 Setting up a VPN account on your handheld 0essseeeeeeeeees 562 Establishing a VPN CONMECHON ccssssscscccssscescceassiercensatecdecctstanddatzsreces 564 Ending a VPN CONNECTION isisisi gaa 565 PCL ALC CO LODICS esses ccecensantnecavsencacncad a a apneneeveenes 566 Chapter 26 Expanding Your Handheld 00 0008 567 What type of expansion cards Can USC cssseseessessseeeeeeeeeeseesessssseees 568 How can expansion Cards help M ccccecsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesceeeeeseneeeeeeeeeea 568 REMOVING AN EXPANSION CAN sssicceesisseccasessasececezenpssedunadnsesscuasenss iadaa aiaa 569 Inserting an EXPANSION CANA sievsscxisccssinstacenesacdeanvaxensadehesveasdaereniestuennat ened 570 Opening an application ON an expansion card csssessessesseeeeeeeeeeeess 571 Tungsten T5 Handheld xvii Opening files ON an expansion card cccccccesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseseeeeees 572 Viewing Card infOrmation ccccccccscccsseeeeeceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaaeeesssnnaneeeeseenaes 573 Renaming a card ccis scccasesyeccetennns sQecesedaceiuasteseaecedenpasadianensesscuasents denepeannes te 574 Copying applications to an expansion card ou eeeeeeeee

User Guide for the Tungsten™ T5 Handheld (v 1.1)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Guide for the Tungsten&trade; T5 Handheld (v 1.1)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Guide for the Tungsten™ T5 Handheld (v 1.1)